AgreeYa 6.8 QuickApps for SharePoint User Guide

Configuring Basic Settings using the Configuration Wizard on page 30

•

Configuration Wizard

•

qCalendar Pages

•

qCalendarView Procedure

Overview

The qCalendarView aggregates data from one or more SharePoint lists and displays it in calendar form.

The qCalendarView allows you to:

• Aggregate data from multiple lists that reside in different SharePoint sites. The lists to be aggregated are defined in the Viewed Lists property.

• Ensure the referential integrity of the records in the dependent lists by preventing the deletion of the parent record. The dependent lists are defined in the Viewed Lists property.

• View your data by Month, Week, or Day.

• Display non-recurring and recurring events from Calendar lists.

• Customize the look and feel for each part of the calendar by using a skin.

• Define a static filter using the CAML Filter expression or Complex Filter expression. The Complex Filter expression supports time functions (for example, AddDays) and time expression (such as [TODAY]) to filter out the data based on the moving time window. This feature is called Data Aging.

• Access the most common functions on the data item, such as View Properties, Edit Properties, Alert Me,

Export to ICalendar, and Delete. The author can turn off the context menu by setting the Enable Context

Menu property to False.

• Show or hide the calendar based on the site group and cross-site group membership of the currently logged-in user by using the Show User Groups and Hide User Groups properties.

• Enable the chart view to consume a filter from another web part that implements IWebPartRow or

IWebPartParameter interface.

TIP: To maintain the same look and feel across all web parts, save the web part as a template, and reimport it into the SharePoint gallery to reuse it.

NOTE: The IWebPartParameter consumer implementation is labeled with Get Filter From in the web part

Connection menu. This interface cannot be connected with the obsolete IFilterProvider or IRowProvider implementation. Do not connect this new interface with the old interface that is marked obsolete.

Configuration Wizard

qCalendarView uses a configuration wizard to walk you through basic configuration tasks. For more information on using the Configuration Wizard, see

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

qCalendar Pages

You can configure this web part through its pages that are accessible through ezEdit. qCalendar contains the following pages:

•

•

•

•

Content Page

The Content page allows you to enter the content for your web part. It contains the following:

• Primary Content

•

Optional Content

•

Search/Filter Panel

•

Filtering

Primary Content

The Primary Content page is default category. You need to configure one or more elements in this page to get started using this web part.

Primary Content contains the following:

Table 1. Primary Content

Element

Title

Viewed Lists

ID HTTP Parameter

Description

Allows you to enter a title for the Web Part, or accept the default. This field is mandatory.

See

Viewed Lists on page 8 .

Allows the qListForm and several other web parts to an HTTP Parameter called ID to identify the item to be displayed or edited. This HTTP Parameter is usually generated automatically by the viewer web part, such as qListForm or qCalendarView, when you select an item to be displayed or edited.

NOTE: If qCalendar is placed on a web part page that is contained within a document library, the page will generate an error if the value of the ID HTTP Parameter is bigger than the number of pages within the document library. To prevent this error from happening, rename the ID HTTP Parameter.

By default, the value of this property is "ID". You can change the value of this property to something else, such as LID. In that case, when you select "View Properties" or "Edit

Properties" in the context menu, the URL of the display or edit form becomes: http://mysite.com/EditFormURL.aspx?LID=xxx

NOTE: Set the same property in the qListForm to the same value.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 1. Primary Content

Element

Begin Date Field

Name

Description

Allows you to enter the name of the field in the SharePoint list that contains the begin date information. The default value is Start Time, which is the begin date field name for the SharePoint calendar list. If the calendar displays data from another type of list, you may have to adjust the value of this property. For example, if you want to display data from the Tasks list based on the Due Date of the tasks, then use Due Date as the value of this property.

End Date Field Name Allows you to enter the name of the field in the SharePoint list that contains the end date information. This property is optional. The default value is End Time, which is the end date field name for the SharePoint calendar list. If the calendar displays data from another type of list, you may have to adjust the value of this property or leave the value of the properly blank if it is not applicable.

Viewed Lists

The Viewed Lists section defines:

• the lists whose data is aggregated in the calendar

• the Dependent Lists for each list. If the Dependent Lists information is provided, the Calendar View checks whether or not there are child records in the Dependent Lists when the user tries to delete an item from the calendar. If there are, the Calendar View does not delete the selected item.

Viewed List contains the following list attributes:

Table 2. Viewed Lists

List Attributes

Advanced Mode

Site URL

List Name

Include Subsites

Description

Turn on if you want to edit Viewed Lists in XML format. For example:

<Lists>

<List SiteUrl="." ListName="wfpub" IncludeSubsites="false" IncludeThisSite="false"

IsRollUpList="false" RolledUpListName="Public Library"

UseUploadFormInLayoutsFolder="false">

</List>

</Lists>

The URL to the site that contains the list to be searched. The URL can be absolute

(http://...) or relative to the current page URL. This attribute is mandatory.

When using a relative URL, you can use a single dot (.) to denote the current path, a double dot (..) to denote the previous path, and a slash (/) to denote the root path.

The name of the SharePoint list that is edited or displayed by this Calendar View. The list name is case sensitive. If the list name contains spaces, include the spaces here as well.

To denote the current list, you can use a single dot (.) as the list name.

NOTE: This only works if the qCalendarView is contained in the AllItems.aspx. For example, if you are replacing the Microsoft Calendar View in the AllItems.aspx of the

Tasks list and you use a single dot as the ListName attribute, the ListName attribute of the qCalendarView ise set to Tasks. If you want to save the list as a template and then use it somewhere else, the name of the new list might not be Tasks and using this relative list name automatically picks up the new list name for the view.

If selected, the Calendar View searches all the subsites for a list whose name specified in the ListName and aggregate the information from those list.

NOTE: If you have many subsites, the information may take a long time to aggregate.

Use this attribute if you have only a few subsites. You must test this feature in your environment to see whether or not the response comes back in a reasonable amount of time and the request does not time out.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 2. Viewed Lists

List Attributes Description

Include This Site

Is Rollup List

Used in conjunction of the IncludeSubsites attribute. If you set this property to true, the list in the current site is not aggregated by the Calendar View. The current site is the site whose URL is specified in the SiteUrl attribute.

Indicates whether or not the list specified by the SiteUrl and ListName attributes contains the Site URLs of the lists to be aggregated instead of the data to be aggregated. If you set this to true, the list specified by the SiteUrl and ListName must have a field that contains the URL information. By default, the name of that field is

Site URL. If you use different field name, specify the name using the

SiteUrlFieldName attribute below.

Rolled Up List Name Used in conjunction with the Is Rollup List property, indicates the name of the lists to be rolled up if you check the Is Rollup List check box.

If you want to aggregate more than one list from each site specified in the rollup list, you can define more than one List elements with the same rollup list, but different

Rolled Up List Name. For example, if you want to aggregate Public Library and Private

Library document libraries from each site, you can specify the following:

Site URL Field Name Used in conjunction with the Is Rollup List property, indicates the field that contains the Site URLs of the lists to be aggregated. This attribute is optional if the field name is Site URL.

NOTE: The Site URL field must be a single line of text field.

Active Field Name Used in conjunction with the Is Rollup List property. The rollup list may contain a

Yes/No field to indicate whether or not a particular site should be included in the rollup. This property is optional if the name of this field is Active.

NOTE: The Active field must be a Yes/No field.

Reset Session Names Resets (sets to NULL) the value of the session variables whose name is specified in this attribute. You can specify multiple names by separating them with commas.

You can reset the session name if you have Multi Persistent Selectors in the target page. Usually, you must reset all but the last persistent selector session values. This ensures that the item that you want to pre-select in the last persistent selector is not filtered out by the previous persistent selector.

Set Session Name Allows the calendar to store the selected item in the session under the name specified in the attribute. The item is selected when the user clicks a hyperlink created by using the Link To, Link To Target URL, or the Link To Source properties.

You can specify this attribute when you have a Persistent Selector web part in the target page and you want that persistent selector to pre-select the item the user chose in this calendar.

Target URL

New Form URL

When the LinktoTargetUrl attribute of a specific column is selected (in the Primary

Content page), the data in that column becomes a hyperlink to the URL specified in this attribute.

NOTE: The Target Url can use the <%field name%> field replacement expression. If you are using Advanced Mode, you must use the encoded form of the < and > characters, which are < and > respectively.

NOTE: Use the LinktoTargetUrl attribute if you want each list to have a different URL; for example, when you want to aggregate multiple lists from the same workspace and connect a certain column to the display form of the list. In that case, the URL to the display form of each list can be different.

Indicates the URL where the form to create a new item in the list resides. The URL is relative to the Site URL of the list. The user is redirected to the specified URL when the New Item button in the toolbar is clicked. If not defined, the user is redirected to the NewForm.aspx of the list (or Upload.aspx for the document library).

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 2. Viewed Lists

List Attributes

Edit Form URL

Display Form URL

Description

Indicates the URL where the form to edit an item in the list resides. The URL is relative to the Site URL of the list. The user is redirected to the specified URL when the user clicks Edit Properties in the Context Menu. If not defined, the user is redirected to the EditForm.aspx of the list.

Redefining the Edit Form URL is useful if you have different ways of editing an item depending on the current view. For example, in the view for external vendor, you may want to give them an edit form that does not contain all the fields in the list.

NOTE: The ID and Source HTTP parameters are automatically appended to the Edit

Form URL during redirection.

This attribute is usually used in conjunction with the qListForm web part.

Indicates where the URL where the form to display an item in the list resides. The URL is relative to the Site URL of the list. The user is redirected to the specified URL when the user clicks View Properties in the Context Menu. If not defined, the user is redirected to the DisplayForm.aspx of the list.

Redefining the Display Form URL is useful if you have different way of displaying an item depending on the current view. For example, in the view for external vendor, you may want to give them a display form that does not contain all the fields in the list.

NOTE: The ID and Source HTTP parameters are automatically appended to the Display

Form URL during redirection.

This attribute is usually used in conjunction with the qListForm web part.

Optional Content

You can configure the following optional content:

Table 3. Optional Content

Element

Recurrence Field Name

Display Field Name

Display Format

Description

Allows you to enter the name of the field in the SharePoint list that contains the recurrence data. This property is optional. The default value is RecurrenceData, the name of the field for the SharePoint calendar list that contains the recurrence data. If the calendar displays data from another type of list, leave the value of the properly blank. Only the event list can have recurrence data (SharePoint does not allow you to add a new field to the list with Recurrence type).

Allows you to enter the name of the field in the SharePoint list that contains the title for the item. The default value is Title, which is the name of the field for the

SharePoint event list that contains the event title. If the calendar displays data from another type of list, you may have to adjust the value of this property. For example, if you want to display data from the Projects list, you may use Project

Name for the value of this property.

If you want to display the information from more than one fields, then specify the format in the Display Format property.

Allows you to enter the format of the title. You can use the <%FieldName%> field replacement expression to refer to a certain field. The FieldName is case sensitive. This property takes precedence over the Display Field Name property.

NOTE:

For more information, see Display Format on page 11 .

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 3. Optional Content

Element

Tooltip Field Name

Tooltip Format

Description

Allows you to enter the name of the field in the SharePoint list that contains the description for the item. The description for the item is displayed as a tooltip when you hover your mouse over an item in the calendar. The default value is

Description, which is the name of the field for the SharePoint event list that contains the event description. If the calendar displays data from another type of list, you may have to adjust the value of this property. For example, if you want to display data from the Tasks list, you may use Task Description for the value of this property.

If you want to display the information from more than one field, specify the format in the Tooltip Format property.

Allows you to enter the format of the tooltip. You can use the <%FieldName%> field replacement expression to refer to a certain field. The FieldName is case sensitive. This property takes precedence over the Tooltip Field Name property.

Display Format

This attribute specifies how the field value is formatted when displayed.

The syntax for the Display Format string is as follow: {0:FormatString}. The following are the value of the

Display Format attribute grouped by the type of the value to be formatted.

Table 4. Basic Number Formatting

Format

{0:c}

{0:d}

{0:e}

{0:n}

{0:x}

Type

Currency

Decimal (whole number)

Scientific

Number with commas for thousands

Hexadecimal

Output (if input is double value 2.34)

$2.34

N/A

2.340000e+000

2.34

N/A

Output (if input is integer value

12400)

$12,400

12400

1.240000e+004

12,400 cf90

Table 5. Custom Number Formatting

Specifier

Note

Zero placeholder

Digit placeholder

Decimal point

Thousands separator

Percent (Multiplies by 100 and add % sign)

Example

{0:00.00}

{0:##.####}

{0:0.0}

{0:0,0}

{0:0%}

Output (if input is 12400.25)

12400.250

12400.25

12400.3

12,400

1240025%

For custom number formatting, you can combine different specifiers. For example: {0:0,0%} will output

1,240,025%.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

MMM

MMMM ss tt yy yyyy zz

Table 6. Date Formatting

Format

{0:d}

{0:D}

{0:t}

{0:T}

{0:f}

{0:F}

{0:g}

{0:G}

{0:M}

{0:r}

{0:s}

{0:u}

{0:U}

{0:Y}

Type

Short date

Long date

Short time

Output (if input is November 14, 2007 10:34:23 PM)

11/14/2007

November 14, 2007

10:34 PM

Long time

Full date and time

10:34:23 PM

November 14, 2007 10:34 PM

Full date and time (long) November 14, 2007 10:34:23 PM

Default date and time 11/14/2007 10:34 PM

Default date and time

(long)

11/14/2007 10:34:23 PM

Month and day

RFC1123 date string

Sortable date string

Universal sortable, local time

Universal GMT

Month and year

November 14

Wed, 14Nov2007 10:24:23 GMT

2007-14-11T22:34:23

2007-14-11 22:34:23 PM

November 14, 2007 10:34:23 PM

November, 2007

Output (if input is November

14, 2007 10:34:23 PM)

Wed

Wednesday

230

A.D.

Nov

November

2007

-05

-05:00

10:34:23

14/11/2007 www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Search/Filter Panel

The Search/Filter Panel allows you to define the panels for search, filter, and replace in the web part.

The Search/Filter Panel contains the following elements:

Table 8. Search/Filter Panel

Element

Searched Fields

Show Search All Fields

Control in Search

Panel

Description

See

Searched Fields on page 13 .

Determines whether the Filter panel should display the control to search all fields in the list. When set to true, the following control is shown in the Filter panel:

The Search All Fields Control allows you to do the following:

• Combine the search all fields functionality with other search criteria that has been entered for specific fields.

When the search all fields criteria is entered, the Filter panel will construct a filter expression with the "Contain" operator for the following fields in the list:

Single line of text, Multiple lines of text, Choice, Lookup (only Lookup to a

Single Text field and Lookup to a Number field are supported), Person or Group and Hyperlink or Picture. If the list contains a Lookup to Number field, Search

All Fields will not work for negative numbers for that field. The Filter panel will use the entire keywords as the value to be searched. Therefore, if you enter

"High Priority" in the search all fields control and perform the search, it will find the following sentence:

‘This is a high priority task’

However, it will not find the following sentence:

‘The priority is not always high’

Expand Filter panel on Load

Allows you to automatically open the Filter panel by default so that the user can perform a search quickly. When set to true, the Filter panel opens when the web part is loaded for the first time.

Panel Button Location Determines the location of the Go, Reset and Close buttons in the Filter panel. This property also determines the location of the Go and Close buttons in the Replace panel.

Searched Fields

This property defines what fields are displayed in the Filter panel. If defined, the calendar view displays the

Filter button in the toolbar. To disable the search feature in the calendar view, you can leave this property blank. If defined, the calendar view displays Filter or Search menu items under the Actions button in the toolbar. To disable the search feature in the calendar view, you can leave this property blank.

You will be able to perform a search by pressing Enter.

NOTE: Pressing Enter will not allow you to perform a search on such fields as external data, people picker, managed metadata, and a drop-down list. Instead, the default behavior will occur.

NOTE: For the Number type field, the “Contain” operator is not supported for negative numbers, and is not available for the following fields: Lookup to DateTime field, Lookup to Calculated field, and Lookup to

ID field.

Specify the following field properties:

Table 9. Searched Fields

Field Property

Advanced Mode

Field Name

Title

Description

Turn on if you want to edit Searched Fields in XML format.

Indicates the element you are editing.

Displays title for the field. The value can be a plain string or an encoded HTML string.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 9. Searched Fields

Field Property

Description

Default Value

Default Operator

Fixed Operator

Use People Editor

Column Count

Enable Multi Choice

Sort Field

Sort Order

AutoPostBack

Description

Describes the field. This is useful if you want to give a short instruction or explanation about the field.

Defines the default value for the field.

You can define a text, a number or a date. A date value must be specified in ISO

8601 format: YYYY-MM-DDThh:mm:ssZ, for example: midnight of February 14, 2002 is 2002-02-14T00:00:00Z.

Defines the default operator for the field.

Defines the operator for the field. If specified, the list to select the operator for this field is turned off.

Enables you to enter any user information that is in your directory service.

If you set this to True and the field to be searched is a People and Group field, the

Filter panel shows the People Editor control for entering the search criteria.

Defines the number of columns for the options in a multi-choice field or in a choiceand-lookup field if the Enable Multi Choice attribute is set to True. This is useful in case your choice or lookup fields have too many choices and you want to break the choices into several columns to minimize the vertical scrolling in your form.

If set to True, allows you to select multiple options for the choice-and-lookup field.

Therefore, the user can specify a condition like "A or B". This attribute is ignored by other field types.

To search a cross-site lookup field, you must specify one or more List elements inside the Field element. The cross-site lookup field is displayed as two drop downs.

Defines the field that is used to sort the value in the list menu. The field name is case sensitive.

Allows you to sort the values in ascending or descending order.

When set to true, this attribute causes the Filter panel to refresh when the user changes the selection in a lookup field or cross-site lookup field.

You need to set AutoPostBack to true if this field is a lookup or a cross-site lookup field and it is being used to filter another lookup or cross-site lookup field in the

Filter panel.

Parent Field

Filter Field Name

Defines another lookup or cross-site lookup field that is used to filter this field.

Parent Filter Field Name Defines the field in the parent field that is used to filter this field. It is the primary key in the list that is used in the lookup or cross-site lookup field.

Defines the field in the list that is used by this lookup or cross-site lookup field that is filtered by the parent filter field.

Display Field Name Shows the name of the field whose value is displayed in the list menu. The field name is case sensitive. Use this attribute instead of the Display Format attribute if you only want to display a single field in the list menu.

Display Format

Site URL

Indicates the format of the value that is displayed in the list menu. Define this attribute instead of the Display Field Name attribute if you want to display multiple fields in the list menu. You can use the field replacement expression <%Field%> to refer to a field.

NOTE: If you are using Advanced Mode, you must use the encoded form of the < and

> characters, which are < and >, respectively unless you type in the value in the Searched Fields editor in the List View Editor, where the Editor encodes the characters automatically.

NOTE:

For more information, see Display Format on page 11 .

Indicates the Site URL of the field. You can use an absolute or relative URL.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 9. Searched Fields

Field Property

List Name

Site Name

Description

Indicates the name of the List. The field name is case sensitive.

Indicates the name of the site specified in the Site URL. This is used in case you have multiple lists. In this case, the first list menu to select the list displays as "List

Name in Site Name". You can use any name for the Site Name. It does not have to match the real title of the Site.

Filtering

The Filtering page allows you to use CAML filters to dynamically filter records or use Complex Filters to define static filter for the data.

The Filtering page contains the following:

Table 10. Filtering

Element

CAML Filter

Complex Filter

Description

Allows you to specify the CAML (Collaboration Application Markup Language) query expression to filter your data. CAML is an XML-based query language. The CAML Filter will only be applied to the data. The filter will not be applied to the responses.

For more information, see CAML Filters on page 15 .

Allows you to use the Complex Filter expression to define a static filter for the data. The complex filter is applied to the data after the CAML Filter is applied.

NOTE: The Complex Filter is provided here only for backward compatibility reason. In the past, Complex filter was used to support date functions.

For more information, see Complex Filters on page 17 .

CAML Filters

CAML Filter expressions help filter data by providing a way to link multiple conditions.

Turn Advanced Mode on if you want to edit CAML Filters in XML format.

CAUTION: If the web part supports both CAML Filter and Complex Filter, use the CAML Filter. The

CAML Filter processes data in the SQL Server, so the data is transferred to the Web Server. The

Complex Filter processes data in the Web Server. If you specify both CAML Filter and Complex Filter, the CAML Filter is processed first.The Complex Filter remains for backward compatibility reasons.

The operators and field names in the CAML Filter are case sensitive. For the field name, use the internal name of the field.

NOTE: This is different from the Complex Filter that uses the Display Name.

The Boolean operators <And> and <Or> are supported in CAML Filter. These operators are used to combine two conditions. They must contain exactly two conditions. For example:

If you need to link more than two conditions, such as Condition1 And Condition 2 And Condition3, you must nest these operators. For example:

You can specify conditions for CAML Filter in either of the following ways:

• <IsNull><FieldRef Name="InternalFieldName"/></IsNull>

This returns all entries whose field specified by InternalFieldName does not contain any value.

• <IsNotNull><FieldRef Name="InternalFieldName"/></IsNotNull> www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

This returns all entries whose field specified by InternalFieldName contains values (including empty string value).

• <Operator><FieldRef Name="InternalFieldName"/><Value Type="TypeName">

ValueToCompare</Value><Operator>

Where:

Value

Operator

TypeName

ValueTo

Compare is

One of the following:

• Eq — equals to operator

• Neq — not equals to operator

• Gt — greater than operator

• Geq — greater than or equals to operator

• Lt — less than operator

• Leq — less than or equals to operator

• Contains — a string operator to check whether a string contains the specified value

• BeginsWith — a string operator to check whether a string begins with the specified value

One of the following:

• Text

• Integer

• Float

• DateTime

NOTE: When you compare a DateTime value, only the date is being processed. The time part is ignored by SharePoint

One of the following:

• String

• Number

• Date/Time value in the format — YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SSZ

• Date/Time value in the format :

- <Today OffsetDays="number"/> — today's date with optional number of days to offset the today's date. You can use the OffsetDays attribute to do date range filter. The OffsetDays attribute value must be a number (both positive and negative numbers))

- <UserID/> — the current user. This value only works if the field is a user lookup field)

Using CAML Filters

CAML filters allow you set the following variables to validate text fields:

Table 11. CAML Filter variables

Variable

<%Now%>

%FilePath%>

<%CurrentUserName%>

<%CurrentLoginName%>

<%CurrentUserID%>

<%CurrentUserEmail%>

Description

Current time and date

Complete path for a file in a document library

Display name of the current user

ID of the current user, for example: 1

Email address of the current user www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Variables work if you store either the user name, login name, user ID, or email address in a Single Line of Text field. qListForm and qSIListForm use variables in the Fixed Value or Form Component Behavior sections.

For a field of type Single-line-of-Text or Multi-line Plain Text, the Operator drop-down menu contains the value,

Matches, as an operator for comparing the field value to a regular expression.

Examples of common regular expressions:

• Match beginning of a string: ^Test matches any string that starts with “Test”.

• Match ending of a string: test$ matches any string that ends with “test”.

• Telephone number: ^\d{3}-\d{3}-\d{4}$ matches any phone number in the format of 555-555-5555.

Using Dynamic Variables

The CAML Filter can also be used with dynamic variables. The Value element in the CAML Filter can come from various sources such as an HTTP Parameter and Session.

NOTE: If you want to use Advanced Mode, you can extend the value element in the CAML filter. Some examples are:

• to enter the value in the Value element - <Value Type="Text">Some Text</Value>

• to retrieve the value from an HTTP parameter - <Value Type="Text"

Source="HttpParameter" SourceName="NameOfHTTPParameter"/> to retrieve the value from the Session variable - <Value Type="Text" Source="Session"

SessionName="SessionName" SourceName="NameOfHTTPParameter" SiteUrl="url"

ListName="ListName"/> to compare values of two fields - <Value Type="FieldName"

Source="Field">Editor</Value>

Complex Filters

Complex Filter provides a powerful way to concatenate multiple conditions.

CAUTION: If the web part supports both CAML Filter and Complex Filter, use the CAML Filter. The

CAML Filter processes data in the SQL Server, so the data is transferred to the Web Server. The

Complex Filter processes data in the Web Server. If you specify both CAML Filter and Complex Filter, the CAML Filter is processed first. The Complex Filter remains for backward compatibility reasons.

The date and time value must be enclosed in # and specified in ISO 8601 format: YYYY-MM-DDThh:mm:ssZ. For example, midnight of February 14, 2002 is #2002-02-14T00:00:00Z#.

The operators and field names in the Complex Filter are case sensitive. For the field name, use the display name of the field (include all spaces if there are any).

The following Boolean operators are supported in Complex Filter:

• NOT

—

This is used to negate a condition. For example, to get all employees whose name does not start with M, they syntax is: NOT Employee Name LIKE 'M%'

• AND and OR

—

This is used to concatenate two conditions. The AND operator takes precedence over the

OR. Use parentheses to change the precedence of the operator.

For example, to get all employees in the Accounting or IT department and hired after 1/1/2004:

(Department='Accounting' OR Department='IT') AND Hired Date>#2004-01-01T00:00:00Z#

Specify conditions for Complex Filter is specified in one of following ways:

1 FieldName IS NULL

This will return all entries whose field specified by FieldName does not contain any value.

Some entries contain an empty string value ("") and their display is indistinguishable from the entries with a NULL value. If you want to return such entries, use FieldName='' as the filter expression.

2 FieldName IS DBNULL www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

This will return all entries whose field specified by FieldName contains DBNull value. It is tricky to determine whether a field is empty, contains null value or contains DBNull value. It all depends on the field type and the type of back end system that you are dealing with. Therefore, try each one

("fieldName IS NULL", "fieldName IS DBNULL" or "fieldName=''") in order to identify which one is the appropriate option for your needs.

3 FieldName IS NOT NULL

This will return all entries whose field specified by FieldName contains values (including empty string value).

4 FieldName comparison-operator FieldExpression

Comparison operator is one of these: =, <> (not equal), <, >, <=, >=, LIKE

FieldExpression can be one of the following:

• String

—

A string is enclosed with single quote; for example 'Accounting'. A string can contain wildcard character % or * when used in conjunction with the LIKE operator. For example: 'M%', 'M*'. A wild-card character is not allowed in the middle of a string. Therefore, this expression is illegal:

'Te*xt'

• Numbers

—

Numbers are not enclosed. For example: 20, 20.5, 0.5. If you enclose a number with a single quote, it is treated as string.

• Dates

—

For example: February 5, 2005 11:50 PM is #2005-02-05T23:50:00Z#.

• [ME]

—

This expression is replaced with the name of the currently logged-in user.

• [TODAY]

—

This expression is replaced with midnight of today's date.

• [NOW]

—

This expression is replaced with the current date and time.

• Date function

—

The following date functions are supported: AddSeconds, AddMinutes, AddHours,

AddDays, AddMonths and AddYears. Their syntax is DateFunction(dateValue, number). For example: AddDays([TODAY], 7) adds 7 days to today's date

The following are some examples of the complex filter:

1 All my current task that are due within 7 days

PerformedBy=[ME] AND DueDate>=[TODAY] AND DueDate<=AddDays([TODAY], 7)

2 All unassigned tasks that are due within 3 days

PerformedBy IS NULL AND DueDate>=[TODAY] AND DueDate<=AddDays([TODAY], 3)

3 All overdue tasks

DueDate<[TODAY]

Behavior Page

The Behavior page allows you to configure behaviors, such as adding buttons or menus, so the user can perform operations when using the web part.

The Behavior page contains the following:

• Actions

•

For more information, see Custom Actions on page 19 .

•

Views

Actions

The list form has some pre-defined actions, such as Save, Delete, Copy or Move. You can also write your own custom action and hook it up with the list form. www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

The Actions page contain the following elements:

Table 12. Actions

Element

Custom Actions

Description

Custom Actions

This property enables you to define additional buttons in the toolbar or context menu item in the context menu.

You can program that button or context menu item to do a series of actions. The List Form supports some builtin actions. However, you can write your own custom action using one of the .NET languages, compile it, and call it by the List Form. See

Custom Action Help on page 330 to see how to write your own custom actions.

NOTE: The toolbar button affects all the items that are selected in the List Form. The context menu item affects only the item that is being right-clicked regardless of how many items are selected in your List

Form.

Here are some ways that you can use this functionality:

• Add a custom toolbar button called "Assign All to Me" that will assign all of the selected tasks in the List

Form to me.

• Add a custom toolbar called "Approve" that will change the status of all of the selected expense items to

Approved.

• Create a custom context menu item called "Publish" that will move the right-clicked document into another document library.

• Create a custom context menu item or toolbar item to start a workflow.

• With the ability to write your own custom action, you can virtually do anything to the data when you click the custom button that you define.

NOTE: The custom action in the List Form does not support the Save action.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 13. Custom Actions

Element Description

Advanced Mode Turn on if you want to edit Custom Actions in XML format:

<ActionItem ID="UniqueID" Text="text" TextResourceID="textResourceID" Position="0"

PromptText="promptText" PrompTextResourceID=”prompTextResourceID” ImageUrl=”URL”

AccessKey=”AccessKeyCharacter”>

<Action Type="Move" TargetFolder="targetFolder" TargetSiteURL="targetSiteUrl"

TargetListName="targetListName" />

<Action Type="Copy" TargetFolder="targetFolder" TargetSiteURL="targetSiteUrl"

TargetListName="targetListName" />

<Parameter Name="parameterName" Source="Session" SourceName="fieldName"

SessionName=”sessionName” />

<Parameter Name="parameterName" Source="RowFromAnotherWebPart"

SourceName="fieldName" />

<Parameter Name="parameterName" Source="HttpRequest"

SourceName="httpParameterName" />

<Parameter Name="parameterName" Source="ListItem"

SourceName="httpParameterName" />

</Action>

</ActionItem>

</Toolbar>

<ActionItem ID="UniqueID" Text="text" TextResourceID="textResourceID" Position="0"

PromptText="promptText" PrompTextResourceID=”prompTextResourceID” ImageUrl=”URL”

AccessKey=”AccessKeyCharacter”>

<Action Type="Move" TargetFolder="targetFolder" TargetSiteURL="targetSiteUrl"

TargetListName="targetListName" />

<Action Type="Copy" TargetFolder="targetFolder" TargetSiteURL="targetSiteUrl"

TargetListName="targetListName" />

<Parameter Name="parameterName" Source="Session" SourceName="fieldName"

SessionName=”sessionName” />

<Parameter Name="parameterName" Source="RowFromAnotherWebPart"

SourceName="fieldName" />

<Parameter Name="parameterName" Source="HttpRequest"

SourceName="httpParameterName" />

<Parameter Name="parameterName" Source="ListItem"

SourceName="httpParameterName" />

</Action>

</ActionItem>

</ContextMenu>

</CustomActions> www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 13. Custom Actions

Element

IsSeparator

Text

Text Resource

Prompt Text

Resource ID

Access Key

(Toolbar Only)

Position

Show User

Groups

Hide User

Groups

Description

Allows you to set the item as a separator.

Allows you to enter a unique ID that will identify the item. Use a descriptive identifier to configure the action item with the editor.

Allows you to enter how the action item is displayed in the toolbar.

Allows you to define this property if you support a a multi-lingual site. This attribute defines the identifier of the string in the Resource List that is used as the title of the Web Part. The

Text Resource ID and the current cultural setting (identified with the Culture HTTP parameter) are used to retrieve the string in the Resource List. If the string with the given identifier and culture is not found, the value in the Text attribute is used.

Allows you to prompt the user to click the toolbar button or the context menu item.

Allows you to define this property if you support a multi-lingual site. The property defines the identifier of the string in the Resource List that is used as the title of the Web Part. The

Resource ID and the current cultural setting (identified with the Culture HTTP parameter) are used to retrieve the string in the Resource List. If the string with the given identifier and culture is not found, the default is used.

Allows you to define one character from the Text attribute that becomes the access key to this toolbar button or context menu item. For example, if you define a letter T as the access key, you can press ALT+T and the browser will put the focus on this button or context menu item. If there are multiple elements on the page with the same access key, you can repeat

ALT+T repeatedly until you get the focus on this toolbar button or context menu item.

Allows you to set the position of the button in the toolbar. The index starts with 0.

Allows you to list SharePoint groups whose members can view the Web Part. Separate groups with commas.

Allows you to list SharePoint groups whose members cannot view the Web Part. Separate site group names with commas (for example, Administrators, Readers).

If a user is a member of a group that is defined in both Show User Groups and Hide User

Groups, the user cannot www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

When you add an action, you can configure the following:

Element

Name

Type

Description

An optional element which allows you to identify a given action in order to access it from another action. You can refer to this action from the GoToURL action and from

I CustomActionEx Interface.

Allows you to determine the type of the action. Here are the options:

• Delete — deletes the item.

• GoToURL — redirects the user to a specific URL. You must specify the URL and where you want the URL to open. You must select from one of the following source parameters:

• Input - the current user information as the value of the parameter

• Session - the name of the session variable where the value comes from when the source is set to Session

• HttpRequest - the value of the parameter that is retrieved from the HTTP parameters in the page URL. The name of the HTTP parameter is defined in the SourceName attribute. As an example, say the current page URL is http://mysite.com/default.aspx?ProductType=Hardware. If the SourceName attribute is ProductType, the value of the ProductType HTTP parameter, which is Hardware, is used as the value of the parameter.

• ListItem - the value of the parameter is a list item or row

• RowFromAnotherWebPart — the parameter for the GoToURL action can be retrieved from the output of another action that comes first in the sequence of actions defined in the ActionItem. There are two types of action that can produce an output: an action with Type of ExecuteOperation, and an action with Type of Custom that points to custom action implementation of

ICustomActionEx Interface. You do that by defining the SourceName attribute of the action. This is the syntax of the SourceName attribute when you use ResultFormAction source: <ActionName>.<ResultType>[.Name], where ActionName refers to the Name attribute of the action that produces the output, ResultType can be OutParameter (if the action result is returned through one of the out or inout parameter) or RawData - (if the action result is returned as an object). Name is optional. It further designates the object we want to use for the parameter. You do not have to specify the Name when the ResultType is RawData. However, if the ResultType is OutParameter, this name specifies the name of the out or input key value pair.

• ResultFromAction - the parameter for the GoToURL action can be retrieved from the output of another action that comes first in the sequence of actions defined in the ActionItem

You must define a source name (where in the source you want to get your information from), name (the name of the parameter that is appended to the

URL you specified), and Session (the name of the session variable where the value comes from when the source is set to Session)

• GoToSource — redirects the user to the URL specified in the Source HTTP parameter.

The URL to the page must look like: http://...?Source=URL for this option to work.

• StartWorkflow — starts the specified workflow in the Workflow Name drop-down field. You must select a Workflow name.

• ReturnToMasterChart — returns the user to the master chart page. You use this action type if this web part is located in the drill down page.

• Custom — implements your own custom action and call it with this action type.

Enter a Class name that implements the ICustomActionEx or ICustomAction interface, or select a class from the drop-down list, if available.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Navigation

The Navigation page allows you to configure how and where the user will navigate in the web part. It contains the following elements:

Table 14. Navigation

Element

LinkTo

Description

Allows you to turn the field into a hyperlinked column to the specified URL. The URL can be an absolute or relative URL. The LinkTo can use the <%field name%> field replacement expression.

NOTE: If you are using Advanced Mode, you must use the encoded form of the < and > characters, which are < and >, respectively.

If you use a relative URL, the URL is appended to the site URL of the target site. For example, specify "Lists/Calendar/EditForm.aspx?ID=<%ID%>" as the value of this property. If the user clicks an event that comes from the Calendar list in Workspace A, whose site URL is "http://mydomain/sites/mysite", the user is directed to http://mydomain/sites/mysite/Lists/Calendar/EditForm.aspx?ID=23 (this assumes that the user clicks the event with ID=23).

When the calendar view points to a document library, you can use a special field replacement expression <%FilePath%> to get a complete path for the file.

LinkToTargetURL Allows you to make the field value a hyperlink to the URL specified in the TargetUrl attribute in the Viewed Lists property.

Use the LinkToTarget URL when you aggregate lists with different name. In that case, specify a different TargetUrl for each list in the Viewed Lists property and the calendar view redirects the user to the correct URL depending on the list from where the clicked item comes.

Link To Source Allows you to make the field value a hyperlink to the URL specified in the Source HTTP parameter of the current request. For this option to work, the current page URL must look like: http://.....?Source=....

When do you use this attribute as opposed to the Link To or the Link To Target URL attributes? A typical case is when the URL for the hyperlink is dynamic. This could be because it contains dynamic parameters or the URL is different depending on the referral page.

Use the LinkToSource when you want to make the URL in the link dynamic. In that case, you can pass in the URL for the link into the HTTP parameter of your page. For example, say that we have a page where the user can select a particular contact from the Contacts list.

This page might be useful for several cases in your application and you cannot hard code the URL because you may want the user to be redirected to different URL depending where they are in the application. In that case, you can specify the URL for the hyperlink in the

URL of the page.

Views

The Views page allows you to set views so the user to view the data in a calendar.

The Views page contains the following element:

Table 15. Views

Element

Search Session Name

Description

The calendar will store the search criteria, last selected folder, sort criteria, and other list view dynamic settings in the session variable with this name.

The calendar also use the Search Session Name to communicate those settings to qExcelViewer and qChartView located in the page whose URL specified in the Excel

Viewer URL or Chart Viewer URL property, respectively. Therefore, the Search

Session Name in those web parts must be set to the same value as the session name in this calendar.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Appearance Page

The Appearance page allows you to set the overall look and feel of the web part. This page contains the following:

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

Ribbon

The Ribbon page allows you to set the display name of the Ribbon.

Table 16. Ribbon

Element

SharePoint Ribbon Tab

Name

Description

Allows you to edit the display name of the Ribbon tab.

Toolbar

The Toolbar page allows you to configure the appearance of the toolbar. It contains the following:

Table 17. Toolbar

Element

Toolbar Skin Name

Show New Button

Show Connect To Outlook

Button

Show Alert Me Button

Description

Allows you to enter the skin name for the toolbar.

Allows you to display the New button.

Allows you to display the Connect to Outlook button.

Allows you to show the Alert Me button in the toolbar.

Legend

The Legend page allows you to configure the appearance of the legend. It contains the following:

Table 18. Legend

Element

Legend Title

Legend Color Appearance

Show Legend

Legend Show Mode

Legend Show User Groups

Legend Hide User Groups

Description

Allows you to enter a title of the legend.

Allows you to select the list title and color and font color for a list that your selected in Viewed Lists.

Allows you to show the legend.

Allows you to select where to position the legend.

Allows you to select the SharePoint members who can view the legend.

Allows you to select the SharePoint members who cannot view the legend.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Calendar

The Calendar page contains the following:

Table 19. Calendar

Element

Skin Name

Description

Allows you to enter the skin name for the calendar view.

Calendar Width Allows you to enter the width of the calendar view in pixels. The default is 700.

Calendar Width Unit Allows you to enter unit of measure for the calendar width.

Calendar Height

Row Height

Month View Visible

Appointments Per

Day

Overflow Behavior

Allows you to enter the height of the calendar view in pixels. The default is 500.

Allows you to specify the row height for each day/week view and the appointment for the month view in pixels.

Allows you to enter the number of appointments visible per day when in the month view. The default is 3.

Default Calendar

View

Enable Day View

Enable Week View

Allows you to o scroll or expand the page when the calendar view is not large enough to display all the data.

Allows you to set the default view for the Calendar web part. This can be either Day,

Week or Month.

Allows you to switch to view one day at a time in the Calendar web part

Allows you to switch to view one week at a time in the Calendar web part.

Enable Month View Allows you to switch to view one month at a time in the Calendar web part.

First Day of Week Allows you to determine the first day that is displayed in the week view and month view. The default value is Sunday.

Last Day of Week

Allow Delete

Allows you to determine the last day that is displayed in the week view and month view.

The default value is Saturday.

Allows you to determine whether or not the delete button should be shown on every appointment in the calendar. The delete button appears when you hover your mouse over the appointment. If you set this property to false, the delete button is not shown during the mouse over. By default, Allow Delete is set to true.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 19. Calendar

Element

Appearance Field

Name

Color Appearance

Description

Allows you to determine the name of the field whose values is used to determine the color of the appointment. This allows appointments to be displayed in different colors based on the value in this predefined field. For example, to display all appointments in conference room 5 with red and all appointments in conference room 6 with blue, the

Appearance Field Name would be "Location".

There are 2 additional fields that you can use as Appearance Field Name. These fields are not part of the list but used internally by the Calendar View:

• Workspace URL — this is the URL of the site that contains the containing list.

When using the Workspace URL in the Appearance Field Name, you need to specify the absolute URL of the site in the FieldValue attribute in the Color

Appearance property, for example: http://www.mysite.com/site1

• List Name — this is the name of the list that contains the appointment. When using the List Name in the Appearance Field Name, you need to specify the name of the list in the FieldValue attribute in the Color Appearance property, for example: Project Calendar

Allows you to determine the color of the appointment for a certain value in the field specified by the Appearance Field Name. Turn on Advanced Mode if you want to edit

Color Appearance in XML:

<AppointmentAppearance FieldValue="fieldValue" BackgroundColor="color"

FontColor="color" />

<AppointmentAppearance FieldValueRange="number-number"

BackgroundColor="color" FontColor="color" />

</Appearance>

For example:

<AppointmentAppearance FieldValue="Conference Room 5" BackgroundColor="Red"

FontColor="Black" />

<AppointmentAppearance FieldValue="Conference Room 6" BackgroundColor="Blue"

FontColor="Orange" />

</Appearance>

The following are the attributes of the Color Appearance property:

• FieldValue — specifies the value for the field.

• BackgroundColor — is optional and it specifies the background color of the appointment for the specified value in the FieldValue attribute. The color can be specified as a well-known color such as white, black, cyan, lightGray, as a

RGB value such as 255, 255,255, or you can specify it as #FFFFFF, #CCDDEE.

• FontColor — is optional and it specifies the font color of the appointment for the specified value in the FieldValue attribute. The color can be specified as a wellknown color such as white, black, cyan, lightGray, as a RGB value such as 255,

255,255, or you can specify it as #FFFFFF, #CCDDEE. The FontColor attribute is ignored if you specify a URL in the Link To property or set the Link To Source or

Link To Target URL properties to true.

• FieldValueRange — Instead of using the FieldValue attribute, you can also use this attribute to determine a range of value, such as 0-100, 101-200.

FieldValueRange can only be used if you specify the name of a Number or

Currency field in the Appearance Field Name property.

Context Menu

The Context Menu page contains the following: www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 20. Context Menu

Element

Enable Context Menu

Context Menu Skin Name

Show View Properties

Show Edit Properties

Show Manage Permissions

Show Alert Me

Show Workflows

Description

Allows you to show the context menu.

Allows you to set he skin name for the context menu.

Allows you to show the View Properties menu item in the context menu.

Allows you to show the Edit Properties menu item in the context menu.

Allows you to show the Manage Permissions menu item in the context menu.

Allows you to show the Alert Me menu item in the context menu.

Allows you to show the Workflows Properties menu item in the context menu.

Layout

The Layout page allows you to set the overall layout of the web part. It contains the following:

Table 21. Layout

Element

Width

Height

Chrome State

Chrome Type

Hidden

Direction

Description

Allows you to set the web part to a fixed width

Allows you to set the web part to a fixed height

Allows you to select if the web part can be minimized or not when you open the web part.

If Minimized is selected, then only the Title Bar displays.

Allows you to select the kind of border to display around the web part.

Select this check box if you want the web part hidden

Allows you to set how the text in the web part displays depending on the language, either from Left to Right or Right to Left

Other

The Other page allows you to set the appearance of other elements in the web part. It contains the following:

Table 22. Other

Element

Allow Minimize

Allow Close

Allow Hide

Description

Select this check box if you want the web part minimized

Select this check box if you want the web part removed from the page

Select this check box if you want the web part hidden

Allow Zone Change

Allow Connections

Select this check box if you want the web part moved to a different zone

Select this check box if you want the web part to participate in connections to other web parts

Allow Editing in Personal View Select this check box if you want the web part modified in a personal view

Export Mode

Title URL

Description

Allows you to select the level of data that can be exported for this web part

Allows you to add the title of a URL as extra information about the web part

Help URL

Allows you to enter a description of the web part that is displayed as a Tooltip when you hover your mouse over the web part title or icon.

Allows you to enter the location of a file containing Help information about the web part. www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 22. Other

Element

Help Mode

Catalog Icon Image URL

Title Icon Image URL

Import Error Message

Description

Allows you to specify how a browser displays Help content for the web part, either in a separate window which you must close before returning to the

Web Page (Mode), in a separate window that you do not need to close before returning to the Web Page (Modeless), or in the current browser window

(Navigate)

Allows you to specify the location of a file containing an image to be used as the web part icon in the Web Part List. The image size must be 16 by 16 pixels.

Allows you to specify the location of a file containing an image to be used in the web part title bar. The image size must be 16 by 16 pixels.

Allows you to specify a message that appears if there is a problem importing the web part

Advanced Page

The Advanced page allows you to set advanced features of the web part, such as the following:

•

The Resources page allows you to enable Localization

• Resources

Security

The Security page allows you to set which users are allowed to view the web part. It contains the following:

Table 23. Security

Element

Show User

Groups

Hide User

Groups

Target

Audiences

Description

Allows you to list SharePoint groups whose members can view the Web Part. Separate groups with commas.

Allows you to list SharePoint groups whose members cannot view the Web Part. Separate site group names with commas (for example, Administrators, Readers).

If a user is a member of a group that is defined in both Show User Groups and Hide User

Groups, the user cannot

Allows you to have the Web Part to appear only to people who are members of a particular group or audience.

An audience can be identified by using a SharePoint group, a distribution list, a security group, or a global audience.

Resources

in the web part using resource lists.

Localization

Localization contains the following elements.

NOTE:

While this feature is still available to use, we recommend using ezLocalizer. For more information, see ezLocalizer on page 341 .

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 24. Localization

Element

Resource List

Title Resource ID

View Properties Context

Menu Text Resource ID

Edit Properties Context

Menu Text Resource ID

Manage Permissions

Context Menu Text

Resource ID

Alert Me Context Menu

Text Resource ID

Workflows Context

Menu Text Resource ID

New Button Text

Resource ID

Connect to Outlook

Button Text Resource ID

Alert Me Button Text

Resource ID

Filter Button Text

Resource ID

Description

Allows you to support a multi-lingual site. In a multi-lingual site, there are some settings, such as the web part, whose value can change depending on the current culture setting. The Resource List property defines the list that contains the string values for different cultures. The resource list must contain 3 columns:

• Resource ID — This field contains the identifier to refer to the string. You can have multiple strings with the same Resource ID as long as their Culture value is different.

• Culture — This field contains the culture for the string. For the default culture, leave the Culture field blank.

• Value — This field contains the value for the string.

The Lists element can contain only one List element. The following are the attributes for the List element:

• SiteUrl — The URL to the site that contains the resource list. The URL can be absolute (http://...) or relative to the current page URL. This attribute is mandatory.

• ListName — The name of the resource List. The list name is case sensitive.

Allows you to support a multi-lingual site. The property defines the identifier of the string in the Resource List that is used as the text of the web part. The Resource ID and the current cultural setting (identified with the Culture HTTP parameter) are used to retrieve the string in the Resource List. If the string with the given identifier and culture is not found, the default is used.

Allows you to set the text for the View Properties context menu.

Allows you to set the text for the Edit Properties context menu.

Allows you to set the text for the Manage Permissions context menu.

Allows you to set the text for the Alert Me context menu.

Allows you to set the text for the Workflows context menu.

Allows you to enter a text resource ID for the New button.

Allows you to enter a text resource ID for the Connect to Outlook button.

Allows you to enter a text resource ID for the Alert Me button.

Allows you to enter a text resource ID for the Filter button.

qCalendarView Procedure

You can perform the following procedure using qCalendarView:

•

Configuring Basic Settings using the Configuration Wizard

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Configuring Basic Settings using the Configuration

Wizard

To configure basic settings

1 Add qCalendarView to your page.

2 Select the ezWizard menu item from the qCalendarView Web Part Menu or Ribbon.

3 Select one or more lists, from the current site, whose data you want to view, and click Next.

4 Define calendar configurations, and click Next.

If you want to change your selections, select Previous.

5 Click Finish.

NOTE: Once a Web Part is configured, the ezWizard item will not appear on the Web Part Menu or the Web Part

Ribbon.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

qCaptionDisplay

•

•

qCaptionDisplay Pages

Overview

The qCaptionDisplay is a web part that displays a message from a SharePoint list. The text for the message is identified with a Caption ID.

Storing the message in a list, as opposed to hard coding it in a page, increases the site maintainability. This is useful if the site is replicated. If you need to make a change to the message, you only have to do it in one place; just change the list. The list usually resides outside of the replicated site.

You can localize the title and the messages displayed by the caption display. You can define different Title for different cultures using the Resource List and the Title Resource ID properties. The culture for the page can be defined by appending the Culture HTTP parameter to the page URL. For example: http://hostname/sites/sitename/default.aspx?Culture=en-US

To use the caption display, you must first define a source list for the captions. The SharePoint list for the caption display should contain these fields:

• Caption ID

—

This field is mandatory. It is a single-line text field that contains the identifier for the caption.

• Caption

—

This field is mandatory. This is a multiple-line text field that contains the message.

• Culture

—

This field is optional. You must have this field if you want to have different messages for a different culture. You can define different captions with the same Caption ID, but different Culture. You must leave the value for the default culture blank. For example:

Table 1. Culture

Caption ID Culture sites.mysite.default.aspx

sites.mysite.default.aspx

id-ID

Caption

Welcome to my site

Selamat datang ke situs saya

NOTE: Make sure that the Allow rich HTML text in the Caption field is set to No.

If your list uses different name for the fields, define the name in the Caption ID Field Name, Caption Field Name and Culture Field Name properties.

NOTE: T he Caption field can contain plain text or a piece HTML.

You can create the source by selecting AgreeYa Caption Display List (under Custom Lists in SharePoint). This automatically creates a list that contains all of the above fields.

Define a convention for the Caption ID value that makes it easy for you to identify where the message is used.

For example, use the URL of the page, remove the host name from the URL and replace all / with . (period).

Therefore, if the page URL is http://hostname/sites/mysite/default.aspx, the Caption ID is sites.mysite.default.aspx.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

qCaptionDisplay Pages

You can configure this web part through its tabs that are accessible through ezEdit. qCaptionDisplay contains the following tabs:

•

•

•

Content Page

The Content page allows you to enter the content for your web part. It contains the following:

•

Primary Content

The Primary Content page is default category. You need to configure one or more elements in this page to get started using this web part.

Primary Content contains the following:

Table 2. Primary Content

Element

Title

Site URL

List Name

Description

Allows you to enter a title for the Web Part. This field is mandatory.

Allows you to enter the URL to the site that contains the list. The URL can be absolute (http://...) or relative to the current page URL. This attribute is mandatory.

Allows you to enter a list name. The name is case sensitive. If the name of the list contains spaces, include the spaces in the List Name.

Caption ID

Caption Field Name

Allows you to enter the identifier that locates the message in the list.

Caption ID Field Name Allows you to enter the name of the field containing the caption ID. The default value is User Caption ID.

Allows you to enter the name of the field containing the message. The default value is Caption.

Culture Field Name Allows you to enter the name of the field containing the Culture. The default value is

User Culture.

Appearance Page

The Appearance page allows you to set the overall look and feel of the web part. This page contains the following:

•

•

•

Ribbon

The Ribbon page allows you to set the display name of the Ribbon.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 3. Ribbon

Element

SharePoint Ribbon Tab

Name

Description

Allows you to edit the display name of the Ribbon tab.

Layout

The Layout page allows you to set the overall layout of the web part. It contains the following:

Table 4. Layout

Element

Width

Height

Chrome State

Chrome Type

Hidden

Direction

Description

Allows you to set the web part to a fixed width

Allows you to set the web part to a fixed height

Allows you to select if the web part can be minimized or not when you open the web part.

If Minimized is selected, then only the Title Bar displays.

Allows you to select the kind of border to display around the web part.

Select this check box if you want the web part hidden

Allows you to set how the text in the web part displays depending on the language, either from Left to Right or Right to Left

Other

The Other page allows you to set the appearance of other elements in the web part. It contains the following:

Table 5. Other

Element

Allow Minimize

Allow Close

Allow Hide

Catalog Icon Image URL

Description

Select this check box if you want the web part minimized

Select this check box if you want the web part removed from the page

Select this check box if you want the web part hidden

Allow Zone Change

Allow Connections

Select this check box if you want the web part moved to a different zone

Select this check box if you want the web part to participate in connections to other web parts

Allow Editing in Personal View Select this check box if you want the web part modified in a personal view

Export Mode

Title URL

Description

Allows you to select the level of data that can be exported for this web part

Allows you to add the title of a URL as extra information about the web part

Help URL

Allows you to enter a description of the web part that is displayed as a Tooltip when you hover your mouse over the web part title or icon.

Allows you to enter the location of a file containing Help information about the web part.

Help Mode Allows you to specify how a browser displays Help content for the web part, either in a separate window which you must close before returning to the Web

Page (Mode), in a separate window that you do not need to close before returning to the Web Page (Modeless), or in the current browser window

(Navigate)

Allows you to specify the location of a file containing an image to be used as the web part icon in the Web Part List. The image size must be 16 by 16 pixels. www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 5. Other

Element

Title Icon Image URL

Import Error Message

Description

Allows you to specify the location of a file containing an image to be used in the web part title bar. The image size must be 16 by 16 pixels.

Allows you to specify a message that appears if there is a problem importing the web part

Advanced Page

The Advanced page allows you to set advanced features of the web part, such as the following:

•

•

The Resources page allows you to enable Localization

Security

The Security page allows you to set which users are allowed to view the web part. It contains the following:

Table 6. Security

Element

Show User

Groups

Hide User

Groups

Target

Audiences

Description

Allows you to list SharePoint groups whose members can view the Web Part. Separate groups with commas.

Allows you to list SharePoint groups whose members cannot view the Web Part. Separate site group names with commas (for example, Administrators, Readers).

If a user is a member of a group that is defined in both Show User Groups and Hide User

Groups, the user cannot

Allows you to have the Web Part to appear only to people who are members of a particular group or audience.

An audience can be identified by using a SharePoint group, a distribution list, a security group, or a global audience.

Resources

in the web part using resource lists.

Localization

Localization contains the following elements.

NOTE:

While this feature is still available to use, we recommend using ezLocalizer. For more information, see ezLocalizer on page 341 .

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 7. Localization

Element

Resource List

Title Resource ID

Description

• Resource ID — This field contains the identifier to refer to the string. You can have multiple strings with the same Resource ID as long as their Culture value is different.

• Culture — This field contains the culture for the string. For the default culture, leave the Culture field blank.

• Value — This field contains the value for the string.

The Lists element can contain only one List element. The following are the attributes for the List element:

• SiteUrl — The URL to the site that contains the resource list. The URL can be absolute (http://...) or relative to the current page URL. This attribute is mandatory.

• ListName — The name of the resource List. The list name is case sensitive.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

qCascadingMenu

•

qCascadingMenu Procedures

•

qCascadingMenu Pages

•

Overview

The qCascadingMenu lets you create complex menus that occupy minimum screen real estate.

qCascadingMenu offers the ability to:

• display items from multiple SharePoint lists. Each list can contain multiple top-level items.

• define a static FilterExpression using a Complex Filter expression. The ability to filter enables you to define the items to be displayed in your menu.

• show or hide the top-level items that come from a certain list based on the site group membership of the currently logged-in user.

• hide menu items whose target URLs are not accessible by the current user.

• define an icon for each menu item, and define the target frame for the target page.

• localize the title and the menu item text. You can define different Title for different cultures using the

Resource List and the Title Resource ID properties. Your can define the culture appending the Culture

HTTP parameter to the page URL. For example: http://hostname/sites/sitename/default.aspx?Culture=en-US

To configure this web part, we recommend that you use the AgreeYa Menu List custom list template. Use the template to define a source list for the menu items on a SharePoint site. For information on how to create the

source list, see Configuring qCascadingMenu on page 42 . This automatically creates a list which contains the

following columns by default:

Table 1. List Columns

Column

Text

Menu ID Provides the ID for the menu item.

Parent Menu ID Provides the ID of the menu item that is the parent of this menu item.

Target Url

Description

Provide the text for the menu item.

Target

Provides the target URL for the menu item.

NOTE: This is not a Hyperlink field because Hyperlink field does not let you use a relative

URL.

Indicates where to open the target page. Specify _blank to open the page in a new window.

Leave the target column empty to redirect the current window to the target URL.

Icon Url

Access Key

Culture

Provides the URL to the icon for the menu item.

Indicates the shortcut key to activate the menu item. You can activate the menu item by pressing ALT+Access Key Character.

Indicates the culture for this menu item www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

You must map these columns in the source list to the corresponding field names in the Configuration section in the Web Part. For more information on the Configuration section, see

Configuration on page 37

. For more

information on how to configure the qCascadingMenu Web Part, see Configuring qCascadingMenu on page 42 .

qCascadingMenu Pages

You can configure this Web Part through its tabs that are accessible through ezEdit. qCascadingMenu contains the following tabs:

•

•

•

•

Content Page

The Content page allows you to enter the content for your web part. It contains the following:

•

Configuration on page 37 .

Primary Content

The Primary Content page is default category. You need to configure one or more elements in this page to get started using this web part.

Primary Content contains the following:

Table 2. Primary Content

Element

Title

Configuration

Description

Allows you to enter a title for the Web Part, or accept the default. This field is mandatory.

See

Configuration

This property defines the source list and behavior of the cascading menu. The Configuration element can contain one or more Menu elements. Each menu element can read a different source.

You can define the following in the Configuration section: www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 3. Configuration

Field

Advanced Mode

Site URL

Description

Turn on Advanced Mode if you want to edit Configuration in XML format:

<Menu SiteUrl="url" ListName="listName" FilterExpression="filterExpression"

TextFieldName="Text" MenuIdFieldName="Menu Id" TargetUrlFieldName="Target Url"

TargetFieldName="Target" IconUrlFieldName="Icon Url" AccessKeyFieldName="Access

Key" CultureFieldName="Culture" ShowUserGroups="Group1, Group2"

HideUserGroups="Group1, Group2" CheckUserAccess="true/false"/>

</Configuration>

Allows you to set the URL to the site that contains the list to be searched. The URL can be absolute (http://...) or relative to the current page URL. This attribute is mandatory.

When using a relative URL, you can use a single dot (.) to denote the current path, a double dot (..) to denote the previous path, and a slash (/) to denote the root path.

List Name

Filter Expression

Allows you to enter the name of the list. The name is case sensitive. If the name of the list contains spaces, include the spaces in the List Name.

Allows you to filter the data. The Complex Filter Expression to filter the data. For more information, see Complex Filters on page 17 .

Text Field Name Allows you to set the field that contains the text for the menu item.

Menu ID Field Name Allows you to set the name of the field that contains the menu ID for the menu item.

Allows you to set the name of the field that contains the parent ID for the menu item. Parent Menu ID Field

Name

Target URL Field

Name

Target Field Name

Allows you to set the name of the field that contains the indicator of where to open the target URL.

Allows you to set the name of the field that contains the indicator of where to open the target page.

Icon URL Field Name Allows you to set the name of the field that contains the icon URL for the menu item.

Culture Field Name Allows you to set the name of the field that contains the culture for the menu item.

Allows you to set the name of the field that contains the access key for the menu item. Access Key Field

Name

Show User Groups

Hide User Groups

Allows you to show groups where the user is a member of one of the SharePoint groups listed. Separate site group names with commas.

Allows you to hide groups where the user is member of one of the SharePoint groups listed. Separate site group names with commas.

Check User Access Allows you to show only the menu items that point to the workspace which the current can access.

NOTE: Performance can be affected when checking the access for each menu item, especially for large menus. Also, make sure that every menu item points to a page in a

SharePoint site that is reachable from the current site (as opposed to any external site such as MSN, Google)

Behavior Page

The Behavior page allows you to configure behaviors, such as adding buttons or menus, so the user can perform operations when using the web part.

The Behavior Page contains the following:

•

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Navigation

The Navigation page allows you to configure how and where the user will navigate in the web part. It contains the following elements:

Table 4. Navigation

Element

Target URL Relative to

Master Page URL

Description

Allows you to append the value of the target URL to the URL of the master page. By default, this property is set to true to maintain backward compatibility with the existing applications who assumed that the relative URL is appended to the relative

URL of the master page.

Appearance Page

The Appearance page allows you to set the overall look and feel of the web part. This page contains the following:

•

•

•

Ribbon

The Ribbon page allows you to set the display name of the Ribbon.

Table 5. Ribbon

Element

SharePoint Ribbon Tab

Name

Description

Allows you to edit the display name of the Ribbon tab.

Menu

The Menu page allows you to configure the appearance of the menu. It contains the following:

Table 6. Menu

Element

Skin Name

Menu Flow

Vertical Flow Width

Description

Allows you to enter the skin name for the menu.

Allows you to select if you want the menu flow horizontal or vertical.

Allows you to set the width if your menu flow is vertical.

Layout

The Layout page allows you to set the overall layout of the web part. It contains the following:

Table 7. Layout

Element

Width

Height

Description

Allows you to set the web part to a fixed width

Allows you to set the web part to a fixed height www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 7. Layout

Element

Chrome State

Chrome Type

Hidden

Direction

Description

Allows you to select if the web part can be minimized or not when you open the web part.

If Minimized is selected, then only the Title Bar displays.

Allows you to select the kind of border to display around the web part.

Select this check box if you want the web part hidden

Allows you to set how the text in the web part displays depending on the language, either from Left to Right or Right to Left

Other

The Other page allows you to set the appearance of other elements in the web part. It contains the following:

Table 8. Other

Element

Allow Minimize

Allow Close

Allow Hide

Allow Zone Change

Allow Connections

Description

Select this check box if you want the web part minimized

Select this check box if you want the web part removed from the page

Select this check box if you want the web part hidden

Select this check box if you want the web part moved to a different zone

Select this check box if you want the web part to participate in connections to other web parts

Allow Editing in Personal View Select this check box if you want the web part modified in a personal view

Export Mode Allows you to select the level of data that can be exported for this web part

Title URL

Description

Help URL

Help Mode

Allows you to add the title of a URL as extra information about the web part

Allows you to enter a description of the web part that is displayed as a Tooltip when you hover your mouse over the web part title or icon.

Allows you to enter the location of a file containing Help information about the web part.

Allows you to specify how a browser displays Help content for the web part, either in a separate window which you must close before returning to the

Web Page (Mode), in a separate window that you do not need to close before returning to the Web Page (Modeless), or in the current browser window

(Navigate)

Catalog Icon Image URL

Title Icon Image URL

Import Error Message

Allows you to specify the location of a file containing an image to be used as the web part icon in the Web Part List. The image size must be 16 by 16 pixels.

Allows you to specify the location of a file containing an image to be used in the web part title bar. The image size must be 16 by 16 pixels.

Allows you to specify a message that appears if there is a problem importing the web part

Advanced Page

The Advanced page allows you to set advanced features of the web part, such as the following:

•

•

While this feature is still available to use, we recommend using ezLocalizer. For more information, see ezLocalizer on page 341 .

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Security

The Security page allows you to set which users are allowed to view the web part. It contains the following:

Table 9. Security

Element

Target

Audiences

Description

Allows you to have the Web Part to appear only to people who are members of a particular group or audience.

An audience can be identified by using a SharePoint group, a distribution list, a security group, or a global audience.

Resources

The Resources page allows you to enable Localization in the web part using resource lists.

Localization

Localization contains the following elements.

NOTE:

Table 10. Localization

Element

Resource List

Title Resource ID

Description

• Resource ID — This field contains the identifier to refer to the string. You can have multiple strings with the same Resource ID as long as their Culture value is different.

• Culture — This field contains the culture for the string. For the default culture, leave the Culture field blank.

• Value — This field contains the value for the string.

The Lists element can contain only one List element. The following are the attributes for the List element:

• SiteUrl — The URL to the site that contains the resource list. The URL can be absolute (http://...) or relative to the current page URL. This attribute is mandatory.

• ListName — The name of the resource List. The list name is case sensitive.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

qCascadingMenu Procedures

You can perform the following procedures using qCascadingMenu:

•

Configuring qCascadingMenu

Configuring qCascadingMenu

To configure qCascadingMenu

1 Create a source list from AgreeYa Menu List in SharePoint. The source list for the cascading menu will contain the following fields:

• Text - This field is mandatory. This is a single line of text field that provides the text for the menu item.

• Menu Id - This field is mandatory. This is a single line of text field that provides the ID for the menu item.

• Parent Menu Id - This field is mandatory. This is a single line of text field that provides the parent

ID for the menu item.

• Target Url - This field is optional. This is a single line of text field that provides the target URL for the menu item. Please note that this is not a Hyperlink field because Hyperlink field does not let you use a relative URL.

• Target - This field is optional. This is a single line of text field that indicates where to open the target page.

• Icon Url - This field is optional. This is a single line of text field that provides the URL to the icon for the menu item.

• Access Key - This field is optional. This is a single line of text field (one character) that indicates the shortcut key to activate the menu item. You can activate the menu item by pressing

ALT+Access Key Character.

• Culture - This field is optional. This is a single line of text field that indicates the culture for this menu item.

2 Create a top-level menu. Click New Item to add information to your source list.

3 Create an entry in the list with blank Parent Menu Id, for example:

Table 11. Example of cascading menu list that contains two different cultures and invariants

Text Menu Id

Parent

Menu Id

Target Url Target Icon Url

Access

Key

Culture

Public Web

Sites

Web Sites untuk Publik

Microsoft

01.01

W id-ID

Microsoft

Google

Other Places 01.03

Situs Lain

CNN

01.01

01.02

01.03

01.03.01 01.03

http://www.microsoft.

com http://www.microsoft.

com

_blank search.gif M

_blank search.gif M http://www.google.com _blank search.gif G http://www.google.com _blank search.gif G

O http://www.cnn.com

C id-ID id-ID id-ID www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 11. Example of cascading menu list that contains two different cultures and invariants

CNN

ABC News

01.03.01 01.03

01.03.02 01.03

http://www.cnn.com

http://www.abcnews.

com http://www.abcnews.

com

A id-ID id-ID

The cascading menu can also read any type of list that contains at least the first four fields: Text, Menu

Id, Parent Menu Id and Target Url.

NOTE: If the name of the fields is not specified, you must define the field name mapping in the

Configuration property.

4 Add qCascadingMenu to your site collection page.

5 Open ezEdit.

The Primary Content page opens by default.

6 From the Configuration section, select the source list created in SharePoint, and click OK.

7 Click Edit next to the list name.

8 For each field name, select the corresponding column name (from the source list created in SharePoint).

For example, for Text Field Name, select Text; for Menu Id Field Name, select Menu Id. Click OK.

9 If needed, configure the elements in the other tabs.

10 When done configuring each tab, click OK.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

qChartView

•

using the Configuration Wizard, see Configuring Basic Settings using the Configuration Wizard on page 84 .

•

Configuration Wizard

•

qChartView Pages

•

qChartView Procedures

Overview

qChartView aggregates data from one or more SharePoint lists and displays it in different chart types.

qChartView has the following features:

• Different chart types including multi series chart, combination chart, 2D and 3D charts.

• Ability to display data from multiple lists, even when the lists are in different sites, site collections or web applications (as long as they are in the same configuration database).

• Ability to customize the look of the chart

• Ability to display one or more trend lines in the chart

• Dual Y Axis support, making your charts more readable when the minimum and maximum values in your data series are very different

• Ability to generate multiple data series based on dynamic data

• Ability to create drill down charts.

• Dynamic language switching and Flash and JavaScript (HTML5) support

Configuration Wizard

qChartView uses a configuration wizard to walk you through basic configuration tasks. For more information on

qChartView Pages

You can configure this web part through its tabs that are accessible through ezEdit. qChartView contains the following tabs:

•

•

•

•

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Content Page

When you open ezEdit in qChartView, the Content page opens by default. It contains the following:

•

See Viewed Lists on page 45

•

Filtering

•

Search/Filter Panel

Primary Content

The Primary Content page is default category. You need to configure one or more elements in this page to get started using this web part.

Primary Content contains the following:

Table 1. Primary Content

Element

Title

Viewed Lists

Chart Type

Configuration

Description

Allows you to add a title for the web part.

for more information

Allows you to select the type of chart used to display the data. For examples of each chart type, see

Sample Charts on page 349 .

When you select one of the Multi Series, Scroll or Stacked chart type, you must define multiple data series in the Configuration property. Otherwise you will get a blank chart.

See Configuration on page 46

for more information.

Viewed Lists

This property defines the lists whose data is aggregated in the Chart View.

The following are the elements for the Viewed Lists attribute.

Table 2. Viewed Lists

Element

Advanced Mode

Site URL

List Name

Include Subsites

Include This Site

Description

Turn on if you want to edit Viewed Lists in XML format:

<Lists>

</Lists>

Allows you to set the URL to the site that contains the list to be searched. The URL can be absolute (http://...) or relative to the current page URL. This attribute is mandatory.

When using a relative URL, you can use a single dot (.) to denote the current path, a double dot (..) to denote the previous path, and a slash (/) to denote the root path.

Allows you to set the name of the SharePoint list. The list name is case sensitive. If the list name contains spaces, include the spaces here as well.

To denote the current list, you can use a single dot (.) as the list name.

Allows you to search all subsites for a list whose name specified in the ListName, and aggregate the information from those list.

NOTE: If you have many subsites, the information may take a long time to aggregate.

Use this attribute if you have only a small amount of subsites. You must test this feature in your environment to see whether or not the response comes back in a reasonable amount of time and the request does not time out.

Used in conjunction of the IncludeSubsites attribute. If you set this property to true, the list in the current site is aggregated by the Chart View. The current site is the site whose URL is specified in the SiteUrl attribute.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 2. Viewed Lists

Element

Is Rollup List

Description

Site URL. If you use different field name, specify the name using the SiteUrlFieldName attribute below.

Rolled Up List Name Used in conjunction with the IsRollupList property, indicates the name of the lists to be rolled up if you set the IsRollupList to true.

If you want to aggregate more than one list from each site specified in the rollup list, you can define more than one List elements with the same rollup list, but different

RolledUpListName.

Site URL Field Name Used in conjunction with the IsRollupList property, indicates the field that contains the

Site URLs of the lists to be aggregated. This attribute is optional if the field name is

Site URL.

NOTE: The Site URL field must be a single line of text field.

Active Field Name Used in conjunction with the IsRollupList property. The rollup list may contain a

Yes/No field to indicate whether or not a particular site should be included in the rollup. This property is optional if the name of this field is Active.

NOTE: The Active field must be a Yes/No field.

Configuration

This property defines how the data should be grouped in the X Axis and the data series for the chart.

The Configuration element should contain only one X-Axis and one Series element. Each Series element may contain one or more Items element.

The Configuration section contains the following: www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 3. Configuration

Element

Advanced Mode

Query All Fields

Description

Turn on if you want to edit Configuration in XML format:

<Items FieldName="FieldName"

AggregateFunction="Count|Avg|Sum|Min|Max|StdDev|Var" [optional attributes]/>

<Items FieldName="FieldName"

AggregateFunction="Count|Avg|Sum|Min|Max|StdDev|Var" [optional attributes]/>

</Series>

</Configuration>

Controls how Web Parts behave in relation to the Chart View Lookup Threshold in

SharePoint Resource Throttling. The options are:

• Default — uses the level set in the Configuration Editor. If you have selected Query All Fields check box in the Configuration Editor, the Web

Part will query only those fields that are not included in the Chart View

Lookup Threshold. If the Query All Fields check box is cleared, the Web

Part will query all fields.

• On — If the Web Part level is On, the Web Part queries all fields in lists, except Lookup fields.

• Off — If the Web Part level is Off, the Web Part queries all fields in lists, including Lookup fields.

• Explicit — If the Web Part level is Explicit, the Web Part queries only those fields selected in the Display Fields. This option renders the best performance for your Web Part.

Field Name Specifies the name of the field that corresponds to the x axis data. This attribute is mandatory. The field name is case sensitive.

Case Sensitive Calculations Allows you to perform case-sensitive calculations (sum, count, avg) on lists. The calculations are performed as case insensitive if this property is not selected.

Display Only Those X-Axis

Values That Contain Data

Sort By

Sort Order

Select this check box if you want to display only X-axis values that contain data.

If this check box is not selected, all X-axis values are displayed on the chart.

NOTE: This is applicable only if you have selected Choice (menu to choose from) as the Column type for your Field Name property.

Allows you to select how you want to group the data on the chart, either by field name or data series number. The value of this property does not have to be the same as the value in the Field Name attribute.

Specifies how the values in the column specified by the Sort By should be ordered, either ascending or descending.

If you want to add a data series, configure the following:

Table 4. Data Series

Element

Field Name (for Data

Series)

Description

Specifies the field whose values are aggregated and plotted against the values in the X- Axis.

NOTE: Only Number or Currency field can be used in the FieldName. The field name is case-sensitive.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 4. Data Series

Aggregate Function

Series Name

Chart Series Type

Filter Expression

Filter Field Name

Drill Down Chart URL

Show Values

Include in Legend

Parent Y Axis

Hide

Specifies the aggregation function to be performed on the field specified in the

FieldName attribute. The following aggregation functions are supported: Count,

Avg, Sum, StdDev, Var, Min, or Max.

Allows the series name to be displayed in the legend as the title in case of multiple data series.

Defines the chart type for this series when you use one of the combination chart in the Chart Type property. The choices are: COLUMN, AREA or LINE. This attribute is ignored for any non-combination chart type.

Defines the filter that is applied for the data in this series. The filter is defined

using the Complex Filter. For more information, see Complex Filters on page 17 .

Determines the field name whose data is used to generate a dynamic data series.

The chart view will analyze the data in this field and generate the filter expression for each data series automatically, one per unique value in the field.

This attribute is useful if the data that you should use as the filter expression for the data series is dynamic.

Determines the URL of the page that contains the drill down chart for this data series.

Allows you to determine whether to show the values for this dataset.

NOTE: This attributes is only applicable for a multi-series chart.

Allows you to determine whether to include the series name of this dataset in the legend.

NOTE: This attribute is only applicable for a multi series chart.

Allows you to set the parent axis of the dataset - P (primary) or S (secondary).

Primary datasets are drawn as on the left y-axis and secondary on the right y-axis.

In 3D Column (or stacked Column) + Line Combination Charts, the columns draw against primary y-axis and the lines against secondary y-axis. In 2D dual Y combination charts, you can choose what dataset to render against which y-axis.

NOTE: This attribute is only applicable for a chart with a dual y axis.

Allows you to sort a data series that will not be displayed on the chart.

NOTE: This option is only valid for multi-series charts only.

Examples of Configuration Property

The following is an example of the Configuration property if you want to display data from your Sales list. Your

Sales list contains the sales amount for every month in the year. There are 3 fields in the list: Year, Month, and

Amount. For example, say you want to display the month in the X axis. You also wants to create the data series dynamically based on the year field.

If you are using Advanced Mode, here is the XML:

</Series>

</Configuration>

The following shows the resulting chart www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Figure 1. Example of Configuration Property chart

Filtering

The Filtering page allows you to use CAML filters to dynamically filter records or use Complex Filters to define static filter for the data.

The Filtering page contains the following:

Table 5. Filtering

Element

CAML Filter

Complex Filter

Description

NOTE: If you are using an external list created from SQL, CAML Filter is not supported for the following SQL data types and corresponding operators:

• Int/Tinyint/Smallint/float and 'Begins With' & 'Contains'

• Bit (Boolean) and 'Contains'

• Money and 'Contains'

For more information, see CAML Filters on page 15 .

Allows you to use the Complex Filter expression to define a static filter for the data. The complex filter is applied to the data after the CAML Filter is applied.

NOTE: The Complex Filter is provided here only for backward compatibility reason. In the past, Complex filter was used to support date functions.

For more information, see Complex Filters on page 17 .

Search/Filter Panel

The Search/Filter Panel allows you to define the panels for search, filter, and replace in the web part.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

The Search/Filter Panel contains the following elements:

Table 6. Search/Filter Panel

Element

Searched Fields

Turn On List View Link

Mode

Description

See

Searched Fields on page 50 .

Allows you to link this chart view with qListView. When selected, the chart view will display the same data that is displayed in the listview, with the same filters and sort condition applied. The filters and the sort conditions are being passed by the List View using Session variable. Therefore, you must set the Search Session Name property to the same value as the Search Session Name property in the listview.

NOTE: The chart view does not have Search/Filter panel available in this mode.

Allows you to perform a search before the chart view displays any data.

Turn On List Searcher

Mode

Show Search All Fields

Control in Search

Panel

Expand Filter panel on Load

Determines whether the Filter panel should display the control to search all fields in the list. When set to true, the following control is shown in the Filter panel:

The Search All Fields Control allows you to do the following:

• Combine the search all fields functionality with other search criteria that has been entered for specific fields.

• When the search all fields criteria is entered, the Filter panel will construct a filter expression with the "Contain" operator for the following fields in the list:

Single line of text, Multiple lines of text, Choice, Lookup (only Lookup to a

Single Text field and Lookup to a Number field are supported), Person or Group and Hyperlink or Picture. If the list contains a Lookup to Number field, Search

All Fields will not work for negative numbers for that field. The Filter panel will use the entire keywords as the value to be searched. Therefore, if you enter

"High Priority" in the search all fields control and perform the search, it will find the following sentence:

‘This is a high priority task’

However, it will not find the following sentence:

‘The priority is not always high’

Allows you to automatically open the Filter panel by default so that the user can perform a search quickly. When set to true, the Filter panel opens when the web part is loaded for the first time.

Panel Button Location Determines the location of the Go, Reset and Close buttons in the Filter panel. This property also determines the location of the Go and Close buttons in the Replace panel.

Searched Fields

This property defines what fields are displayed in the Search Filter panel.

You will be able to perform a search by pressing Enter.

NOTE: Pressing Enter will not allow you to perform a search on such fields as external data, people picker, managed metadata, and a drop-down list. Instead, the default behavior will occur.

ID field.

You can further edit fields using the following elements: www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 7. Searched Fields

Element Description

Advanced Mode Turn on if you want to edit Searched Fields in XML format:

Fields>

</Field>

</Field>

</Fields>

Field Name Indicates the element you are editing.

Title

Description

Default Value

Displays title for the field. The value can be a plain string or an encoded HTML string.

Describes the field. This is useful if you want to give a short instruction or explanation about the field.

Defines the default value for the field.

You can define a text, a number or a date. A date value must be specified in ISO

8601 format: YYYY-MM-DDThh:mm:ssZ, for example: midnight of February 14, 2002 is 2002-

02-14T00:00:00Z.

Default

Operator

Defines the default operator for the field.

Fixed Operator Defines the operator for the field. If specified, the list to select the operator for this field is turned off.

Use People

Editor

Enables you to enter any user information that is in your directory service.

If you set this to True and the field to be searched is a People and Group field, the Filter panel will show the People Editor control for entering the search criteria.

Column Count Defines the number of columns for the options in a multi-choice field or in a choice-andlookup field if the Enable Multi Choice attribute is set to True. This is useful in case your choice or lookup fields have too many choices and you want to break the choices into several columns to minimize the vertical scrolling in your form.

Enable Multi

Choice

Sort Field

If selected, allows you to select multiple options for the choice-and-lookup field. Therefore, the user can specify a condition like "A or B". This attribute is ignored by other field types.

To search a cross-site lookup field, you must specify one or more List elements inside the

Field element. The cross-site lookup field is displayed as two drop downs.

Defines the field that is used to sort the value in the list. The field name is case sensitive.

Sort Order

AutoPostBack

Parent Field

Parent Filter

Field Name

Filter Field

Name

Allows you to sort the values in ascending or descending order.

When selected, causes the Filter panel to refresh when the user changes the selection in a lookup field or cross-site lookup field.

You need to set AutoPostBack to true if this field is a lookup or a cross-site lookup field and it is being used to filter another lookup or cross-site lookup field in the Filter panel.

Defines another lookup or cross-site lookup field that is used to filter this field. The parent field must be listed before this field in the XML property.

Defines the field in the parent field that is used to filter this field. It is the primary key in the list that is used in the lookup or cross-site lookup field.

Defines the field in the list that is used by this lookup or cross-site lookup field that is filtered by the parent filter field.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 7. Searched Fields

Element Description

Display Field

Name

Shows the name of the field whose value is displayed in the list. The field name is case sensitive. Use this attribute instead of the Display Format attribute if you only want to display a single field in the list.

Display Format Indicates the format of the value that is displayed in the list. Define this attribute instead of the Display Field Name attribute if you want to display multiple fields in the drop-down menu. You can use the field replacement expression <%Field%> to refer to a field.

NOTE: If you are using Advanced Mode, you must use the encoded form of the < and > characters, which are < and >, respectively unless you type in the value in the

Searched Fields editor in the List View Editor, where the Editor will encode the characters automatically for you.

NOTE: For more information, see Display Format on page 11 .

Site URL Indicates the Site URL of the field. You can use an absolute or relative URL.

List Name

Site Name

Indicates the name of the List. The field name is case sensitive.

Indicates the name of the site specified in the Site URL. This is used in case you have multiple lists. In this case, the first drop-down menu to select the list will display as "List

Name in Site Name". You can use any name for the Site Name. It does not have to match the real title of the Site.

Behavior Page

The Behavior page allows you to configure behaviors, such as adding buttons or menus, so the user can perform operations when using the web part.

The Behavior page contains the following:

•

Views

Views

Table 8. Views

Element Description

Search Session Name If Turn On List View Link Mode is selected, the Chart View will retrieve the Viewed Lists and filter criteria from the session under this name. This value must match with the

Search Session Name property that you specify in the qListView. If the Turn On List View

Link Mode is not selected, the Chart View uses this search session name to store the search criteria specified in the Search/Filter panel.

Appearance Page

The Appearance page allows you to set the overall look and feel of the web part. This page contains the following:

•

•

•

•

•

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Ribbon

The Ribbon page allows you to set the display name of the Ribbon.

Table 9. Ribbon

Element

SharePoint Ribbon Tab

Name

Description

Allows you to edit the display name of the Ribbon tab.

Chart

The Chart Page allows you to define characteristics of your charts.

Chart Appearance contains the following elements

Table 10. Chart Appearance

Element

Chart Width

Chart Height

Chart Attributes

Trend Lines

Style

Series Appearance

Description

Allows you to specify the width of the chart in pixels.

Allows you to specify the height of the chart in pixels.

For more information, see

Chart Attributes on page 53

For more information, see

Trend Lines on page 72 .

For more information, see

Styles on page 73

For more information, see

Series Appearance on page 79

Chart Attributes

Advanced Mode

Turn on Advanced Mode if you want to edit Chart Attributes in XML format.

Title and Axis Name

The Chart View allows you to add a caption, sub-caption, x-axis title, and y-axis title for your charts. You can configure the font properties for each of them individually or collectively. You can also apply styles and animation effects to them.

Table 11. Title and Axis

Element

Caption

Sub-caption

X-Axis Name

Y-Axis Name

Rotate Y Axis Name

Y Axis Name Width

Description

Allows you to add a title.

Allows you to add a subtitle to your chart.

Allows you to set the x-axis name.

Allows you to seta y-axis name.

Allows you to set rotate the name of the y-axis. The y-axis name is rotated by default on the chart. If you're using UTF-8 characters, those characters would not appear in rotated mode, as the qChartView uses embedded characters for rotation. In that case, you can opt to show y-axis name in horizontal form by setting this attribute to false.

Allows you to set the maximum width that the non-rotated y-axis title can assume.

Border and Background

Background refers to the entire background of the chart.

You can also have a border around the chart. By default, the border is on in 2D charts and off in 3D Charts.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Shown below is a chart with a border around the chart.

Figure 2. Border around chart

Table 12. Border and Background

Element

Show Border

Border Color

Border Thickness

Border Alpha

Background Color

Background Alpha

Background Ratio

Background Angle

Background Image or

SWF URL

Background Image or

SWF Alpha

Description

Allows you to show a border around the chart. By default, it is set to true in 2D charts and false in 3D charts.

Allows you to set the border color of the chart. Use hex color code. To use the color picker, click on the color swatch square.

Allows you to set the border thickness of the chart (in pixels).

Allows you to set the border alpha (transparency) of the chart. The range is from 0-

100.

Allows you to fill the background as gradient. If you need to define two (or more) colors, separate them by a comma.

Allows you to specify a respective alpha (transparency) for each color code that you've specified in the Background Color attribute, Separate the alphas by comma.

The range is from 0-100

Allows you to set the ratio of each color in the gradient on a scale of 100. The total ratios specified as this attribute should sum up to 100. For example, if you want to plot a equidistant gradient for 2 colors, specify Background Ratio as "0,100".

Allows you to set the angle of the gradient fill.

Allows you to specify an external image (GIF,JPEG, or PNG only) or a SWF file as the background of the chart. Specify the URL (with relative path) of the background image or SWF File. Make sure that the image and the chart SWF file are in the same sub-domain.

If you specify an absolute URL, the background image will not be shown.

Allows you to configure the alpha of the background (loaded) image using this property.

Chart Canvas

Canvas refers to the area in which the chart is plotted.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Figure 3. Canvas

Table 13. Canvas

Element

Canvas Border Color

Canvas Border Thickness

Canvas Border Alpha

Canvas Background Color

Canvas Background Alpha

Canvas Background Ratio

Canvas Background Angle

Show Canvas Background

Show Canvas Base

Canvas Background Depth

Canvas Base Depth

Description

Allows you set the border color for the Canvas. Use hex color code. To use the color picker, click on the color swatch square.

Allows you set thickness of canvas border (in pixels)

Allows you set alpha for canvas border.

Allows you set the background color for the Canvas. Use hex color code. To use a gradient fill, specify all the colors of the gradient separated by commas.

Allows you to specify a respective alpha (transparency) for each color code that you've specified in Canvas Background Color attribute. Separate the alphas by comma.

Allows you to set the angle of the gradient fill (in degrees - 0-360).

Allows you to set the canvas background for a 3D chart (and canvas).

Allows you to set the canvas base for a 3D chart (and canvas).

Allows you to set the depth of canvas background for a 3D chart (and canvas).

Allows you to set the height of canvas base (in pixels) for a 3D chart (and canvas).

Data Plot

Plot refers to the column, lines in a column, line chart respectively.

For all the charts, you can specify custom color for each data plot using the color attribute of <set /> element.

The color must be in hex code format (RRGGBB) without #.

....

</chart> www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Figure 4. Data Plot

By default, most charts have FFFFFF as the plot gradient color. If you wish to use solid fills for the column (or area), use the Plot Gradient Color attribute without any color defined for it, that is, plotGradientColor=''

....

</chart>

Figure 5. Data Plot with solid fills

Table 14. Data Plot

Element

Plot Gradient Color

Plot Fill Angle

Plot Fill Ratio

Plot Fill Alpha

Show Plot Border

Plot Border Dashed

Plot Border Dash

Length www.agreeya.com

Description

Allows you to globally add a gradient color to the entire plot (column, area) of chart by specifying a color as its attribute.

Allows you set the fill angle for gradient if you've opted to fill the plot (column, area) as gradient. The range is from 0 - 360.

Allows you set the ration for gradient if you've opted to fill the plot (column, area) as gradient. The range is from 0 - 100.

Allows you set the fill alpha for gradient if you've opted to fill the plot (column, area) as gradient.

Allows you to show or hide the plot border. By default, each data plot (column, area, pie) shows a border.

Allows you to make the plot border dashed by setting this attribute to true.

Allows you to set the length of each dash.

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 14. Data Plot

Element

Plot Border Dash Gap

Use Round Edges

Description

Allows you to set the gap between each dash.

Allows you to plot columns/bars with rounded edges and glass effect gradients in charts that support 2D Columns or Bars (like column charts, bar charts, 2D combination charts).

NOTE: In this mode, the following features do not work:

• When you plot the columns with rounded edges, shadow is applied to them by default and show Shadow attribute no longer works. If you want to remove shadow from this mode, override the shadow with a new shadow style (applied to DATAPLOT) with alpha as 0.

• Plot fill properties like gradient color, angle. no longer work as the colors for gradient are now calculated by the chart itself.

• Plot border properties no longer work in this mode. Also, you cannot render the border as dash in this mode.

Data Labels

Data labels refer to the names for the data points that appear on the x-axis.

Figure 6. Data Labels

In the chart shown above, the dates are the data labels for the chart. By default, they get wrapped when there is not enough space on the chart.

Table 15. Data Labels

Element

Show Labels

Label Display

Slant Labels

Stagger Lines

Label Step

Description

Allows you to show the data labels.

Allows you to display the data labels can be displayed on the charts in the following ways:

• Wrap — By default, all the labels are shown in wrap mode, which enables you to wrap your long x-axis labels in multiple lines.

• Rotate — allows you to rotate or slant the x-axis labels.

• Stagger — distributes labels into multiple lines (by default 2).

NOTE: Rotate mode does not work if you have non-English characters in your x-axis labels as the charts use embedded fonts to render rotated labels.

Allows you to slant the labels at 45 degrees if you are using the Rotate mode for the Label

Display.

Allows you to choose the number of lines to stagger the labels if you are using the Stagger mode for the Label Display.

Allows you to show every n-th label instead of all labels if your X Axis labels represent a continuous quantity like time and date.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Data Values

Data values refer to the plot values such as line, column, and bar displayed beside it.

Figure 7. Data Values

In the chart shown above, the dollar values appearing above the column are the data values.

Table 16. Data Values

Element

Show Values

Rotate Values

Place Values

Inside

Description

Allows you to show data values. By default, the data values are shown. To hide them, set this attribute to false.

Allows you to rotate the values. By default, the chart will show the data values horizontally.

Allows you to place the data values inside the columns.

External Logo

You can load external logos at run-time to be displayed over the chart. The logos can be GIF/JPEG/PNG or SWF files that reside on the same sub-domain as the chart SWF.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Figure 8. External Logo

Table 17. External Logo

Element

Logo URL

Logo Position

Logo Alpha

Logo Scale

Logo Link

Description

Allows you to specify the URL of the logo. You may use relative or absolute URL as long as the image and the chart SWF file are in the same sub-domain.

Allows you to set the position of the logo can be configured using this attribute.

Allows you to set the opacity of the logo once it has loaded.

Allows you to set the scale of the logo, once it has loaded. The scale of 100 will display the logo in its original size. The scale of less than 100 will shrink the logo. The scale of more than 100 will enlarge the logo.

Allows you to link the logo to an external URL. This link can open in same window, new window, pop-up windows or frames. For information on how to format the link, see

Trend

Lines on page 72

Font Properties

You can specify generic font properties for all the text on the chart using the attributes given below.

Table 18. Font Properties

Element

Base Font Name

Base Font Size

Base Font Color

Outside Canvas Base

Font Name

Description

Allows you set the font face (family) of all the text (data labels, values) on chart. If you specify Outside Canvas Base Font Name attribute also, then this attribute controls only the font face of text within the chart canvas bounds.

Allows you to set the base font size of the chart, that is, all the values and the names in the chart that lie on the canvas are displayed using the font size provided here.

The range is from 0 - 72.

Allows you to set the base font color of the chart, that is, all the values and the names in the chart that lie on the canvas are displayed using the font color provided here. Use hex color code. To use the color picker, click on the color swatch square.

Allows you classify all the text in the chart into 2: the text inside the canvas which consists of only the tool tip and the data values and all the text outside the canvas.

You can define a base font group for all the text outside the canvas as well.

This attribute sets the base font family of the chart font which lies outside the canvas, that is, all the values and the names in the chart that lie outside the canvas are displayed using the font name provided here.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 18. Font Properties

Element

Outside Canvas Base

Font Size

Outside Canvas Base

Font Color

Description

Allows you to set the base font size of the chart, that is, all the values and the names in the chart that lie outside the canvas are displayed using the font size provided here. The range is from 0 - 72

Allows you to set the base font color of the chart, that is, all the values and the names in the chart that lie outside the canvas are displayed using the font color provided here.

Chart Palettes qChartView offers 5 palettes. The palette theme configures colors of the following:

• Background and border

• Canvas border and background

• Fonts

• 4Div lines

• Tooltip

• Anchors

• Legend

The internal palette does not cover the color of the data items. To change the color of the data items, use the

Palette Colors attribute or Series Appearance property.

Table 19. Chart Palettes

Element

Palette

Palette Colors

Description

Allows you to select the palette number.

Allows you to specify your own palette for data items by providing a list of hex colors.

Y Axis

Chart limits are the minimum and maximum y-axis values. qChartView automatically calculates the best chart limits when you do not specify them explicitly.

Table 20. Y Axix

Element

Y Axis Min Value

Y Axis Max Value

Set Adaptive Y Min

Description

Allows you to set the chart limits explicitly.

NOTE: The Y Axis Max Value must be bigger than any of the values in the data series. Otherwise, the value will not be honored by the chart view.

Allows you to set whether the y-axis lower limit would be 0 (in case of all positive values on chart) or should the y-axis lower limit adapt itself to a different figure based on values provided to the chart.

Primary Y Axis Min Value Allows you to explicitly set the lower limit of the primary y-axis. If you do not specify this value, it is automatically calculated by qChartView based on the data provided by you.

Primary Y Axis Max Value Allows you to explicitly set the upper limit of the primary y-axis. If you do not specify this value, it is automatically calculated by qChartView based on the data provided by you.

Secondary Y Axis Min

Value

Allows you to explicitly set the lower limit of the secondary y-axis. If you do not specify this value, it is automatically calculated by qChartView based on the data provided by you.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 20. Y Axix

Element

Secondary Y Axis Max

Value

Description

Allows you to explicitly set the upper limit of the secondary y-axis. If you do not specify this value, it is automatically calculated by qChartView based on the data provided by you.

Allows you to set the primary y-axis title.

Primary Y Axis Name

Secondary Y Axis Name Allows you to set the secondary y-axis title.

Set Adaptive Secondary

Y Min

Allows you to set whether the secondary y-axis lower limit would be 0 (in case of all positive values on chart) or should the y-axis lower limit adapt itself to a different figure based on values provided to the chart.

Primary Y Axis Name

Width

Secondary Y Axis Name

Width

Allows you to set choose a maximum width (in pixels) that is applied to primary yaxis name, if you do not rotate y-axis name.

If you opt to not rotate y-axis name, you can choose a maximum width (in pixels) that is applied to secondary y-axis name.

Division Lines

Divisional lines are horizontal lines running through the canvas. They break up the y axis into smaller units helping in better visual data interpretation.

Figure 9. Division Lines

Table 21. Division Lines

Element

Adjust Division Lines

Number of Division Lines

Div Line Effect

Show Y Axis Values

Y Axis Values Step

Division Lines

Division Lines Thickness

Description

Allows you to explicitly specify the y-axis upper and lower limit values, and also the number of divisional lines. In those cases, you need to automatic adjustment of divisional lines by setting this attribute to false. Then you can specify the yaxis upper and lower limits using the Y Axis Max Value and Y Axis Min Value attributes respectively.

Allows you to set the number of divisional lines.

Allows you to enable to apply an effect, for example, EMBOSS, or BEVEL to the divisional lines. This attribute is applicable to MultiSeriesCombination3D chart type only.

Allows you to show all the y-axis values.

Allows you to skip every nth Y Axis value.

Allows you to set the color for divisional lines.

Allows you to set the thickness of divisional lines. The range is from 1 - 5.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 21. Division Lines

Element

Division Lines Alpha

Is Dashed

Vertical Div Lines

Description

Allows you to set the alpha of divisional lines. The range is from 0 - 100.

Allows you to set the divisional line to be dashed.

Division Lines Dash Length Allows you to set the length of each dash.

Division Lines Dash Gap Allows you to set the gap between each dash.

Show Alternate H Grid

Color

Allows you to set the horizontal grid bands alternately between the divisional lines for all 2D charts. They can be hidden by setting this attribute to false.

Alternate H Grid Color

Alternate H Grid Alpha

Allows you to set the color of the horizontal grid bands.

Allows you to set the alpha of the horizontal grid bands. The range is from 0 -

100.

Allows you to set the vertical divisional lines running through the canvas in a line/area chart. They help in relating the data to its respective label, when there is a large amount of data.

Number of Vertical Div

Lines

Allows you to set the number of vertical div lines.

Vertical Div Lines Color Allows you to set the color of the vertical axis division lines.

Vertical Div Lines Thickness Allows you to set the thickness of the vertical axis division lines in pixels.

Vertical Div Lines Alpha Allows you to set the alpha of vertical axis division lines. The range is from 0 -

100.

Is Dashed

Vertical Div Lines Dash

Length

Allows you to set the vertical axis division lines as dashed.

Allows you to set the length of each dash.

Vertical Div Lines Dash Gap Allows you to set the gap between each dash..

Show Alternate V Grid

Color

Alternate V Grid Color

Alternate V Grid Alpha

Allows you to set the vertical grid bands alternately between the vertical divisional lines.

Allows you to set the color of the alternate vertical grid bands.

Allows you to set the alpha (transparency) of the alternate vertical grid bands.

Show V Line Label Border Allows you to set the borders for all labels for vLines in the chart. If you want to show label border for just a particular vLine, you can override this value by specifying border configuration for that specific vLine.

Zero Plane

Zero plane is a plane which separates the positive and negative numbers on a chart having both of them.

Figure 10. Zero Plane www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 22. Zero Plane element

Show Zero Plane

Zero Plane Color

Zero Plane Alpha

Zero Plane Thickness

Zero Plane Show Border

Zero Plane Border Color

Zero Plane Mesh description

Allows you set the zero plane in the column, line, and the area chart. It can be removed in the line chart but not in the column or the area chart because they use this as their base to draw. It can be removed in the line chart by setting this attribute to false.

Allows you set the color of the zero plane.

Allows you set the alpha (transparency) of the zero plane. The range is from 0 -

100.

Allows you set the thickness of the zero plane in pixels.

Allows you set the whether to show border of zero plane for a 3D chart.

Allows you set the border color of zero plane for a 3D chart.

Allows you set the whether to draw the zero plane as a wireframe mesh or as a filled plane. If set to true, a mesh on the zero plane of the chart is drawn. This attribute is applicable to MultiSeriesCombination3D chart type only.

Anchors

Each data point in a line or area chart is represented by an anchor. The anchors help identify the data point better in the chart. They also show a tool tip showing the data point details when the mouse is hovered over them, and can be linked to other pages as well.

Figure 11. Anchors

Table 23. Anchors

Element

Draw Anchors

Anchor Alpha

Anchor Sides

Description

Allows you show the anchors. The anchors are displayed by default. To hide them, set this attribute to false. Once the anchors are hidden, the tool tips for the data points will not be displayed and the links will not work.

Allows you set the alpha of entire anchors. The range is from 0 - 100. If you need to hide the anchors but still have tool tip and link, set Anchor Alpha to ‘0’

Allows you to set the number of sides the anchor will have. For example, an anchor with

3 sides would represent a triangle, with 4 it would be a square. The range is from 3 - 20.

Anchor Radius Allows you to set the radius (in pixels) of the anchor. The greater the radius, the bigger the anchor size.

Anchor Border Color Allows you to set the border color of anchors. www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 23. Anchors

Element

Anchor Border

Thickness

Anchor Background

Color

Anchor Background

Alpha

Description

Allows you to set the border thickness (in pixels) of the anchors.

Allows you to set the background color of anchors.

Allows you to set the alpha of anchor background. The range is from 0 - 100.

Tool Tip

A tool tip is shown when the mouse is hovered over a particular data point. It shows the following information:

• Single series chart (except pie & doughnut): Name & value

• Pie & Doughnut: Name & value/percentage

• Multi-series & combination chart: Series Name, Category Name, Data Value

Figure 12. Tool Tip

Table 24. Tool Tip

Element

Show Tool Tip

Show Tool Tip Shadow

Tool Tip Border Color

Description

Allows you to set the tool tip.

Allows you to show the tool tip shadow.

Allows you to customize the border color of the tool tip.

Tool Tip Background Color Allows you to customize the background color of the tool tip.

Tool Tip Separator Character Allows you to specify a character to separate the name and value displayed in tool tip.

Series Name in Tool Tip Allows you to control whether series name will appear in the tool tip. For multiseries and combination charts, qChartView shows the following information in tool tip (unless tool text is explicitly defined): "Series Name, Category Name,

Data Value".

Show Percent In Tool Tip Allows you to show percentage values in Tool Tip for Pie or Doughnut chart. By default, the Pie or Doughnut chart shows percentage values in Tool Tip.

Paddings and Margins qChartView lets you define various paddings and margins using pixels. These attributes are listed one-by-one below.

By default, qChartView provides some padding between the chart border and the canvas. This is called the chart margin and each margin can be set individually.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Figure 13. Paddings and Margins

Table 25. Paddings and Margins

Element

Left Margin

Right Margin

Top Margin

Description

Allows you to set the amount of empty space on the left side of your chart. Nothing is rendered in this space.

Allows you to set the amount of empty space on the right side of your chart. Nothing is rendered in this space.

Allows you to set the amount of empty space ton the top of your chart. Nothing is rendered in this space.

Bottom Margin

Canvas Left Margin

Allows you to set the amount of empty space on the bottom of your chart. Nothing is rendered in this space.

Allows you to set the amount of empty space on the left side of the canvas. Nothing is rendered in this space.

Canvas Right Margin Allows you to set the amount of empty space on the right side of the canvas. Nothing is rendered in this space.

Canvas Top Margin Allows you to set the amount of empty space t on the top of the canvas. Nothing is rendered in this space.

Canvas Bottom

Margin

Caption Padding

Allows you to set the amount of empty space on the bottom of the canvas. Nothing is rendered in this space.

Allows you to set the amount of space between the caption of the chart and the top of the chart canvas. If you have a sub-caption defined in the chart, it controls the space between the sub-caption and the top of the chart canvas.

X Label Gap

Y Label Gap

Allows you to set the vertical space between the labels and canvas wall edge. If you want more space between the canvas and the x-axis labels, you can use this attribute to control it.

Allows you set the horizontal space between the canvas wall edge and the y-axis values or trend line values (on left/right side). This is particularly useful, when you want more space between your canvas and y-axis values.

X Axis Name Padding Allows you to set the distance between the top of x-axis title and the bottom of data labels (or canvas, if data labels are not shown).

Y Axis Name Padding Allows you to set the padding between the y-axis name and values.

Y Axis Values Padding Allows you to set the padding between the left end of the chart canvas and the y-axis values.

Label Padding Allows you to set the vertical space between the canvas bottom edge and the data labels.

Value Padding Allows you to control the space between your columns/anchors and the value textboxes.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 25. Paddings and Margins

Element

Canvas Padding

Plot Space Percent

Description

For a line/area chart, allows you to set the padding between the canvas border and the position where the line/area chart begins to draw is called canvas padding.

On a column chart, allows you to set the spacing between two columns. By default, the spacing is set to 20% of canvas width. For example, if you wanted all columns to stick to each other without any space in between, you can set plotSpacePercent to 0. Similarly, if you want very thin columns, you can set plotSpacePercent to its max value of 80.

Smart Labels and Lines

Smart labels are the labels for the pie/doughnut chart. The smart labels prevent overlapping of labels even when large number of labels are placed in close vicinity.

Figure 14. Smart Labels and Lines

Table 26. Smart Labels and Lines

Element

Enable Smart Labels

Description

Allows you to enable the smart labels (if required to save chart space or when there are few pie segments). When the smart labels are switched off, the pie labels would be displayed without the smart label lines. But if they number of labels increases and smart labels are not being used, then the labels might overlap.

Smart Line Color Allows you to set the color of smart label connector lines.

Smart Line Thickness Allows you to set the thickness (in pixels) of smart label connector lines.

Smart Line Alpha Allows you to set the alpha (transparency) of smart label connector lines. The range is

0 - 100.

Is Smart Line Slanted Allows you to set the smart lines (smart label connector lines) in two ways: Slanted or

Straight.

Label Distance Allows you to set the distance of the label/value text boxes from the pie/doughnut edge in pixels. You must set Enable Smart Labels to false for this attribute to take effect.

Smart Label Clearance Allows you to set the clearance distance of a label (for sliced-in pies) from adjacent sliced out pies in pixels.

Skip Overlap Labels Allows you to skip the overlapping labels if you have too many labels in your pie chart

(which is difficult to adjust even using smart labels). In that case, you have the option to set this attribute to true. The labels of the least significant pies would be removed.

Show Percent Values Allows you to set the actual value of the pie segment to be displayed in the label or the percentage value. By default, the actual values are displayed. When you want to display their percentages, set this attribute to true. www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Legend

In multi-series/combination charts, the series name of each dataset shows up in the legend of the chart. This helps you relate a data plot to its series name using its color. A dynamically generated series will be prefixed in the legend with the series name if a series name has been configured. The legend does not appear for singleseries charts because there is only one series in the chart.

Figure 15. Legend

The legend below the chart helps identify the series name.

Table 27. Legend

Element

Show Legend

Interactive Legend

Legend Caption

Legend Marker Circle

Reverse Legend

Legend Position

Allow Drag

Description

Allows you to show the legend.

Allows you to make the legend interactive. Interactive Legend only works for a combination chart. In the combination chart, you can click the legend to show/hide the values of the data items. If you set Interactive Legend to false, then legend will not be interactive.

Allows you to add a caption for the entire legend by setting the same here.

Allows you to use square legend keys or circular ones.

Allows you to reverse the order of items in legend.

Allows you to place the legend in 2 positions: RIGHT and BOTTOM. It gets placed below the canvas by default. To place it to the right of the chart canvas, set Legend

Position = 'RIGHT'.

Allows you to make the legend dragable. End viewers of the chart can drag the legend around on the chart.

Allows you to set the background color for the legend. Legend Background

Color

Legend Background

Alpha

Legend Border Color

Legend Border

Thickness

Legend Border Alpha

Legend Shadow

Legend Scroll

Background Color

Allows you to set the background alpha (transparency) for the legend. The range is 0

- 100.

Allows you to set the border color for the legend.

Allows you to set the border thickness, in pixels, for the legend.

Allows you to set the border alpha for the legend. The range is 0 - 100.

Allows you to set a shadow for legend.

Allows you to set the background color of the scroll bar. If you've too many items on the legend, a scroll bar appears.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 27. Legend

Element Description

Legend Scroll Bar Color Allows you to set the bar color of the scroll bar. If you've too many items on the legend, a scroll bar shows up on the same.

Legend Scroll Button

Color

Allows you to set the color of buttons on the scroll bar. If you've too many items on the legend, a scroll bar shows up on the same.If you've too many items on the legend, a scroll bar shows up on the same.

Number Formatting

qChartView offers you a lot of options to format your numbers on the chart from number prefixes and suffixes to controlling the decimal places to scaling your numbers based on a pre-defined scale.

Table 28. Number Formatting

Element

Number Scale Unit

Number Scale Value

Number Prefix

Description

Format Number

Format Number Scale

Allows you to determine whether the numbers displayed on the chart are formatted using commas, for example, 40,000 if Format Number is true and 40000 if Format

Number is false.

Allows you to determine whether to add K (thousands) and M (millions) to a number after truncating and rounding it - for example, if Format Number Scale is set true,

1043 would become 1.04K (with decimals set to 2 places). Same with numbers in millions - a M will added at the end.

Default Number Scale Allows you to set the default unit of the numbers that you are providing to the chart.

Allows you to set the unit of each block of the scale.

Allows you to set the range of the various blocks that constitute the scale.

Number Suffix

Allows you to add a prefix to all the numbers visible on the graph. For example, to represent all dollars figure on the chart, you could specify this attribute to ' $' to show like $40000, $50000.

Allows you to add a suffix to all the numbers visible on the graph. For example, to represent all figure quantified as per annum on the chart, you could specify this attribute to ' /a' to show like 40000/a, 50000/a.

Decimal Separator

Thousand Separator

In Decimal Separator

Allows you to specify the character to be used as the decimal separator in a number.

Allows you to specify the character to be used as the thousands separator in a number.

Allows you to input the decimal separator.

In Thousand Separator Allows you to input the thousand separator.

Decimals Allows you to set the number of decimal places to which all numbers on the chart would be rounded. The range is from 0 - 10.

Force Decimals Allows you to add 0 padding at the end of decimal numbers. For example, if you set decimals as 2 and a number is 23.4. If force Decimals is set to 1, qChartView will convert the number to 23.40 (note the extra 0 at the end).

Y Axis Value Decimals Allows you to specify the div line values decimal precision. The range is from 0 - 10.

3D Chart Attributes

The 3D Combination chart is a true 3D chart which offers features such as viewing from a specific camera angle, definition of light source, use of dynamic lighting, and rotation.

The various elements of a 3D Combination chart are shown below: www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Figure 16. 3D Charts

Table 29. 3D Charts

Element

Is 2D

Chart Order

Chart On Top

Auto Scaling

Allow Scaling

Description

Allows you to decide whether initially to draw a 2D view of the chart.

Allows you to set the order by which different types of charts will appear. The value can be any combination of 'column', 'line' or 'area', each separated by a comma. By default, the order is: line, column, area. You can change to any order you like, for example, 'column, area, line' or 'line, area'.

Allows you to decide whether or not the chart canvas is placed over the extra chart elements (caption, subcaption, legend). This feature is visible when the chart canvas is zoomed/scaled. +

Allows you to decide whether or not the chart is allowed to best fit automatically after a user interaction, for example, rotation.

Allows you to set whether to allow zoom-in/zoom-out.

NOTE: Scaling or use of mouse is compatible only with Windows

Operating System. www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 29. 3D Charts

Element

Animate 3D

Exe Time

Camera Angle

X/Camera Angle Y

Start Angle X/End

Angle X

Start Angle Y/End

Angle Y

Light Angle X/Light

Angle Y

Description

Allows you to show the initial plot animation. By default, the 3D chart is rendered with a default animation.

To globally set off all animation set Animation to false. This would not only set off 3D animations, but also disable all animations applied using <styles>. The additional use of Animate 3D can override this value. Hence, a combination of Animation = false and

Animate 3D = true would disable all animations applied using <styles> but, enable animation of the 3D canvas.

Allows you to set the time that the chart takes to animate. This attribute also sets the time taken by the chart canvas to animate when the chart is transformed to any view

(View3D, View 2D, Reset View).

Allows you to define the camera angle.

• Camera Angle X lets you specify the camera angle (for view around the chart vertically) from which the chart is viewed initially in no animation mode (when animate3D='0) . If not specified, the default value is 30. The range is from 0 to

360 and 0 to -360.

• Camera Angle Y lets you specify the camera angle (for view around the chart horizontally) from which the chart is viewed initially in no animation mode

(when animate3D='0). If not specified, the default value is -45. The range is from 0 to 360 and 0 to -360.

Since this is a true 3D chart, it's rendered as a 3D model that is viewed from a specific camera angle. The camera can simply be defined as the eye of a real viewer. When you have set Animate 3D to 0, you can define the camera angle using two attributes -

Camera Angle X and Camera Angle Y.

When you use animation, you can also set up the starting camera view from which the camera view starts animating, and the final camera view to which the chart would finally be rotated. For this, you need to use Start Angle X, Start Angle Y, End Angle X and End Angle Y attributes.

Start Angle X — Allows you to specify the view angle (for view around the chart vertically) at which rotation of the chart starts (when the chart is initialized). The rotation stops at endAngX. If not specified, the default values for both the attributes are 30. The range is from 0 to 360 and 0 to -360. This is for animated charts (when animate3D='1').

End Angle X — Allows you to specify the view angle (for view around the chart vertically) at which rotation of the chart ends (when the chart is initialized). The rotation starts at startAngX. If not specified, the default values for both the attributes are 30. The range is from 0 to 360 and 0 to -360. This is for animated charts (when animate3D='1').

Start Angle Y — Allows you to specify the view angle (for view around the chart horizontally) from which rotation of the chart starts (when the chart is initialized).

The rotation stops at endAngY. If not specified, the default values for both the attributes are -45. The range is from 0 to 360 and 0 to -360. This is for animated charts

(when animate3D='1').

End Angle Y — Allows you to specify the view angle (for view around the chart horizontally) at which rotation of the chart ends (when the chart is initialized). The rotation starts at startAngY. If not specified, the default values for both the attributes are -45. The range is from 0 to 360 and 0 to -360. This is for animated charts (when animate3D='1').

Light Angle X — Allows you to specify the angular position of the light source (for Xaxis) w.r.t the chart world coordinate system. The range is from 0 to 360 and 0 to -360.

Light Angle Y — Allows you to specify the angular position of the light source (for Yaxis) w.r.t the chart world coordinate system. The range is from 0 to 360 and 0 to -360.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 29. 3D Charts

Element

Intensity

Dynamic Shading

Bright 2D

Allow Rotation

Constrain Vertical

Rotation

Minimum Vertical

Rotation Angle

Maximum Horizontal

Rotation Angle

Z Depth

Z Gap Plot

YZ Wall Depth

ZX Wall Depth

XY Wall Depth

Clustered

Description

Allows you to control the intensity of the light that falls on the chart elements. The range of this attribute lies between 0 to 10. 10 would provide light with maximum intensity, and you will get the brightest view of the chart. If you set the value to 0, light is provided with least intensity. However, the chart will never appear in full darkness even you set intensity to 0. A faint light is always made available. By default, the value is set to 2.5.

Allows you to set the chart in dynamic shading/non-world mode. If set to false, the chart is in world mode.

For example, you can have a Combination 3D Chart that has two different lighting systems to light up the chart elements. The light source may be fixed outside the chart. This causes only those sides of the chart to get the light which face the light source. Thus, when the chart is manually rotated, dynamic shades are created on the chart surfaces. This system of lighting is called dynamic shading.

World lighting is where the light source is fixed with the chart. In this case, the light source rotates with the rotation of the chart. Hence, the surface facing the light source gets lightened and continues to be in the bright side despite any manual rotation of the chart being made, whereas the surface not facing the light keeps remaining in darkness with every chart rotation.

Allows you to set maximum brightness to the chart while being rendered in 2D mode.

This is applicable only when you've set Dynamic Shading to true. However, once you set this attribute to true, you cannot use Light Angle X and Light Angle Y attributes.

Rather, it automatically sets up the light sources to give the brightest view of the chart in 2D mode.

Allows you to decide whether to stop any user interactive rotation of the chart or not.

If it is set to false, the interactive rotation is barred.

Allows you to rotate up to 90 degrees (top or bottom) from 0 degree position. You can also specify these limits using Minimum Vertical Rotation Angle and Maximum Vertical

Rotation Angle attributes. This is only applicable to user's mouse interactively with the chart.

Allows you to set the minimum allowed angle up to which a user can rotate the chart vertically. This is only applicable to user's mouse interactively with the chart.

Allows you to set the maximum allowed angle up to which a user can rotate the chart horizontally. This is only applicable to user's mouse interactively with the chart.

Allows you to set the depth (3D thickness) of each DATAPLOT object using zDepth attribute.

Allows you to specify a gap between all dataplots in a 3D combination chart, as more than one DATAPLOT types can exist due to different datasets.

A Z Gap Plot set to 0 will show no gap between dataplots.

Allows you to set the depth of the YZ wall of 3D chart.

Allows you to set the depth of the ZX wall of 3D chart.

Allows you to set the depth of the XYwall of 3D chart.

Allows you to set a Combination 3D chart in clustered mode. In a Combination 3D chart, you can plot multiple number of datasets which can be rendered as Column.

Custom About Menu Item

You can change the default "About QuickApps for SharePoint" context menu item to show your label and link it to your own URL using the below attributes.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 30. Custom About Menu

Element

Show About Menu

Item

Description

Allows you to set up a custom context menu in the chart, which can show your text and can be linked to your URL. For example, you can set the context menu of the chart to include "About your company name" and then link to your company home page. By default, the chart shows "About QuickApps for

SharePoint" when right-clicked.

About Menu Item

Label

Allows you to set a menu item label for the custom context menu item.

About Menu Item Link Allows you to provide a link for the custom context menu item. You can specify the link in qChartView link format to be able to open the same in new window, pop-ups, frames or as JavaScript links.

Functional

These attributes let you control a variety of functional elements on the chart.

Table 31. Functional

Element Description

Animation Allows you to control animation in your charts. If you do not want to animate any part of the chart, set this to false. This would also disable all animations applied using <styles>. Animate 3D can override this value. By default, animation is set to true.

Click URL Allows you to set a URL as a hotspot for a chart. For more information, see Formatting Links.

Trend Lines

Trend Lines allow you to specify the horizontal/vertical lines spanning the chart canvas which aid in interpretation of data with respect to some pre-determined value.

Trend Lines contain the following:

Table 32. Trend Lines

Element Description

Advanced Mode Turn on if you want to edit Trend Lines in XML format.

Start Value

End Value

Allows you to set the start value for the trend line

Allows you to set the ending y-axis value for the trend line

Display Value

Color

Is Trend Zone

Thickness

Allows you to display a string caption for the trend line by its side

Allows you to set the color of the trend line and its text

Allows you to set the trend as a zone rather than a line

Allows you to set the thickness of the trend line

Alpha

Dashed

Dash Length

Dash Gap

Value on Right

Tool Text

Parent Y Axis

Allows you to set the alpha transparency of the trend line

Allows you to set the trend line as a dashed line

Allows you to set the length of each dash in pixels

Allows you to set the gap length between each dash

Allows you to show if the trend line is on the right or left side of the chart

Allows you to show tool text when hovered over a trend line

Allows to you set whether the trend line should be plotted against a primary or secondary Y axis (If you use a dual Y Axis chart). If you do not use a dual Y axis chart, the trend line is plotted against the primary Y axis.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Styles

Styles help you apply font, effects and animations to various objects of the chart. Styles lends a simple mechanism using which you can easily control the visual layout of charts.

Styles allows you to:

• Define your own style attributes using the Style Editor.

• Associate them with defined Objects of the chart from within the Style Editor.

• Have better control over chart look & feel.

• Group together in one element in the XML document, thereby separating data from visual formatting.

• Store the entire style definition in a central location in your application, so that all charts within application can utilize it.

• Re-use style definitions. Each style can be applied to multiple chart objects or vice versa.

Each object on the chart has been assigned a unique name, for direct association with style definitions. For example, the background of the chart is termed as BACKGROUND. Similarly, the plot (columns, lines, areas) on the chart is named as DATAPLOT. This enables you to associate each style to multiple chart objects or associate multiple chart objects to a particular style.

You can find the list of objects for each chart in individual Chart XML Sheet.

You can define one or more styles for a chart from the Styles Editor. To add a style, click Add. To see more attributes for a particular style, click Edit for the style. To delete a style, select the check box of the style and click Delete.

Styles contains the following:

Table 33. Styles

Element

Advanced

Mode

Name

Description

Turn on if you want to edit Styles in XML format:

</definition>

</application>

</styles>

Allows you to assign your custom name for the style definition. Style name can only include alphabets and numbers. Punctuation marks (including underscore) should not be used. Style name must be unique, that is, two style definitions cannot have the same name.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 33. Styles

Element

Type

Description

Allows you to set the following types:

• Font — allows you to control text properties for all the text on the chart. You can set:

Font — allows you to set the font type

Size — allows you to set the font size

Color — allows you to set the font color

Bold — allows you to set the font weigh

Underline — allows you to assign underline character

Background Color — allows you to set the background color

Border Color — allows you to set the border color

Is HTML — allows you to render the text as HTML

Left Margin — allows you to set the left margin of the text

Letter Spacing — allows you to set the space between the letters in the text

• Animation — Allows you to define your custom animations for different elements of the chart. By default, qChartView animates the data plot (columns, lines, area) only.

However, you can define your custom animations for other chart objects (like captions, titles, values) in the XML. Each chart object can have multiple animation properties

(like x, y, xscale, yscale, alpha) and each sequence can have its own duration.

Param — Allows you to you specify the property of chart object which you want to animate, such a _x (animate the x position), _y (animate the y position), _xScale

(animate the x-scale), _yScale (animate the y-scale), alpha (helps the alpha transition animation effect), _rotation (animate pies and doughnuts in circles)

Start — allows you to set the start value of the animation

Duration — allows you to control the duration of animation in seconds

Easing — allows you to specify the pattern of animation easing.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 33. Styles

Element

Type

Description

• Shadow — Allows you to apply shadow effect to any object on the chart.

Distance — allows you to set the offset distance of the shadow

Angle — allows you to set the angle of the shadow

Color — allows you to set the color of the shadow

Alpha — allows you to set the alpha transparency of the shadow

BlurX — allows you set the amount of horizontal blur on the shadow. Values that are a power of 2 (such as 2, 4, 8, 16 and 32) are optimized to render more quickly than other values.

BlurY — allows you to set the amount of vertical blur on the shadow. Values that are a power of 2 (such as 2, 4, 8, 16 and 32) are optimized to render more quickly than other values.

Strength — allows you to set the strength of the imprint or spread. The higher the value, the more color is imprinted and the stronger the contrast between the shadow and the background.

Quality — allows you to set the number of times to apply the shadow effect. Valid values are 0 to 15. The default value is 1, which is equivalent to low quality. A value of

2 is medium quality, and a value of 3 is high quality. Shadow with lower values are rendered quicker

• Glow — lets you apply glow effects to objects on the chart.

Color — allows you to set the color of the glow

Alpha — allows you to set the alpha transparency of the glow

BlurX — allows you set the amount of horizontal blur on the glow. Values that are a power of 2 (such as 2, 4, 8, 16 and 32) are optimized to render more quickly than other values.

BlurY — allows you to set the amount of vertical blur on the glow. Values that are a power of 2 (such as 2, 4, 8, 16 and 32) are optimized to render more quickly than other values.

Strength — allows you to set the strength of the imprint or spread. The higher the value, the more color is imprinted and the stronger the contrast between the shadow and the background.

Quality — allows you to set the number of times to apply the glow effect. Valid values are 0 to 15. The default value is 1, which is equivalent to low quality. A value of 2 is medium quality, and a value of 3 is high quality. Shadow with lower values are rendered quicker.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 33. Styles

Element Description

• Bevel — Allows you to apply bevel effect for any of the chart objects.

Angle — allows you to set the angle of the bevel

Distance — allows you to set the offset distance of the bevel

Shadow Color — allows you to set the shadow color of the bevel

Shadow Alpha — allows you to set the alpha transparency value of the shadow color

Highlight Color — allows you to set the highlight color of the bevel

Highlight Alpha — allows you to set the alpha transparency value of the highlight color

BlurX — allows you set the amount of horizontal blur on the bevel. Values that are a power of 2 (such as 2, 4, 8, 16 and 32) are optimized to render more quickly than other values.

BlurY — allows you to set the amount of vertical blur on the bevel. Values that are a power of 2 (such as 2, 4, 8, 16 and 32) are optimized to render more quickly than other values.

Strength — allows you to set the strength of the imprint or spread. The higher the value, the more color is imprinted and the stronger the contrast between the shadow and the background.

Quality — allows you to set the number of times to apply the bevel. Valid values are 0 to 15. The default value is 1, which is equivalent to low quality. A value of 2 is medium quality, and a value of 3 is high quality. Shadow with lower values are rendered quicker.

• Blur — Allows you to create a blur effect for any object on the chart.

BlurX — allows you set the amount of horizontal blur. Values that are a power of 2 (such as 2, 4, 8, 16 and 32) are optimized to render more quickly than other values.

BlurY — allows you to set the amount of vertical blur. Values that are a power of 2 (such as 2, 4, 8, 16 and 32) are optimized to render more quickly than other values.

Quality — allows you to set the number of times to apply the filter. Valid values are 0 to

15. The default value is 1, which is equivalent to low quality. A value of 2 is medium quality, and a value of 3 is high quality. Shadow with lower values are rendered quicker.

Custom defined styles to chart objects

To apply your defined styles to chart objects, make sure that you have the list of chart objects present in each chart.

For example, the following chart objects are for 2D Single Series Column Chart:

Table 34. Chart Objects for 2D Series Column Chart

Object Name

BACKGROUND

CANVAS

Description entire background of the chart

T the area in which the actual chart is plotted. It is represented by a bounded rectangle. In 3D charts, it refers to the 3D base on which the columns are built.

Features Supported Animation Parameters Supported

• Animation

• Shadow

• Glow

• Bevel

• Blur

• _alpha

• _x

• _y

• _xScale

• _yScale

• Animation

• Shadow

• Glow

• Bevel

• Blur

• _alpha

• _x

• _y

• _xScale

• _yScale www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 34. Chart Objects for 2D Series Column Chart

Object Name

CAPTION

DATALABELS

DATAPLOT

DATAVALUES

DIVLINES

HGRID

SUBCAPTION

TOOLTIP

Description

The heading of the chart

The x-axis labels of the data

The actual plot of the chart. For example, in Column 2D chart, columns are referred to as

DATAPLOT.

The plot values that is, value of each data (line, column, bar, pie), which is displayed beside the data plot.

The horizontal or vertical lines running through the canvas. Each divisional line signifies a smaller unit of the entire axis thus aiding the users in interpreting the chart.

Alternate color bands between two successive horizontal divisional lines

The sub-heading of the chart

The tool tip shown when mouse is hovered over the data plots

• Animation

• Shadow

• Glow

• Bevel

• Blur

• Animation

• Font

• Shadow

• Glow

• Bevel

• Blur

• Animation

• Shadow

• Glow

• Bevel

• Blur

• Animation

• Shadow

• Glow

• Bevel

• Blur

Features Supported Animation Parameters Supported

• Animation

• Font

• Shadow

• Glow

• Bevel

• Blur

• Animation

• Font

• Shadow

• Glow

• Bevel

• Blur

• _alpha

• _x

• _y

• _alpha

• _x

• _y

• _alpha

• _x

• _y

• _xScale

• _yScale

• _alpha

• _x

• _y

• _alpha

• _y

• _yScale

• _alpha

• _y

• _xScale

• _yScale

• Animation

• Font

• Shadow

• Glow

• Bevel

• Blur

• Font (only

Font, Size and Color attributes are supported)

• _alpha

• _x

• _y www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 34. Chart Objects for 2D Series Column Chart

Object Name Description

TRENDLINES Horizontal/vertical lines spanning the chart canvas which aid in interpretation of data with respect to some pre-determined value.

TRENDVALUES

VLINES

XAXISNAME

The display values of trend-lines

(if any)

Vertical separator lines that help you separate blocks of data.

These lines run through the height of the chart, thereby segregating data into different blocks. In case of bar charts, they are horizontal and run through the width of chart.

The x-axis title of the chart

Features Supported Animation Parameters Supported

• Animation

• Shadow

• Glow

• Bevel

• Blur

• Animation

• Font

• Shadow

• Glow

• Bevel

• Blur

• _alpha

• _y

• _xScale

• _yScale

•

• _alpha

• _x

• _y

• Animation

• Shadow

• Glow

• Bevel

• Blur

• _alpha

• _y

• _xScale

• _yScale

YAXISNAME

YAXISVALUES

The y-axis title of the chart

The limit values or divisional line values, which are displayed along the y-axis of the chart

• Animation

• Font

• Shadow

• Glow

• Bevel

• Blur

• Animation

• Font

• Shadow

• Glow

• Bevel

• Blur

• Animation

• Font

• Shadow

• Glow

• Bevel

• Blur

• _alpha

• _x

• _y

• _alpha

• _x

• _y

• _alpha

• _x

• _y

• _rotation

The following XML does the work of applying styles to different chart objects:

</application>

Each <apply> element helps to apply multiple styles to one chart object; for example, in our code, we first apply the MyFirstFontStyle font style to Caption of the chart and then apply the shadow style MyFirstShadow to the same object.

If you are using multiple styles, ensure: www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

• you separate the style names using comma for example, <apply toObject='Caption' styles='MyFirstFontStyle,MyFirstShadow' />

• when you apply a single style to multiple objects, define <apply> element for each object and then assign the style for it. for example,

You CANNOT separate the object list by comma and then assign a single style to it - the following is

INVALID:

• The style name specified during application has been defined earlier in style definition and the spelling are correct, else, qChartView will ignore it and log the error in Debug Window.

Series Appearance

This property enables you to specify the appearance of the data series and data items in the series.

The Appearance element can contain one or more Series Appearance elements. Each Series Appearance element controls the appearance of the data series in the chart. Therefore, the first Series Appearance element controls the appearance of the first data series, the second one contains the second data series, and so on. See the Configuration property on how to define multiple data series in the chart.

The Series Appearance contains the following:

Table 35. Series Appearance

Element Description

Advanced Mode Turn on if you want to edit Series Appearance in XML format:

</SeriesAppearances>

</SeriesAppearances>

</Appearance>

Color

Alpha

Ratio

Allows you to set the color using which columns, lines, area of that dataset would be drawn.

Allows you to set the alpha (transparency) of the entire dataset at the Series Appearance level. The range is from 0 - 100.

Allows you to control the ratio of each color using a comma separated list of ratios, if you are showing columns as gradients,

Allows you to set whether this dataset would appear as dashed.

Dashed

Show Plot

Border

Allows you to set whether to show the border of this dataset.

Allows you to set the color of the plot border.

Plot Border

Color

Plot Border

Thickness

Plot Border

Alpha

Allows you to set the thickness of the plot border lines.

Allows you to set the alpha transparency of the plot border lines www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 35. Series Appearance

Element

Line Thickness Allows you to set the thickness of the lines for the particular dataset in pixels.

Line Dash

Length

Line Dash Gap

Allows you to define the length of the dash, if the lines are to be shown as dash for the particular dataset.

Allows you to define the length of the gap between dashes, if the lines are to be shown as dash for the particular dataset.

Draw Anchors

Anchor Sides

Allows you set whether to draw anchors for the particular dataset. If the anchors are not shown, then the tool tip and links will not work for the dataset.

Allows you set the number of sides that the anchors of the particular dataset will have. For example, an anchor with 3 sides would represent a triangle, with 4 it would be a square and so on. The range is from 3 - 20.

Anchor Radius

Description

Anchor Border

Color

Anchor Border

Thickness

Allows you to set the radius (in pixels) of the anchors of the particular dataset. Greater the radius, bigger would be the anchor size.

Allows you set the border color of anchors of the particular dataset. Use hex code of colors.

To use the color picker, click on the color swatch square.

Allows you set border thickness of anchors of the particular dataset in pixels.

Anchor

Background

Color

Anchor Alpha

Allows you set the background color of anchors of the particular dataset. Use hex code of colors. To use the color picker, click on the color swatch square.

Anchor

Background

Alpha

Allows you set the alpha of entire anchors of the particular dataset. If you need to hide the anchors for the dataset but still enable tool tips, set this as 0.

Allows you set the alpha (transparency) of anchor background of the particular dataset. The range is from 0 - 100.

The Series Appearance element can contain zero or more Item Appearance elements. If you do specify any Item

Appearance element, every item in the series is displayed according to the settings in the Series Appearance element. The Item Appearance is applied as follows:

• If you specify the Item Value in the Item Appearance, the settings are applied based on the X axis value of the item. For example, if the X axis shows the value of the Priority field in the Tasks list, you can make all the High priority items displayed in red.

• If you specify Y Axis Value Range in the Item Appearance, the settings are applied based on the Y axis value of the item. For example, you can highlight any data items that falls within a certain range with a certain color (low sales number with red, high sales number with blue).

• If neither is specified, the settings are applied in the order they are listed. This means the first Item

Appearance controls the appearance of the first data item in the series, the second one controls the second data item in the series, and so on. In this case, if the data series has more items to display than the number of Item Appearance, the remaining items are displayed with the settings specified by the

Series Appearance. Having said this, it is better to define more Item Appearance elements when you have a variable number of items to display in the chart.

Item Appearance contains the following:

Table 36. Item Appearance

Element

Item Value

Y Axis Value

Range

Description

Allows you to specify the settings in the Item Appearance element that are applied to the data items whose X axis value match with the specified value.

Allows you to apply the color is applied based on the Y axis value of the item, if you specify

Y Axis Value Range, www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 36. Item Appearance

Element

Color

Display Value

Tooltext

Alpha

Dashed

Anchor Sides

Description

Allows you to define the color of data series at the Series Appearance level for multi-series and combination charts. However, if you wish to highlight a particular data item, you can specify its color at Item Appearance level.

Allows you to display a custom string value if instead of the numerical value of this data.

Allows you to display more information for the data item as tool tip. By default, qChartView shows the series Name, Category Name and value as tool tip text for that data item.

Allows you to define the alpha of datasets at the Series Appearance level for multi-series and combination charts, However, if you wish to highlight a particular data item, you can specify its alpha at Item Appearance level using this attribute. The range is from 0 - 100.

Allows you to set whether the border of this data item should appear as dashed.

Lets you specify item specific sides of the anchor in a line/area chart. The range is from 3 -

20.

Anchor Radius Lets you specify item specific radius (in pixels) of the anchor in a line/area chart.

Anchor Border

Color

Lets you specify item specific border color of the anchor. Use hex code of colors. To use the color picker, click on the color swatch square

Lets you specify item specific border thickness in pixels) of the anchor in a line/area chart.

Anchor Border

Thickness

Anchor

Background

Color

Lets you specify item specific background color of the anchor in a line/area chart.

Anchor Alpha

Anchor

Background

Alpha

Lets you specify item specific alpha (transparency) of the anchor in a line/area chart. The range is from 0 - 100.

Lets you specify item specific alpha (transparency) of the anchor background in a line/area chart. The range is from 0 - 100.

Toolbar

The Toolbar Appearance Tab contains the following:

Table 37. Toolbar Appearance

Element

Toolbar Skin Name

Show Return to Master Chart

Button

Description

Allows you to enter the skin name for the toolbar.

If selected, displays the Return To Master Chart Button. This button will appear only if the Source parameter exists in the URL of the current page.

When the user clicks this button, the user is returned back to the URL specified in the Source HTTP parameter.

Layout

The Layout page allows you to set the overall layout of the web part. It contains the following:

Table 38. Layout

Element

Width

Height

Chrome State

Description

Allows you to set the web part to a fixed width

Allows you to set the web part to a fixed height

Allows you to select if the web part can be minimized or not when you open the web part.

If Minimized is selected, then only the Title Bar displays.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 38. Layout

Element

Chrome Type

Hidden

Direction

Description

Allows you to select the kind of border to display around the web part.

Select this check box if you want the web part hidden

Allows you to set how the text in the web part displays depending on the language, either from Left to Right or Right to Left

Other

The Other page allows you to set the appearance of other elements in the web part. It contains the following:

Table 39. Other

Element

Allow Minimize

Allow Close

Allow Hide

Allow Zone Change

Allow Connections

Description

Select this check box if you want the web part minimized

Select this check box if you want the web part removed from the page

Select this check box if you want the web part hidden

Select this check box if you want the web part moved to a different zone

Select this check box if you want the web part to participate in connections to other web parts

Allow Editing in Personal View Select this check box if you want the web part modified in a personal view

Export Mode Allows you to select the level of data that can be exported for this web part

Title URL

Description

Help URL

Help Mode

Allows you to add the title of a URL as extra information about the web part

Allows you to enter a description of the web part that is displayed as a Tooltip when you hover your mouse over the web part title or icon.

Allows you to enter the location of a file containing Help information about the web part.

Allows you to specify how a browser displays Help content for the web part, either in a separate window which you must close before returning to the

Web Page (Mode), in a separate window that you do not need to close before returning to the Web Page (Modeless), or in the current browser window

(Navigate)

Catalog Icon Image URL

Title Icon Image URL

Import Error Message

Allows you to specify the location of a file containing an image to be used as the web part icon in the Web Part List. The image size must be 16 by 16 pixels.

Allows you to specify the location of a file containing an image to be used in the web part title bar. The image size must be 16 by 16 pixels.

Allows you to specify a message that appears if there is a problem importing the web part

Advanced Page

The Advanced page allows you to set advanced features of the web part, such as the following:

• Security

• Resources

Security

The Security page allows you to set which users are allowed to view the web part. It contains the following: www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 40. Security

Element

Target

Audiences

Description

Allows you to have the Web Part to appear only to people who are members of a particular group or audience.

An audience can be identified by using a SharePoint group, a distribution list, a security group, or a global audience.

Resources

The Resources page allows you to enable Localization in the web part using resource lists.

Localization

Localization contains the following elements.

NOTE:

While this feature is available to use, we recommend using ezLocalizer. For more information, see ezLocalizer on page 341 .

Table 41. Localization

Element

Resource List

Title Resource ID

Description

• Resource ID — This field contains the identifier to refer to the string. You can have multiple strings with the same Resource ID as long as their Culture value is different.

• Culture — This field contains the culture for the string. For the default culture, leave the Culture field blank.

• Value — This field contains the value for the string.

The Lists element can contain only one List element. The following are the attributes for the List element:

• SiteUrl — The URL to the site that contains the resource list. The URL can be absolute (http://...) or relative to the current page URL. This attribute is mandatory.

• ListName — The name of the resource List. The list name is case sensitive.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 41. Localization

Element

Return to Master Chart

Button Text Resource ID

Filter Button Text

Resource ID

Description

By default, the text for the Return to Master Chart toolbar button is retrieved from the resource file that is included in the product. If the resource file in the culture that you want to use is not available, define the text for the Return to Master Chart toolbar button in the Resource List and specify its Resource ID. This Resource ID and the current cultural setting (identified with the Culture HTTP parameter) are used to retrieve the string in the Resource List. If the string with the given identifier and culture is not found, the default text from the invariant resource file is used.

qChartView Procedures

You can perform the following procedures using qChartView:

•

Configuring Basic Settings using the Configuration Wizard

•

Configuring qChartView

•

Formatting Links

•

Setting Number Formatting

•

Setting Number Scaling

Configuring Basic Settings using the Configuration

Wizard

To configure basic settings

1 Add qChartView to your page.

2 Select the ezWizard menu item from the qChartView Web Part Menu or Ribbon.

3 Select one or more lists, from the current site, whose data you want to aggregate, and click Next.

4 Define chart configurations, and click Next.

If you want to change your selections, select Previous.

5 Click Finish.

NOTE: Once a Web Part is configured, the ezWizard item will not appear on the Web Part Menu or the Web Part

Ribbon.

Configuring qChartView

To configure qChartView

1 Add qChartView to your page.

2 Open ezEdit.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

The Primary Content page opens by default.

3 Configure each element as needed and click OK.

4 If needed, configure the elements in the other tabs.

5 When done configuring each tab, click OK.

Formatting Links

You can perform the following procedures with links:

•

Defining Links for a Chart

•

Opening Links in a New Window

•

Linking to Frames

•

Setting Number Formatting

Defining Links for a Chart

To define a link for any data plot

1 From Chart Attributes, click Edit.

2 Click Functional.

3 In the Click URL field, define the link attribute as in the following example: link='ShowDetails.asp%3FMonth%3DJan'

With the above XML, the data plot (be it column, pie or line/area anchor), when clicked, will take to the page ShowDetails.asp?Month=Jan, which might contain another chart to show detailed results for the month of January.

The chart view expects all the links in URL Encoded format, if you have characters special characters

(such as ?,&) in your link. When the user clicks the link, the chart view decodes it and invokes

ShowDetails.asp?Month=Jan.

All the server-side scripting languages provide a generic function to URL Encode any string.

Opening Links in a New Window

You can open the link in a new window instead of the same window.

To open a link in a new window

1 From Chart Attributes, click Edit.

2 Click Functional.

3 In the Click URL field, add n- before any link, as in the following example:, link='n-

ShowDetails.asp%3FMonth%3DJan'

The above link, when clicked, opens in a new window.

Opening Links in Pop-up Windows

The chart view also allows you to open your links in pop-up windows.

To open a link in pop-up window

1 From Chart Attributes, click Edit.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

2 Click Functional.

3 In the Click URL field, define the link as in the following example: link="P-detailsWin,width=400,height=300,toolbar=no,scrollbars=no, resizable=no-

ShowDetails.asp%3FMonth%3DJan"

Where:

• P- denotes that the link is to be opened in a new pop-up window.

• detailsWin specifies a name for the new window. If you want all the links to open in the same pop-up, use the same window name across all links. However, if you want each link to open in a new pop-up, specify a different window name for each link.

• height specifies the height of the window in pixels.

• width specifies the width of the window in pixels.

• resizable when enabled, allows the user to manually resize the window by dragging its edges or corners.

NOTE: You can include other attributes, such as:

• menubar specifies whether or not to display a menu bar at the top of the window.

• toolbar specifies whether or not to display the main toolbar (with the back, forward, stop buttons).

• location specifies whether or not to display the location bar (the Address Bar in

Internet Explorer

) - where URLs are typed and displayed.

• directories specifies whether or not to display any additional toolbar (for example, the Links Bar in Internet Explorer).

• status specifies whether or not to display the status bar at the foot of the window.

• left specifies the distance in pixels of the new window from the left edge of the screen. (This applies to Internet Explorer. For Netscape Navigator

use screenX).

• top specifies the distance in pixels of the new window from the top edge of the screen. (This applies to Internet Explorer. For Netscape Navigator use screenY).

• fullscreen when enabled causes the window to open in full-screen mode (Internet

Explorer only.)

• scrollbars specify whether or not to display the horizontal and vertical scrollbars that normally appear when the page content is larger tan the screen.

• -ShowDetails.asp%3FMonth%3DJan denotes the actual link to be invoked

Linking to Frames

The chart view allows you to open links in specified frames too. To do so, you just specify the name of the frame in the link itself.

To open link in a specified frame

1 From Chart Attributes, click Edit.

2 Click Functional.

3 In the Click URL field, set the link as in the following example: link='F-FrameName-

ShowDetails.asp%3FMonth%3DJan'

Where:

• F denotes the link opens in a frame

• -FrameName denotes the name of the frame to be opened

• -ShowDetails.asp%3FMonth%3DJan denotes the actual link to be opened. The link needs to be URL

Encoded.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

In this example, the main frameset is contained in FrameExample.html, which has two vertical frame pane- one on top containing the chart (FramePages\FrameChart.html) and one on bottom to show the linked frame pages.

The bottom pane by default shows FramePages\LowerFrame.html which contains the message "Click on columns above to view details".

The setup looks like the following:

Figure 17. Linking to Frames

Setting Number Formatting

You can perform the following procedures:

•

Controlling Decimal Precision

•

Automatic Number Formatting

•

Setting Custom Thousand and Decimal Separator Character

•

Adding Number Prefix and Suffix

•

Formatting Y-axis Values Decimal in Manual Div-Lines Mode

Controlling Decimal Precision

All the charts types in qChartView support the attribute decimals. This single attribute lets you control the decimal precision of all the numbers on the chart. Using this attribute, you can globally set the number of decimal places of ALL numbers of the chart.

To globally set the number of decimal places

1 From Chart Attributes, click Edit.

2 Click Number Formatting.

3 Enter a value in the Decimal box.

4 Click Save.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

For example, if you have numbers on your chart as 12.432, 13.4 and 13 and you set Decimals='2' , the numbers would be converted to 12.43, 13.4 and 13 respectively.

Figure 18. Controlling decimal precision

Similarly, if you had data as 0.12342, 0.134 and 0.13, and you set Decimals as 3, qChartView would output

0.124, 0.134 and 0.13 respectively.

Even though the Decimals is set to 3, qChartView does not add the 0 padding to 0.13 to form 0.130. However, if you want your numbers on the chart to have trailing zeroes too, you can set Force Decimals=true and now the numbers would show as 0.124, 0.134 and 0.130 respectively, as shown in these examples:

Figure 19. Force decimals

Automatic Number Formatting qChartView automatically formats your numbers by adding K,M (Kilo, Million) and proper commas to the numbers, as shown in this example: www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Figure 20. Automatic Number Formatting

The data for chart is 12500, 13400 and 13300. qChartView automatically formats the number scaling to convert to K (Thousands) & M (Millions).

If you do not want to truncate numbers

1 From Chart Attributes, click Edit.

2 Click Number Formatting.

3 From Format Number Scale, select False.

4 Click Save.

When you now view the chart, you will see the following:

Figure 21. Not truncating numbers

In the example above, qChartView is showing full numbers on the chart. It has also added commas to the numbers at the required places.

If you do not want to set commas

1 From Chart Attributes, click Edit.

2 Click Number Formatting.

3 From Format Number, select False.

4 From Format Number Scale, select False.

5 Click Save.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Figure 22. Not setting commas

The commas have been removed from numbers.

Setting Custom Thousand and Decimal Separator Character

By default, qChartView uses . (dot) as decimal separator and , (comma) as thousand separator character.

However, you can customize this character depending on your requirements. For example, you can swap the separator characters.

To swap separator characters

1 From Chart Attributes, click Edit.

2 Click Number Formatting.

3 In the In Decimal Separator, enter ,.

4 In the In Thousand Separator, enter ..

5 Click Save.

Figure 23. Swap separator characters

Adding Number Prefix and Suffix qChartView allows you to add a prefix or suffix to all numbers on the chart.

To add a number prefix or suffix

1 From Chart Attributes, click Edit.

2 Click Number Formatting.

3 In the Number Prefix box, enter a character or value.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

For example, to represent dollar figures, enter $.

4 In the Number Suffix box, enter a character or value.

For example, to represent figures quantified per annum, enter p.a.

5 Click Save.

If you intend to use special characters for Number Prefix or Number Suffix, URL Encode them when using dataXML method. For example, if you wish to have numberSuffix as % (for example, 30%): numberSuffix='%25'

In dataURL method, you can directly specify the character.

Figure 24. Adding number prefixes and suffixes

Formatting Y-axis Values Decimal in Manual Div-Lines Mode

If you want to set the number of divisional lines on chart, you can control the decimals of y-axis values separately. For example, consider the following attributes and chart:

Y Axis Min Value='115' Y Axis Max Value='140' Zero Plane=false Number of Division Lines='3'>

In this chart, the chart lower limit, upper limit, and number of divisional lines have been manually set. qChartView will not automatically adjust divisional lines. In the chart, qChartView has truncated decimals from y-axis values, as it cannot find any other decimal values on the chart.

You can, however, show decimals on y-axis values in this case (when Zero Plane is false) using Y Axis Value

Decimals attribute, for example Y Axis Min Value='115' Y Axis Max Value='140' Zero Plane=false Number of

Division Lines='3' Y Axis Value Decimals='2' Decimals='0' >.

NOTE: Force Decimals does not work in this mode.

When you now see the chart, 2 decimal places on y-axis values appear. But, the other numbers on chart would still have 0 decimal places.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Figure 25. Formatting y-axis

Setting Number Scaling

Number scaling lets you define your own scales for numbers and then apply it to all numbers on the chart.

For example, if your numbers on the chart are greater than 1000, qChartView scales them to K (Thousands) or M

(Millions). For example, if you plot a chart with data as 12500, 13400 and 13300, you will see the following chart:

Figure 26. Setting number scaling qChartView has scaled the numbers down to K. By default, qChartView has the K,M (1000,1000) scaling defined for each chart. You can, however, customize it.

You can perform the following procedures:

•

Adding Billions to Default Scaling

•

Putting Time in Scale

Adding Billions to Default Scaling qChartView, by default, has 1000,1000 (K,M) scaling defined for all charts. It does not have the scaling for billions defined. You can modify the number scaling to add billion so that the final scale looks like

1000,1000,1000 (K,M,B).

This scale would look something like:

• 1000 = 1 K

• 1000 K = 1 M

• 1000 M = 1 B www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

To convert this scale into qChartView format

1 From Chart Attributes, click Edit.

2 Click Number Formatting.

3 In the Number Scale Value box, enter 1000,1000,1000.

4 In the Number Scale Unit box, enter K,M,B.

5 Click Save.

Whatever numeric figure was present on the left hand side of the table is put in Number Scale Value and whatever unit was present on the right side of the scale table has been put under Number Scale Unit - all separated by commas.

If you want to set the chart formatting flags

1 From Chart Attributes, click Edit.

2 Click Number Formatting.

3 From Format Number, select True.

4 From Format Number Scale, select True.

5 In the Number Prefix box, enter $.

6 Click Save.

When you now view a chart containing data in billions, you will see the following chart. Note that the chart now contains figure both in millions and billions.

Figure 27. Setting chart formatting

Putting Time in Scale

If you want to plot time-related figures on the chart, you can set the time in each process to range from a few seconds to few days. You can build a scale indicating time and then specify it to the chart:

• 60 seconds = 1 minute

• 60 minute = 1 hr

• 24 hrs = 1 day

• 7 days = 1 week

To convert this scale in qChartView

1 From Chart Attributes, click Edit.

2 Click Number Formatting.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

3 In the Default Number Scale box, enter s.

The default number scale is now represented in seconds.

4 In the Number Scale Value box, enter 60,60,24,7.

5 In the Number Scale Unit box, enter min,hr,day,wk.

6 Click Save.

If you want to set the chart formatting flags

1 From Chart Attributes, click Edit.

2 Click Number Formatting.

3 From Format Number, select True.

4 From Format Number Scale, select True.

5 Click Save.

When you now view the chart, you'll see that all the data has been automatically scaled to the best value:

• 38 is converted to 38s

• 150 is converted to 2.50min

• 11050 is converted to 3.07hr

• 334345 is converted to 3.87 day

• 1334345 is converted to 2.21wk

Figure 28. Time scaling www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

qDiscussionView

•

qDiscussionView Procedures

•

qDiscussionView Pages

•

Overview

qDiscussionView allows you to view multiple discussions lists at once. These discussion lists can reside in another site, another site collection, or another web application as long as they are in the same configuration database.

qDiscussionView Pages

You can configure this web part through its pages that are accessible through ezEdit. qDiscussionView contains the following pages:

•

•

•

•

Content Page

The Content page allows you to enter the content for your web part. It contains the following:

•

•

•

•

Primary Content

The Primary Content page is default category. You need to configure one or more elements in this page to get started using this web part.

Primary Content contains the following: www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 1. Primary Content

Element

Title

Viewed Lists

Display Fields

ID HTTP Parameter

Name

Description

Allows you to enter a title for the Web Part, or accept the default. This field is mandatory.

See

Viewed Lists on page 96 .

See

Display Fields on page 99

Allows the qDiscussionView and several other web parts to an HTTP Parameter called

ID to identify the item to be displayed or edited. This HTTP Parameter is usually generated automatically by the viewer web part, when you select an item to be displayed or edited.

NOTE: If qDiscussionView is placed on a web part page that is contained within a document library, the page will generate an error if the value of the ID HTTP

Parameter is bigger than the number of pages within the document library. To prevent this error from happening, rename the ID HTTP Parameter.

By default, the value of this property is "ID". You can change the value of this property to something else, such as LID. In that case, when you select "View Properties" or "Edit

Properties" in the context menu, the URL of the display or edit form becomes: http://mysite.com/EditFormURL.aspx?LID=xxx

NOTE: Set the same property in the qListForm to the same value.

Viewed Lists

The Viewed Lists section defines:

• the discussion lists whose data is viewed in qDiscussionView and how it is aggregated. You can define the lists to be aggregated one by one, in a Rolled-Up list, or from lists with a particular name from all the subsites (recursive rollup)

• the dependent lists for each list. If the Dependent Lists information is provided, qDiscussionView will check whether or not there are child records in the Dependent Lists when you delete items from the view. If there are any, qDiscussionView will not delete the selected items.

You will need the qListForm web part in order to establish a relationship between different lists.

The following are the elements for the Viewed List attribute: www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 2. Viewed Lists

Element

Advanced

Mode

Site URL

List Name

Description

Turn on if you want to edit Viewed Lists in XML format:

<Lists>

<List SiteUrl="siteUrl" ListName="listName" IncludeSubsites="true/false"

IncludeThisSite="true/false" IsRollupList="true/false" SiteUrlFieldName="fieldName"

RolledUpListName="listName" TargetUrl="targetUrl" SetSessionName="sessionName"

ResetSessionNames="name1, name2" NewFormUrl="URL" EditFormUrl="URL"

DisplayFormUrl="URL">

</DependentLists>

</List>

</Lists>

The URL to the site that contains the list to be searched. The URL can be absolute (http://...) or relative to the current page URL. This attribute is mandatory.

When using a relative URL, you can use a single dot (.) to denote the current path, a double dot (..) to denote the previous path, and a slash (/) to denote the root path.

The name of the SharePoint list that is edited or displayed by this Discussion View. The list name is case sensitive. If the list name contains spaces, include the spaces here as well.

To denote the current list, you can use a single dot (.) as the list name.

NOTE: This only works if the qDiscussionView is contained in the AllItems.aspx. For example, if you are replacing the Microsoft

Discussion View in the AllItems.aspx of the Tasks list and you use a single dot as the ListName attribute, the ListName attribute of the qDiscussionView is set to Tasks. If you want to save the list as a template and then add it somewhere else, the name of the new list might not be Tasks and using this relative list name will automatically pick up the new list name for the view.

Include

Subsites

If set to true, the Discussion View will search all the subsites for a list whose name specified in the ListName and aggregate the information from those list.

NOTE: If you have many subsites, the information may take a long time to aggregate. Use this attribute if you have only a small amount of subsites. You must test this feature in your environment to see whether or not the response comes back in a reasonable amount of time and the request does not time out.

Include This

Site

Used in conjunction of the IncludeSubsites attribute. If you set this property to true, the list in the current site will be aggregated by the Discussion View. The current site is the site whose

URL is specified in the SiteUrl attribute.

Is Rollup List Indicates whether or not the list specified by the SiteUrl and ListName attributes contains the

Site URLs of the lists to be aggregated instead of the data to be aggregated. If you set this to true, the list specified by the SiteUrl and ListName must have a field that contains the URL information. By default, the name of that field is Site URL. If you use different field name, specify the name using the SiteUrlFieldName attribute.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 2. Viewed Lists

Element

Rolled Up List

Name

Site URL Field

Name

Description

Used in conjunction with the IsRollupList property, indicates the name of the lists to be rolled up if you set the IsRollupList to true.

If you want to aggregate more than one list from each site specified in the rollup list, you can define more than one List elements with the same rollup list, but different RolledUpListName.

For example, if you want to aggregate Public Library and Private Library document libraries from each site, you can specify the following:

<Lists>

<List SiteUrl="." ListName="Project Sites" IsRollupList="true" SiteUrlFieldName="Project Site

URL" RolledUpListName="Public Library" />

<List SiteUrl="." ListName="Project Sites" IsRollupList="true" SiteUrlFieldName="Project Site

URL" RolledUpListName="Private Library" />

</Lists>

Used in conjunction with the IsRollupList property, indicates the field that contains the Site

URLs of the lists to be aggregated. This attribute is optional if the field name is Site URL.

NOTE: The Site URL field must be a single line of text field.

Active Field

Name

Reset Session

Names

Set Session

Name

Used in conjunction with the IsRollupList property. The rollup list may contain a Yes/No field to indicate whether or not a particular site should be included in the rollup. This property is optional if the name of this field is Active.

NOTE: The Active field must be a Yes/No field.

Resets (sets to NULL) the value of the session variables whose name is specified in this attribute. You can specify multiple names by separating them with commas; for example

TaskSession, IssueSession.

You can reset the session name if a discussion may have one or more tasks associated with it.

In addition to storing the selected discussion in the session, you may store the dependent task information in the session as well. This means that every time you store a new discussion into a session, you need to reset the dependent task information from the session as well.

Defines the name of the session variable where the Discussion View will store the item whose column is being clicked by the user. The user can click the item if one of the LinkTo,

LinkToTarget or the LinkToSource attributes in the Display Fields property is defined.

This attribute is usually used if you have another web part (such as the qListForm) that can consume the stored values from the session.

You can set the session name when you want to consume the item from a session variable in a qListForm later.

Target URL When the LinkToTarget attribute of a specific column is set to true (in the Display Fields property), the data in that column becomes a hyperlink to the URL specified in this attribute.

NOTE: The TargetUrl can use the <%field name%> field replacement expression. If you are using Advanced Mode, you must use the encoded form of the < and > characters, which are

< and > respectively.

Use the LinkToTargetUrl attribute if you want each list to have a different URL; for example, when you want to aggregate multiple lists from the same workspace and connect a certain column to the display form of the list. In that case, the URL to the display form of each list is different.

New Form URL Indicates the URL where the form to create a new item resides. The URL is relative to the Site

URL of the list. The user is redirected to the specified URL when one of the New buttons in the toolbar is clicked. If not defined, the user is redirected to the NewForm.aspx of the list (or

Upload.aspx for the document library).

Redefining the New Form URL is useful if you have different way of creating an item depending on the current view. For example, in the view for external vendor, you may want to give them a new form that does not contain all the fields in the list.

NOTE: The Source HTTP parameter is automatically appended to the New Form URL during redirection.

This attribute is usually used in conjunction with qListForm.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 2. Viewed Lists

Element Description

Reply Form

URL

Indicates the URL where the form to create a new response resides. The URL is relative to the

Site URL of the list. The user is redirected to the specified URL when the Reply button in the toolbar or in the preview panel or the Reply context menu item is clicked. If not defined, the user is redirected to the URL specified in the NewFormUrl, if one is defined. Otherwise, the user is redirected to the NewForm.aspx of the list.

Redefining the Reply Form URL is useful if you want to have a different form to create a reply than the one that is used to create a new discussion. For example, in the form to create a reply, you may want to use 2 qListForms. The first qListForm is used to display the detail of the parent discussion and the second qListForm is used to create the response itself.

NOTE: The Source HTTP parameter is automatically appended to the Reply Form URL during redirection.

This attribute is usually used in conjunction with qListForm.

Edit Form URL Indicates the URL where the form to edit an item in the list resides. The URL is relative to the

Site URL of the list. The user is redirected to the specified URL when the user clicks Edit

Properties in the Context Menu. If not defined, the user is redirected to the EditForm.aspx of the list.

NOTE: The ID and Source HTTP parameters are automatically appended to the Edit Form URL during redirection.

This attribute is usually used in conjunction with qListForm.

Display Form

URL

The URL where the form to display an item in the list resides. The URL is relative to the Site

URL of the list. The user is redirected to the specified URL when the user clicks View

Properties in the Context Menu. If not defined, the user is redirected to the DisplayForm.aspx of the list.

NOTE: The ID and Source HTTP parameters are automatically appended to the Display Form

URL during redirection.

This attribute is usually used in conjunction with qListForm.

The URL to the site that contains the dependent list.

Site URL

List Name

Key Field

Name

The name of the dependent list. The list name is case sensitive.

The name of the field in the dependent list that contains the ID of the parent item. It is the foreign key in the dependent list. The key field is usually a single line of text that contains the parent item ID or a cross-site lookup field to the parent list. The name is case sensitive.

Display Fields

This property defines the fields that should be displayed in the tree list panel of qDiscussionView.

The Display Field contains the following elements: www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

Table 3. Display Fields

Element Description

Advanced Mode Turn on if you want to edit Display Fields in XML format:

<Field Name="fieldName" Grouped="true" SortDirection="asc|desc"

GroupExpanded="true|false" />

</Fields>

Query All Fields Controls how Web Parts behave in relation to the Discussion View Lookup Threshold in

SharePoint Resource Throttling. The options are:

• Default — uses the level set in the Configuration Editor. If you have selected Query

All Fields check box in the Configuration Editor, the Web Part will query only those fields that are not included in the Discussion View Lookup Threshold. If the Query

All Fields check box is cleared, the Web Part will query all fields.

• On — If the Web Part level is On, the Web Part queries all fields in lists, except

Lookup fields.

• Off — If the Web Part level is Off, the Web Part queries all fields in lists, including

Lookup fields.

• Explicit — If the Web Part level is Explicit, the Web Part queries only those fields selected in the Display Fields. This option renders the best performance for your

Web Part.

Title Indicates the title of the field. This is useful if the real field name is too long and you want to abbreviate the title in the field header, or if you simply want to display a different title in the field header. If this attribute is not specified, the value specified in the Name attribute is used in the field header. For example:

Title Resource ID Indicates the identifier in the Resource List that is used as the title of the field. The

TitleResourceID and the current cultural setting (identified with the Culture HTTP parameter) are used to retrieve the string in the Resource List. If the string with the given identifier is not found, the default Title is used.

Width Indicates the width of the field. You can specify the value in pixels (Width="20px") or percentage (Width="20%").

We recommend leaving at least one field where you do not specify this property. That field will take up the remaining width of the page. For example:

Align Indicates the horizontal alignment for the field. The values is one of the following: left, right, or center. For example:

Item Style

Item CSS Class

Display Field

Name

Indicates the style for the item. You can define the style as you would in a CSS class; for example, color: red; font-weight: bold

Indicates the distinct style for the column and you already have defined the style in an external CSS file.

If specified, indicates a cross-site lookup field. It contains the name of the field in the cross-site list that contains the value to be displayed. The field name is case sensitive.

A cross-site lookup field enables you to lookup a list that resides in another site, another site collection, or another web application as long as it is in the same configuration database. You need the qListForm web part to create a cross-site lookup field.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

100

Table 3. Display Fields

Element

Display Format

Description

If specified, indicates a cross-site lookup field. It contains the format of the value that is displayed. Define this attribute if you want to display values from multiple fields. You can use the field replacement expression <%Field%> to refer to a field.

NOTE: If you are using Advanced Mode, you must use the encoded form of the < and > characters, which are < and >, respectively unless you type in the value in the

Display Fields editor in the Discussion View Editor, where the Editor will encode the characters automatically for you.

NOTE: For more information, see Display Format on page 11 .

Show User Groups Allows you to show groups where the user is a member of one of the SharePoint groups listed. Separate site group names with commas.

Hide User Groups Allows you to hide groups where the user is a member of one of the SharePoint groups listed. Separate site group names with commas.

Hyperlink Field

Target

Link To

If this field is a SharePoint Hyperlink or Picture field, indicates the target window for the hyperlink. For example, use "_blank" if you want to open the target URL in a new window.

If this attribute is left blank, the target URL will open in the current window.

This attribute will not affect the hyperlink column created with the LinkTo, LinkToSource or LinkToTargetURL attributes.

Indicates that the Discussion View will turn the field into a hyperlinked column to the specified URL. The URL can be an absolute or relative URL. The LinkTo can use the <%field name%> field replacement expression.

NOTE: If you are using Advanced Mode, you must use the encoded form of the < and > characters, which are < and >, respectively unless you type in the value in the

Display Fields editor in the Discussion View Editor, where the Editor will encode the characters automatically for you.

If you use a relative URL, the URL is appended to the site URL of the target site. For example, specify "Lists/TeamDiscussion/EditForm.aspx?ID=<%ID%>" as the value of this property. If you click a customer record that comes from the Customers list in

Workspace A, whose site URL is "http://mydomain/sites/mysite", you are directed to http://mydomain/sites/mysite/Lists/TeamDiscussion/EditForm.aspx?ID=23 (assuming you click the discussion with ID=23).

Here is an example on how to make the Subject field a hyperlink column to the edit form of the Discussion list:

Link To Target

Link To Source

<Field Name="Subject"

LinkTo="Lists/TeamDiscussion/EditForm.aspx?ID=<%ID%>&Source=..

/../default.aspx" />

If set to true, indicates the Discussion View will make the field value a hyperlink to the URL specified in the TargetUrl attribute in the Viewed Lists property.

Use this element when you aggregate lists with different name. In that case, you specify a different TargetUrl for each list in the Viewed Lists property and the Discussion View will redirect the user to the correct URL depending on the list where the clicked item comes from.

The Discussion View will make the field value a hyperlink to the URL specified in the

Source HTTP parameter of the current request. For this option to work, the current page

URL must look like: http://.....?Source=....

Use this element when the URL for the hyperlink is dynamic. This could be because it contains dynamic parameters or the URL is different depending on the referral page.

Also, when you want to make the URL in the link dynamic. In that case, you can pass in the

URL for the link into the HTTP parameter of your page. www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

101

Table 3. Display Fields

Element

Is Complex

qDiscussionView Procedures

You can perform the following procedures using qDiscussionView:

•

Configuring qDiscussionView

•

Sorting the qDiscussionView

•

Configuring qDiscussionView with the Complex Category Index List

Configuring qDiscussionView

To configure qDiscussionView

1 Add qDiscussionView to your page.

2 Open ezEdit.

The Primary Content page opens by default.

3 Configure each element as needed and click OK.

4 If needed, configure the elements in the other tabs.

5 When done configuring each tab, click OK.

Sorting the qDiscussionView

You can sort the entries in the qDiscussionView by clicking the column header. Clicking the column header again will alternate between ascending and descending order.

Due to the hierarchical nature of the discussions and their responses, the sorting will sort the node against another nodes in the same level. For example, if the following discussion structure exists:

* Discussion 1

- Response 1.1

- Response 1.1.1

- Response 1.1.2

- Response 1.2

- Response 1.2.1

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

110

- Response 1.2.2

* Discussion 2

- Response 2.1

- Response 2.1.1

- Response 2.1.2

- Response 2.2

- Response 2.2.1

- Response 2.2.2

When you click the Subject column header:

• Discussion 1 is sorted against Discussion 2

• Response 1.1 is sorted against Response 1.2.

• Response 2.1 is sorted against Response 2.2.

• Response 1.1.1 is sorted against Response 1.1.2.

• Response 1.2.1 is sorted against Response 1.2.2.

• Response 2.1.1 is sorted against Response 2.1.2.

• Response 2.2.1 is sorted against Response 2.2.2.

To clear the sorting for a certain column

• Press Ctrl and click the column header.

To sort multiple columns

• Press Shift and click other column headers.

The sort index depends on which column you click first. For example, if you click Created field and then click Shift + Subject field, the entries are sorted based on the Created field first and then Subject field, regardless the Subject field appeared first.

Understanding the Complex Category Index List

The Complex Category Index List allows qDiscussionView to function like the Lotus Notes response document which contains a category attribute. qDiscussionView maintains the index list when one or more discussions are deleted. You must mark the complex category field in your discussion list, so qDiscussionView will know that the complex category field exists and the index list is updated.

To mark the complex category field in your discussion list

1 From the menu, select ezEdit.

2 From the Display Fields section, select Edit.

3 Select Edit for each field name you want displayed.

4 Select the Is Complex Category check box, and click OK.

The Complex Category Index List can contain multiple categories such as: Category1, Category2, Category3. In this case, the discussion is displayed in each of the multiple categories in the treeview. For example, if

Discussion A contained ‘Category1, Category2, Category3’ in the Complex Category Index List, it would be displayed in the treeview view as follows:

- Category1

- Discussion A

- Category2 www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

111

- Discussion A

- Category3

- Discussion A

The sorting is disabled when you use grouped complex category field.

The category field can contain nested categories, such as: Category1\Category2\Category3. In this case, the discussion is displayed in the nested categories in the treeview. For example, if Discussion A contained

‘Category1\Category2\Category3’ in the complex category field, it would be displayed in the treeview as follows:

- Category1

- Category2

- Category3

Discussion A

The category field can contain a mix of multiple and nested categories. For example, if Discussion A contained

‘Category1, Category2, Category3, Level1\Level2\Level3’ in the complex category field, it would be displayed in the listview as follows:

-- Category1

- Discussion A

- Category2

- Discussion A

- Category3

- Discussion A

- Level1

- Level2

- Level3

Discussion A

In order to support complex categories while maintaining good performance, the Complex Category must be indexed. Another SharePoint list is used to store the index. There are two ways to create the Complex Category

Index list.

To create the Complex Category Index List

1 From qDiscussionView, select Create Complex Category Index List.

2 Accept the default site URL or enter another site URL.

3 Enter the list name.

Once created, the index appears when you get lists from the Viewed List section of the web part.

For mass creation of the Complex Category Index list after discussion lists are migrated from Lotus Notes, use the Complex Category Indexer tool. After the migration job, there are many unindexed discussion lists. This tool creates the Complex Category Index list and populate it at the same time.

Configuring qDiscussionView with the Complex

Category Index List

If you have a Discussion list that you want to appear in different categories, you would configure the Complex

Category Index List. The Complex Category Index List allows qDiscussionView to function like the Lotus Notes response document which contains a category attribute.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

112

qDiscussionView maintains the index list when one or more discussions are deleted. You must mark the complex category field in your discussion list, so qDiscussionView will know that the complex category field exists and the index list is updated.

To configure qDiscussionView with Complex Category Index List

1 Create a discussion board list in SharePoint. For example, create a discussion board list called

"Discussion".

2 Create a column for Discussion. Enter the name "Category" and select Single Line of Text or Multiple

Lines of Text as the Type.

NOTE: Refer to the SharePoint documentation on how to create a column and discussion board list.

3 Create a SharePoint page, add a qDiscussionView web part, and open ezEdit. In Viewed Lists, select

Discussion.

4 From the qDiscussionView drop-down menu, select Create Complex Category Index List.

The New Category dialog box opens.

5 Enter a Complex Category Index Site URL and List Name.

The List Name defaults to discussion board list name plus Categories. For example, the default list name is Discussion Categories.

6 Open ezEdit of the qDiscussionView web part. a From Display Fields, select Edit next to "Category" created in step 2. b Select Is Complex Category check box.

c Enter a Complex Category Index Site URL and Complex Category Index List Name. This name must the same as the list name entered in Step 5 (in our example, Discussion Categories).

7 Replace SharePoint's out-of-the-box web parts on the NewItem, EditItem, and ViewItem pages with qListForm web parts.

You must replace the out-of-the-box web part with the qListForm to use the Complex Category

Discussion feature in qListForm.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

113

a Hide out-of-the box web parts. From the web part drop-down, select Edit Web Part. From the

Layout section, select the Hidden check box.

b Add a qListForm web part. Open ezEdit.

c For Form Type, select NewListItem to replace Default New Form from the out-of-the-box web part.

d Create two more qListForm web parts. Open ezEdit. For Form Type, select:

• DisplayListItem to replace Default Display Form from the out-of-the-box web part

• EditListItem to replace Default Edit Form from the out-of-the-box web part

8 In each qListForm web part: a Select Edit from Display Fields and select Edit next to Category (created in step 2).

b Select Complex Category as the Field Type. Enter a Complex Category Index Site URL and List

Name. This name must the same as the list name entered in Step 5 (in our example, Discussion

Categories).

You can now use qListForm to view, edit, and update complex categories and view discussion threads grouped by complex categories.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

114

qDynamicLayout

•

• qDynamicLayout Procedures

• qDynamicLayout Pages

Overview

The qDynamicLayout Web Part allows you to create a customized layout by placing multiple Web Parts and HTML elements on one page. This helps you manage page space more effectively.

qDynamicLayout Pages

You can configure this Web Part through its tabs that are accessible through ezEdit. qDynamicLayout contains the following pages:

•

•

•

Content Page

When you open ezEdit in qDynamicLayout, the Primary Content page opens by default, and contains the following editable sections:

•

View Setting on page 116 .

Primary Content

The Primary Content page is default category. You need to configure one or more elements in this page to get started using this web part.

Primary Content contains the following:

Table 1. Primary Content

Element

Title

Layout

View Settings

Description

Allows you to enter a title for the Web Part, or accept the default. This field is mandatory.

See

Layout on page 116 .

See

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

115

Layout

The Tab Layout allows you to pick where to add the tabs and what the tabs should be named.

The following are elements found in the Layout section.

Table 2. Layout

Element

Advanced Mode

Label

Description

Show User Groups

Hide User Groups

Default

Description

Allows you to edit Layout in XML format:

</FormLayout>

Allows you to give an ID to each tab

The IDs can contain letters ([A-Z, a-z]), digits ([0-9]), hyphens ("-"), and underscores

("_") only.

Allows you to name each tab

Allows you to add a description to each tab, if necessary

Allows you to list SharePoint groups whose members can view the web part. Separate groups with commas (for example, Administrators, Readers).

Allows you to list SharePoint groups whose members cannot view the web part.

Separate site group names with commas (for example, Administrators, Readers).

If users are defined in Show User Groups and Hide User Groups, Hide Groups takes precedence.

Allows you to define the default tab for qDynamicLayout. If this element is not specified, the first tab listed in the Layout becomes the default tab. If the tab for the specified element is hidden, then the first non-hidden tab becomes the default tab.

View Setting

The View Setting section allows you to select in what tabs the Web Parts should appear and in which order.

The following are elements found in the View Settings section.

Table 3. View Setting

Element

Advanced Mode

Web Part Title

Web Part Type

Container

Tab ID

Description

Turn on if you want to edit View Settings in XML format:

<WebPart ID="g_59f7fda1_4405_45c8_bba0_f354db68bab8" Type="DiscussionView"

ClientId="MSOZoneCell_WebPartWPQ18" />

</Content>

</ViewSetting>

Indicates the name the Web Part to be added

Indicates the type of Web Part to be added

If you have more than one qDynamicLayout Web Part, the Container indicates if a Web

Part is already part of another qDynamicLayout Web Part and the name of that qDynamicLayout Web Part. You cannot configure these Web Parts from another qDynamicLayout Web Part. You can configure only those Web Parts that are contained in the qDynamicLayout you are editing.

Allows you to select the tab where to add the Web Part. The Tab ID appears when you configure the IDs in the Layout section www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

116

Appearance Page

The Appearance page allows you to set the overall look and feel of the web part. This page contains the following:

•

•

•

•

Ribbon

The Ribbon page allows you to set the display name of the Ribbon.

Table 4. Ribbon

Element

SharePoint Ribbon Tab

Name

Description

Allows you to edit the display name of the Ribbon tab.

Skin

The Skin page allows you to configure the appearance of the web part.

Table 5. Skin

Element

Skin Name

Description

Allows you to select the skin name for the Web Part. If you have a custom skin, you can add it to the following folder:

• for SharePoint 2010: C:\Program Files\Common Files\Microsoft Shared\Web Server

Extensions\14\TEMPLATE\LAYOUTS\QuestSoftware\Telerik\Q32013SP1\Skins

• for SharePoint 2013: C:\Program Files\Common Files\Microsoft Shared\Web Server

Extensions\15\TEMPLATE\LAYOUTS\QuestSoftware\Telerik\Q32013SP1\Skins

• for SharePoint 2016: C:\Program Files\Common Files\Microsoft Shared\Web Server

Extensions\16\TEMPLATE\LAYOUTS\QuestSoftware\Telerik\Q32013SP1\Skins

When creating a custom skin, you can refer to the Sample Skin folder in the install directory.

Layout

The Layout page allows you to set the overall layout of the web part. It contains the following:

Table 6. Layout

Element

Width

Height

Chrome State

Chrome Type

Hidden

Direction

Description

Allows you to set the web part to a fixed width

Allows you to set the web part to a fixed height

Allows you to select if the web part can be minimized or not when you open the web part.

If Minimized is selected, then only the Title Bar displays.

Allows you to select the kind of border to display around the web part.

Select this check box if you want the web part hidden

Allows you to set how the text in the web part displays depending on the language, either from Left to Right or Right to Left www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

117

Other

The Other page allows you to set the appearance of other elements in the web part. It contains the following:

Table 7. Other

Element

Allow Minimize

Allow Close

Allow Hide

Allow Zone Change

Allow Connections

Select this check box if you want the web part moved to a different zone

Select this check box if you want the web part to participate in connections to other web parts

Allow Editing in Personal View Select this check box if you want the web part modified in a personal view

Export Mode

Title URL

Description

Allows you to select the level of data that can be exported for this web part

Allows you to add the title of a URL as extra information about the web part

Help URL

Allows you to enter a description of the web part that is displayed as a Tooltip when you hover your mouse over the web part title or icon.

Allows you to enter the location of a file containing Help information about the web part.

Help Mode

Description

Select this check box if you want the web part minimized

Select this check box if you want the web part removed from the page

Select this check box if you want the web part hidden

Catalog Icon Image URL

Title Icon Image URL

Import Error Message

Allows you to specify how a browser displays Help content for the web part, either in a separate window which you must close before returning to the

Web Page (Mode), in a separate window that you do not need to close before returning to the Web Page (Modeless), or in the current browser window

(Navigate)

Allows you to specify the location of a file containing an image to be used as the web part icon in the Web Part List. The image size must be 16 by 16 pixels.

Allows you to specify the location of a file containing an image to be used in the web part title bar. The image size must be 16 by 16 pixels.

Allows you to specify a message that appears if there is a problem importing the web part

Advanced Page

The Advanced page allows you to set advanced features of the web part, such as the following:

•

Configuring qDynamicLayout

Security

The Security page allows you to set which users are allowed to view the web part. It contains the following:

Table 8. Security

Element

Target

Audiences

Description

Allows you to have the Web Part to appear only to people who are members of a particular group or audience.

An audience can be identified by using a SharePoint group, a distribution list, a security group, or a global audience.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

118

qDynamicLayout Procedures

You can perform the following procedures using qDynamicLayout:

•

Configuring qDynamicLayout

If a Web Part is hidden or closed, you cannot add it to qDynamicLayout.

If you delete qDynamicLayout, only the qDynamicLayout container is deleted, the Web Parts contained within it are not.

You cannot configure the View Settings section until you have added a Web Part to a tab in qDynamicLayout.

To configure qDynamicLayout

1 Add the qDynamicLayout Web Part to your page.

2 Open ezEdit.

The Primary Content page opens by default.

3 Configure each element as needed and click OK.

4 If needed, configure the elements in the other tabs.

5 When done configuring each tab, click OK.

You do not have to add a Web Part to a tab right away. You can add one later or add more Web Parts to the same tab.

To add a Web Part later or add more Web Parts to the same tab

1 From Site Actions, select Edit Page.

2 Select Add a Web Part.

3 Select a Web Part and click Add.

4 From qDynamicLayout Web Part, select ezEdit.

5 From View Settings section, select Edit.

6 Select the Web Part you just added.

7 Select the Tab ID for the Web Part.

8 Click OK.

To configure a Web Part within a qDynamicLayout Web Part

1 From Site Actions, select Edit Page.

2 From qDynamicLayout Web Part, select a tab.

3 From the tab, select ezEdit.

4 Configure and save the Web Part.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

119

qExcelViewer

•

•

qExcelViewer Pages

•

qExcelViewer Procedures

Overview

qExcelViewer lets you view data in Microsoft Excel. The Excel viewer works in conjunction with the qListView.

qExcelViewer Pages

You can configure this web part through its tabs that are accessible through ezEdit. qExcelViewer contains the following tabs:

•

•

•

Content Page

The Content page allows you to enter the content for your web part. It contains the following:

•

Display Fields on page 121

Primary Content

The Primary Content page is default category. You need to configure one or more elements in this page to get started using this web part.

Primary Content contains the following:

Table 1. Primary Content

Element

Title

Session Name

Show Header

Description

Allows you to enter a title for the Web Part, or accept the default. This field is mandatory.

Allows you to enter the name of the Session variable where the Excel Viewer expects to find all the information that has been set by a qListView. This name must match the

Search Session Name in qListView.

Allows you to show the column name in the first row.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

120

Table 1. Primary Content

Element

Display Fields

Child View Display

Fields

Description

See

Defines the fields that should be displayed in the view for the child record. For more information, see Child View Display Fields on page 125 .

Display Fields

This property defines the fields that should be displayed in the Excel spreadsheet.

This property is optional if the properties in the Custom Display section are specified. In that case, the default display for the search results is turned off and the custom display is used. You can also combine a custom display with the Display Fields; for example, if you want to display the data in the grid and to provide the summary of the data or disclaimer using the custom display.

The Display Fields section contains the following:

Table 2. Display Fields

Element

Advanced Mode

Query All Fields

Title

Align

Display Field

Name

Display Format

Description

Turn on if you want to edit Display Fields in XML format:

</Fields>

Controls how Web Parts behave in relation to the Excel View Lookup Threshold in

SharePoint Resource Throttling. The options are:

• Default — uses the level set in the Configuration Editor. If you have selected

Query All Fields check box in the Configuration Editor, the Web Part will query only those fields that are not included in the Excel View Lookup Threshold. If the Query All Fields check box is cleared, the Web Part will query all fields.

• On — If the Web Part level is On, the Web Part queries all fields in lists, except

Lookup fields.

• Off — If the Web Part level is Off, the Web Part queries all fields in lists, including Lookup fields.

• Explicit — If the Web Part level is Explicit, the Web Part queries only those fields selected in the Display Fields. This option renders the best performance for your Web Part.

Allows you to set the title for the field header. This is useful if the real field name is too long and you want to abbreviate the title in the field header, or if you simply want to display a different title in the field header. If this attribute is not specified, the value specified in the Name attribute is used in the field header.

Allows you to set the alignment for the field.

Allows you to specify the name of a field in the cross-site list. You only specify this if the field that you are trying to display is a cross-site lookup field.

If you want to display multiple fields from the cross-site lookup field, use the Display

Format.

Allows you to set the format of the value that is displayed in a cross-site lookup field.

You use this attribute if you want to display values from multiple fields.

NOTE: You can use the field replacement expression <%Field%> to refer to a field. If you are using Advanced Mode, you must use the encoded form of the < and > characters, which are < and >, respectively, unless you use the Excel Viewer

Editor which will encode it automatically for you.

For more information, see Display Format on page 11 .

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

121

Appearance Page

The Appearance page allows you to set the overall look and feel of the web part. This page contains the following:

•

•

•

Ribbon

The Ribbon page allows you to set the display name of the Ribbon.

Table 3. Ribbon

Element

SharePoint Ribbon Tab

Name

Description

Allows you to edit the display name of the Ribbon tab.

Layout

The Layout page allows you to set the overall layout of the web part. It contains the following:

Table 4. Layout

Element

Width

Height

Chrome State

Chrome Type

Hidden

Direction

Description

Allows you to set the web part to a fixed width

Allows you to set the web part to a fixed height

Allows you to select if the web part can be minimized or not when you open the web part.

If Minimized is selected, then only the Title Bar displays.

Allows you to select the kind of border to display around the web part.

Select this check box if you want the web part hidden

Allows you to set how the text in the web part displays depending on the language, either from Left to Right or Right to Left

Other

The Other page allows you to set the appearance of other elements in the web part. It contains the following:

Table 5. Other

Element

Allow Minimize

Allow Close

Allow Hide

Description

Select this check box if you want the web part minimized

Select this check box if you want the web part removed from the page

Select this check box if you want the web part hidden

Allow Zone Change

Allow Connections

Select this check box if you want the web part moved to a different zone

Select this check box if you want the web part to participate in connections to other web parts

Allow Editing in Personal View Select this check box if you want the web part modified in a personal view

Export Mode

Title URL

Allows you to select the level of data that can be exported for this web part

Allows you to add the title of a URL as extra information about the web part www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

122

Table 5. Other

Element

Description

Help URL

Help Mode

Catalog Icon Image URL

Title Icon Image URL

Import Error Message

Description

Allows you to enter a description of the web part that is displayed as a Tooltip when you hover your mouse over the web part title or icon.

Allows you to enter the location of a file containing Help information about the web part.

Allows you to specify how a browser displays Help content for the web part, either in a separate window which you must close before returning to the Web

Page (Mode), in a separate window that you do not need to close before returning to the Web Page (Modeless), or in the current browser window

(Navigate)

Allows you to specify the location of a file containing an image to be used as the web part icon in the Web Part List. The image size must be 16 by 16 pixels.

Allows you to specify the location of a file containing an image to be used in the web part title bar. The image size must be 16 by 16 pixels.

Allows you to specify a message that appears if there is a problem importing the web part

Advanced Page

The Advanced page allows you to set advanced features of the web part, such as the following:

•

•

The Resources page allows you to enable Localization

Security

The Security page allows you to set which users are allowed to view the web part. It contains the following:

Table 6. Security

Element

Target

Audiences

Description

Allows you to have the Web Part to appear only to people who are members of a particular group or audience.

An audience can be identified by using a SharePoint group, a distribution list, a security group, or a global audience.

Resources

in the web part using resource lists.

Localization

Localization contains the following elements.

NOTE:

While this feature is still available to use, we recommend using ezLocalizer. For more information, see ezLocalizer on page 341 .

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

123

Table 7. Localization

Element

Resource List

Title Resource ID

Description

• Resource ID — This field contains the identifier to refer to the string. You can have multiple strings with the same Resource ID as long as their Culture value is different.

• Culture — This field contains the culture for the string. For the default culture, leave the Culture field blank.

• Value — This field contains the value for the string.

The Lists element can contain only one List element. The following are the attributes for the List element:

• SiteUrl — The URL to the site that contains the resource list. The URL can be absolute (http://...) or relative to the current page URL. This attribute is mandatory.

• ListName — The name of the resource List. The list name is case sensitive.

qExcelViewer Procedures

You can perform the following procedures using qExcelViewer:

•

Configuring qExcelViewer

Configuring qExcelViewer

To configure qExcelViewer

1 Create a new blank page and give it an .aspx extension. This name must appear in the Excel Viewer URL property of qListView.

2 Add qExcelViewer to your page.

3 Open ezEdit.

The Primary Content page opens by default.

4 Enter a session name. This session must be the same as the Search Session Name created in qListView.

5 Select some display fields.

6 When done configuring each tab, click OK.

NOTE: If you are using Excel 2010, if you have more than 8 outline levels, some rows will be hidden. To show all data, select all rows and right-click the rows. Select Unhide.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

124

Child View Display Fields

This property defines the fields that should be displayed in the Excel spreadsheet. When you select the Edit button, a dialog box opens with a list of field names based on the session name which you have saved in qListView.

The Child View Display Fields section contains the following:

Table 8. Child View Display Fields

Element

Advanced Mode

Query All Fields

Title

Align

Display Field

Name

Display Format

Description

Turn on if you want to edit Display Fields in XML format:

</Fields>

Controls how Web Parts behave in relation to the Excel View Lookup Threshold in

SharePoint Resource Throttling. The options are:

• Default — uses the level set in the Configuration Editor. If you have selected

• On — If the Web Part level is On, the Web Part queries all fields in lists, except

Lookup fields.

• Off — If the Web Part level is Off, the Web Part queries all fields in lists, including Lookup fields.

• Explicit — If the Web Part level is Explicit, the Web Part queries only those fields selected in the Display Fields. This option renders the best performance for your Web Part.

Indicates the horizontal alignment for the field. The values is one of the following: left, right, or center. For example:

Allows you to specify the name of a field in the cross-site list. You only specify this if the field that you are trying to display is a cross-site lookup field.

If you want to display multiple fields from the cross-site lookup field, use the Display

Format.

Allows you to set the format of the value that is displayed in a cross-site lookup field.

You use this attribute if you want to display values from multiple fields.

Editor which will encode it automatically for you.

For more information, see Display Format on page 11 .

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

125

qHelpLink

•

•

qHelpLink Pages

Overview

qHelpLink provides a context-sensitive help functionality. The help link enables each page to be connected to a different help file or to no help file (in which case the help link will not be visible). This capability lets the site administrator or author issue the help files in stages.

The help link information is stored in a SharePoint list. The SharePoint list for the help link should contain:

• Context ID

—

This field is mandatory. This is a single line of text that contains the identifier for the help

URL.

• Help Url

—

This field is mandatory. This is a single line of text that contains the URL for the help file.

• Culture

—

This field is optional. You must have this field if you want to have a different Help URL for different culture. You can define different Help URLs with the same Caption ID but different Help URL.

You must leave the value for the default culture blank. For example:

Table 1. Culture

Context ID sites.mysite.default.aspx

sites.mysite.default.aspx

Culture id-ID

Help Url

defaultHelp.aspx

defaultHelp.id-ID.aspx

If your list uses different names for the fields, you must define the name in the Context ID Field Name, Help Url

Field Name, and Culture Field Name properties.

The Help URL field may contain an absolute or a relative URL.

You can create the source list easily by using the “AgreeYa Help List” under Custom Lists in SharePoint. This will automatically create a list that contains all of the above fields.

qHelpLink Pages

You can configure this web part through its tabs that are accessible through ezEdit. qHelpLink contains the following tabs:

•

•

•

•

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

126

Content Page

The Content page allows you to enter the content for your web part. It contains the following:

•

•

Custom Display

Primary Content

The Primary Content page is default category. You need to configure one or more elements in this page to get started using this web part.

Primary Content contains the following:

Table 2. Primary Content

Element

Site Url

List Name

Description

Allows you to set the URL to the site that contains the list. The URL can be absolute (http://...) or relative to the current page URL. This attribute is mandatory.

When using a relative URL, you can use a single dot (.) to denote the current path, a double dot (..) to denote the previous path, and a slash (/) to denote the root path.

Allows you to set the name of the list. The name is case sensitive. If the name of the list contains spaces, include the spaces in the List Name.

Context ID Allows you to set the identifier to locate the help URL in the list.

NOTE: Define a convention for the Context ID value that will make it easy for you to identify where the help URL is used. For example, use the page URL, remove the host name from the URL, and replace all / (slash) with . (dot). Therefore, if the page URL is http://hostname/sites/mysite/default.aspx, the Context ID is sites.mysite.default.aspx

Context ID Field Name Allows you to set the name of the field containing the context ID. The default value is User Context ID.

Help Url Field Name Allows you to set the name of the field containing the message. The default value is Help URL.

Culture Field Name Allows you to set the name of the field containing the Culture. The default value is User Culture.

Help Text Allows you to set the text for the help link. The default value is Help. You can replace this value with HTML such as <img border="0" title="Help" src="imageURL"> to display an image instead of text.

Custom Display

The Custom Display page contains the following:

Table 3. Custom Display

Element

CSS Style

CSS Class

Description

Allows you to set the CSS style for the help link. The default value is empty. You can define this as you would define the styles in a CSS class.

Allows you to set the CSS class name for the help link. The class name must be defined in an external CSS file. If defined, this priority takes precedence over the

CSS Style class.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

127

Behavior Page

The Behavior page allows you to configure behaviors, such as adding buttons or menus, so the user can perform operations when using the web part.

The Behavior page contains the following:

•

Navigation

The Navigation page allows you to configure how and where the user will navigate in the web part. It contains the following elements:

Table 4. Navigation

Element

Target

Description

Allows you to define how the help file should be displayed. The default value is

_blank, which means the help file opens in a new window. Another alternative is the name of a frame or another window.

Appearance Page

The Appearance page allows you to set the overall look and feel of the web part. This page contains the following:

•

•

•

Ribbon

The Ribbon page allows you to set the display name of the Ribbon.

Table 5. Ribbon

Element

SharePoint Ribbon Tab

Name

Description

Allows you to edit the display name of the Ribbon tab.

Layout

The Layout page allows you to set the overall layout of the web part. It contains the following:

Table 6. Layout

Element

Width

Height

Chrome State

Chrome Type

Hidden

Direction

Description

Allows you to set the web part to a fixed width

Allows you to set the web part to a fixed height

Allows you to select if the web part can be minimized or not when you open the web part.

If Minimized is selected, then only the Title Bar displays.

Allows you to select the kind of border to display around the web part.

Select this check box if you want the web part hidden

Allows you to set how the text in the web part displays depending on the language, either from Left to Right or Right to Left www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

128

Other

The Other page allows you to set the appearance of other elements in the web part. It contains the following:

Table 7. Other

Element

Allow Minimize

Allow Close

Allow Hide

Allow Zone Change

Allow Connections

Select this check box if you want the web part moved to a different zone

Select this check box if you want the web part to participate in connections to other web parts

Allow Editing in Personal View Select this check box if you want the web part modified in a personal view

Export Mode

Title URL

Description

Allows you to select the level of data that can be exported for this web part

Allows you to add the title of a URL as extra information about the web part

Help URL

Allows you to enter a description of the web part that is displayed as a Tooltip when you hover your mouse over the web part title or icon.

Allows you to enter the location of a file containing Help information about the web part.

Help Mode

Description

Select this check box if you want the web part minimized

Select this check box if you want the web part removed from the page

Select this check box if you want the web part hidden

Catalog Icon Image URL

Title Icon Image URL

Import Error Message

Allows you to specify how a browser displays Help content for the web part, either in a separate window which you must close before returning to the

Web Page (Mode), in a separate window that you do not need to close before returning to the Web Page (Modeless), or in the current browser window

(Navigate)

Allows you to specify the location of a file containing an image to be used as the web part icon in the Web Part List. The image size must be 16 by 16 pixels.

Allows you to specify the location of a file containing an image to be used in the web part title bar. The image size must be 16 by 16 pixels.

Allows you to specify a message that appears if there is a problem importing the web part

Advanced Page

The Advanced page allows you to set advanced features of the web part, such as the following:

•

•

The Resources page allows you to enable Localization

Security

The Security page allows you to set which users are allowed to view the web part. It contains the following:

Table 8. Security

Element

Target

Audiences

Description

Allows you to have the Web Part to appear only to people who are members of a particular group or audience.

An audience can be identified by using a SharePoint group, a distribution list, a security group, or a global audience.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

129

Resources

in the web part using resource lists.

Localization

Localization contains the following elements.

NOTE:

While this feature is still available to use, we recommend using ezLocalizer. For more information, see ezLocalizer on page 341 .

Table 9. Localization

Element

Resource List

Title Resource ID

Description

• Resource ID — This field contains the identifier to refer to the string. You can have multiple strings with the same Resource ID as long as their Culture value is different.

• Culture — This field contains the culture for the string. For the default culture, leave the Culture field blank.

• Value — This field contains the value for the string.

The Lists element can contain only one List element. The following are the attributes for the List element:

• SiteUrl — The URL to the site that contains the resource list. The URL can be absolute (http://...) or relative to the current page URL. This attribute is mandatory.

• ListName — The name of the resource List. The list name is case sensitive.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

130

qItemDisplay

•

•

qItemDisplay Pages

Overview

qItemDisplay displays the item that was put into a session variable by another web part, such as qListView or qListForm. If you want to select something from a large list, you can use a combination of qItemDisplay and qListView. qListView is used to select the item and qItemDisplay is used to display the item after it is selected.

Because qItemDisplay is a row provider, you can use this web part to pass the selected item to qListForm to be consumed or to a qListView to filter the data.

qItemDisplay supports multiple languages, and Dynamic language switching and Flash and JavaScript (HTML5).

You can define different a Title for different languages using the Resource List and the Title Resource ID properties.

qItemDisplay Pages

You can configure this web part through its tabs that are accessible through ezEdit. qHelpLink contains the following tabs:

•

•

•

•

Content Page

The Content page allows you to enter the content for your web part. It contains the following:

•

For more information, see Display Format on page 11 .

•

Custom Display

Primary Content

The Primary Content page is default category. You need to configure one or more elements in this page to get started using this web part.

Primary Content contains the following: www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

131

Table 1. Primary Content

Element

Title

Session Name

Site URL

List Name

Display Field Name

Display Format

No Selected Item

Message

Description

Allows you to add a title to the web part.

Allows you to set the name of the session variable where qItemDisplay retrieves the selected item information. This name must be set to the same value as the name specified in the:

• Set Session Name attribute in the Viewed Lists property of the qListView if you use the listview to select the item.

• Set Session Name property of the qListForm if you use the List Form to put the item into the session

Allows you to set the URL to the site that contains the list to be searched. The

URL can be absolute (http://...) or relative to the current page URL. This attribute is mandatory.

When using a relative URL, you can use a single dot (.) to denote the current path, a double dot (..) to denote the previous path, and a slash (/) to denote the root path.

Allows you to set the name of the SharePoint list. The list name is case sensitive.

If the list name contains spaces, include the spaces here as well.

To denote the current list, you can use a single dot (.) as the list name.

Allows you to set the name of the field that you want to display in the selector.

The field name is case sensitive.

If you want to display information from multiple fields, use the Display Format properties. The Display Field Name property is ignored if the Display Format property is defined.

Allows you to configure the format of the items that are displayed. This property can contain a plain text value or a piece of HTML. You can use a field replacement expression (<%field name %>) to refer to a field name. For example, you can display Employee ID and Employee Name as follows:

<strong>Employee ID</strong>: <%Employee ID %><br>

<strong>Employee Name</strong>: <%Employee Name%>

The item is displayed as:

Employee ID: 1001

Employee Name: John Smith

Allows you to set the message that is displayed if the qItemDisplay does not find the selected item information in the session variable. The default value is No

Item Selected.

Custom Display

The Custom Display page contains the following:

Table 2. Custom Display

Element

Style

CSS Class

Description

Allows you to set the CSS style for the help link. The default value is empty. You can define this as you would define the styles in a CSS class.

Allows you to set the CSS class name for the help link. The class name must be defined in an external CSS file. If defined, this priority takes precedence over the

CSS Style class.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

132

Behavior Page

The Behavior page allows you to configure behaviors, such as adding buttons or menus, so the user can perform operations when using the web part.

The Behavior page contains the following:

•

Navigation

The Navigation page allows you to configure how and where the user will navigate in the web part. It contains the following elements:

Table 3. Navigation

Element

No Selected Item

Redirect URL

Description

If specified, the user will be redirected to this URL if the qItemDisplay does not find the selected item information in the Session. The page specified by this

URL usually contains the Web Part to select the item.

Appearance Page

The Appearance page allows you to set the overall look and feel of the web part. This page contains the following:

•

•

•

•

Ribbon

The Ribbon page allows you to set the display name of the Ribbon.

Table 4. Ribbon

Element

SharePoint Ribbon Tab

Name

Description

Allows you to edit the display name of the Ribbon tab.

Toolbar

The Toolbar page allows you to configure the appearance of the toolbar. It contains the following: www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

133

Table 5. Toolbar

Element

Toolbar Skin Name

Change Value Button Text

Description

Allows you to enter the skin name for the toolbar.

Allows you to change the selected item that is displayed in qItemDisplay.

Because qItemDisplay is read-only, the user must go to another page to change the value. That other page usually contains another web part, such as qListView. The Selected Item Display provides a button in the toolbar to redirect the user to the Change Value page. This property defines the text for that button. The default value is Change Value. You may want to change this value to something else, for example, Change Selected Project, or Change

Selected Customer.

Change Value Button Icon URL Allows you to define the URL for the icon for the Change Value button. This property is optional if you do not want to have an icon on the button.

Change Value Button URL Allows you to define the URL for the change value page. If this property is not defined, the Change Value button will not be displayed.

NOTE: NOTE: This value is usually the same as the value in the No Selected

Item Redirect URL.

Layout

The Layout page allows you to set the overall layout of the web part. It contains the following:

Table 6. Layout

Element

Width

Height

Chrome State

Chrome Type

Hidden

Direction

Description

Allows you to set the web part to a fixed width

Allows you to set the web part to a fixed height

Allows you to select if the web part can be minimized or not when you open the web part.

If Minimized is selected, then only the Title Bar displays.

Allows you to select the kind of border to display around the web part.

Select this check box if you want the web part hidden

Allows you to set how the text in the web part displays depending on the language, either from Left to Right or Right to Left

Other

The Other page allows you to set the appearance of other elements in the web part. It contains the following:

Table 7. Other

Element

Allow Minimize

Allow Close

Allow Hide

Description

Select this check box if you want the web part minimized

Select this check box if you want the web part removed from the page

Select this check box if you want the web part hidden

Allow Zone Change

Allow Connections

Select this check box if you want the web part moved to a different zone

Select this check box if you want the web part to participate in connections to other web parts

Allow Editing in Personal View Select this check box if you want the web part modified in a personal view

Export Mode

Title URL

Allows you to select the level of data that can be exported for this web part

Allows you to add the title of a URL as extra information about the web part www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

134

Table 7. Other

Element

Description

Help URL

Help Mode

Catalog Icon Image URL

Title Icon Image URL

Import Error Message

Description

Allows you to enter a description of the web part that is displayed as a Tooltip when you hover your mouse over the web part title or icon.

Allows you to enter the location of a file containing Help information about the web part.

Allows you to specify how a browser displays Help content for the web part, either in a separate window which you must close before returning to the

Web Page (Mode), in a separate window that you do not need to close before returning to the Web Page (Modeless), or in the current browser window

(Navigate)

Allows you to specify the location of a file containing an image to be used as the web part icon in the Web Part List. The image size must be 16 by 16 pixels.

Allows you to specify the location of a file containing an image to be used in the web part title bar. The image size must be 16 by 16 pixels.

Allows you to specify a message that appears if there is a problem importing the web part

Advanced Page

The Advanced page allows you to set advanced features of the web part, such as the following:

•

•

The Resources page allows you to enable Localization

Security

The Security page allows you to set which users are allowed to view the web part. It contains the following:

Table 8. Security

Element

Target

Audiences

Description

Allows you to have the Web Part to appear only to people who are members of a particular group or audience.

An audience can be identified by using a SharePoint group, a distribution list, a security group, or a global audience.

Resources

in the web part using resource lists.

Localization

Localization contains the following elements.

NOTE:

While this feature is still available to use, we recommend using ezLocalizer. For more information, see ezLocalizer on page 341 .

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

135

Table 9. Localization

Element

Resource List

Title Resource ID

Description

• Resource ID — This field contains the identifier to refer to the string. You can have multiple strings with the same Resource ID as long as their Culture value is different.

• Culture — This field contains the culture for the string. For the default culture, leave the Culture field blank.

• Value — This field contains the value for the string.

The Lists element can contain only one List element. The following are the attributes for the List element:

• SiteUrl — The URL to the site that contains the resource list. The URL can be absolute (http://...) or relative to the current page URL. This attribute is mandatory.

• ListName — The name of the resource List. The list name is case sensitive.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

136

qListForm

•

•

•

•

Overview

The qListForm replaces the Microsoft List Form web part. qListForm provides many features to create relationships among lists. The only native SharePoint capability that creates relationships between two lists is the lookup field. However, the lookup field can only see one field from a list that resides in the same workspace. This limits your ability to create a sophisticated application across several workspaces.

With qListForm, you have the ability to:

• support different content type in the list

• support dynamic language switching and Flash and JavaScript (HTML5)

• place the List Form in any page, including list-supporting forms, such as DispForm.aspx, EditForm.aspx,

NewForm.aspx, and Upload.aspx.

• create, update, or display an item from lists in another site. The target list is defined using Site URL and

List Name properties.

• define a custom toolbar button. You can associate the custom toolbar button with one or more actions.

The list form has some pre-defined actions, such as Save, Delete, Copy or Move. You can also write your own custom action and hook it up with the list form.

• use various form types: DisplayListItem, NewListItem, EditListItem, DisplayDocument, UploadDocument,

CreateDocument and EditDocument. This is defined in the Form Type property.

• filter a lookup/cross-site lookup field with another lookup/cross-site lookup field using the master-detail capability

• insert an image, upload documents, and do a spell-check using the Rich Text Editor.

• customize the Rich Text Editor’s toolbar using Rich Text Editor Toolbar Settings.

• create collapsible sections in the Rich Text Editor. For more information, see Creating and Editing

Collapsible Sections on page 182 .

• show or hide user fields based on the SharePoint group membership of the user.

• define whether to hide, show, enable, or disable a field, a group of fields or a tab in the list form based on the condition of the fields.

• create a new document and define the metadata for the new document, and enter the metadata for multiple file uploads.

• redirect users after saving information: GoToNextPageUrl, GoToSource and TrySourceThenNextPageUrl.

• define a different URL for the Save and Close button, Cancel button and the Edit Item button.

• create a new record or update records in dependent lists. www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

137

• add child list and create a relationship between parent and child list.

• ensure the referential integrity of the records in the dependent lists by preventing the deletion of the parent record.

• manage attachments in the List Form if the target list is attachment-enabled.

• add new lookup item

• add user from people picker control

• insert an image as an attachment to the list item using the Image Manager toolbar button.

• define a mask for the input. Enforcing the format increases the consistency and data correctness.

• create a description for each field in plain text or HTML.

• define a new title for the field.

• add rating for an item.

• assign a fixed value to a field, and assign a formatted value to a field based on values in other fields.

• fill the value of a field from a value stored in the Session variable.

• create a cross-site lookup field. A cross-site lookup field is similar to the SharePoint lookup field, except it can look up multiple lists in any workspaces that are accessible from the current site by the current user.

• sort entries in the cross-site lookup field.

• auto-fill a field based on value of a field that belongs to a parent field. The parent field can be a lookup field or a cross-site lookup field. This feature ensures data consistency and correctness when the value from the parent field is replicated in the target field.

• hide a field. A hidden field is processed during postback, but it will not be displayed.

• create a read only field.

• store the displayed, new, or updated items into the Session. This feature enables a List Form to communicate with another web part, such as qSelector in another page.

• display the options for multi-choice fields in multiple columns.

• send an email while editing or creating an item using the List Form Emailer.

• The List Form Emailer requires you to put the MailSettings configuration in the web.config file. You have to do this because the List Form Emailer does not use the SharePoint email capability due to its limitation of sending a maximum of 1000 characters.

NOTE: The List Form Emailer requires you to put the MailSettings configuration in the web.config file. You have to do this because the List Form Emailer does not use the SharePoint email capability due to its limitation of sending a maximum of 1000 characters. The MailSettings configuration looks like the following (you only have to add the lines with bold font):

<section name="MailSettings" type="System.Configuration.SingleTagSectionHandler,

System, Version=1.0.5000.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089" />

</sectionGroup>

</configSections>

</QuestSoftware>

</configuration>

• use IRowConsumer and IWebPartRow interfaces to auto-fill a certain field based on field in a consumed row.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

138

NOTE: The IRowConsumer interface is obsolete. It is provided here only for backward compatibility reason. When you establish the web part connection, this interface is labeled Consume Row From

(Obsolete) in the web part Connections menu. Use the IWebPartRow consumer implementation that is labeled with Get Row From.

The IWebPartRow consumer implementation is labeled with Get Row From in the web part

Connection menu. This interface cannot be connected with the obsolete IRowProvider implementation. Do not connect this new interface with the old interface that is marked obsolete.

• use IRowProvider and IWebPartRow interfaces to provide a row to another web part, such as qListForm or qSelector.

NOTE: The IWebPartRow implementation is labeled with Send Row To in the web part Connection menu. This interface cannot be connected with the obsolete IRowConsumer or IFilterConsumer implementation. Do not connect this new interface with the old interface that is marked obsolete.

The IRowProvider interface is obsolete. It is provided here only for backward compatibility reason.

When you establish the web part connection, this interface is labeled Consume Row From

(Obsolete) in the web part Connections menu. Use the IWebPartRow consumer implementation that is labeled with Send Row To.

Configuration Wizard

qListForm uses a configuration wizard to walk you through basic configuration tasks. For more information on

using the Configuration Wizard, see Configuring Basic Settings using the Configuration Wizard on page 181 .

User Permissions

In order for qListForm to work, the user must have a minimum set of permissions in their permission level.

Table 1. User Permissions

Form Type

NewListItem

UploadDocument

EditListItem

EditDocument

DisplayListItem

DisplayDocument

CreateDocument

Minimum set of permissions

Item, Edit Items, View Items, View Pages, Browse User Information, Open

Add Item, Edit Items, View Items, View Application Pages, View Pages, Browse User

Information, Open

Items, View Items, View Pages, Browse User Information, Open

Items, View Items, View Application Pages, View Pages, Browse User Information, Open

View Items, View Pages, Open

View Items, View Application Pages, View Pages, Open

Add Item, Edit Items, View Items, View Application Pages, View Pages, Browse User

Information, Open

If you do not meet the above minimum requirements, you will see "Access is denied" message either when the list form is loaded or when it is saved.

qListForm Pages

You can configure this web part through its pages that are accessible through ezEdit. qListForm contains the following pages:

•

•

Behavior Page

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

139

•

•

Content Page

The Content page allows you to enter the content for your web part. It contains the following:

•

Allows you to select child list. For more information, see Child List on page 183 .

•

System Integration

•

Optional Content

Primary Content

The Primary Content page is default category. You need to configure one or more elements in this page to get started using this web part.

Primary Content contains the following:

Table 2. Primary Content

Element

Title

Site Url

List Name

Child List

Description

Allows you to enter a title for the Web Part, or accept the default. This field is mandatory.

Allows you to set the URL to the site that contains the list to be searched. The URL can be absolute (http://...) or relative to the current page URL. This attribute is mandatory.

When using a relative URL, you can use a single dot (.) to denote the current path, a double dot

(..) to denote the previous path, and a slash (/) to denote the root path.

If you want to connect the List Form with another web part in Microsoft SharePoint Designer, the

Site URL property must contain an absolute URL.

Allows you to enter the name of the SharePoint list or document library that is edited or displayed by this List Form. The list name is case sensitive. If the list name contains spaces, include the spaces here as well.

To denote the current list that contains the form, you can use a single dot (.) as the list name.

NOTE: This only works if the qListForm is contained in the NewForm.aspx, EditForm.aspx,

DispForm.aspx or Upload.aspx. For example, if you are replacing the Microsoft List Form in the

NewForm.aspx of the Tasks list and you use a single dot as the List Name, the List Name property of the qListForm is set to Tasks. If you want to save the list as a template and then add it somewhere else, the name of the new list might not be Tasks and using this relative list name will automatically pick up the new list name for the form

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

140

Table 2. Primary Content

Element

Display

Fields

Child List

Display

Fields

Description

Form Type Allows you to choose one of the following:

• DisplayListItem — The form is used to display a list item (all fields are read-only).

• NewListItem — The form is used to create a new item in the list.

• EditListItem — The form is used to edit a list item.

• DisplayDocument — The form is used to display a document metadata.

• UploadDocument — The form is used to upload a document into a document library.

• EditDocument — The form is used to modify a document metadata.

• CreateDocument — The form is used to create a new document in the document library in a similar manner as the NewListItem except it will display the "File Name" field as the first field in the form. When you click the Save and Close button, a document is created and the metadata specified in the form is applied to the new document. After the document is created, the qListForm will append EditDoc=1 HTTP parameter to the URL where the user is redirected to. If the redirected page contains a qListForm, it will open up the newly created document. The target folder of the new document is specified by the RootFolder HTTP parameter in the URL. If the RootFolder is not specified, the document is created in the root folder of the document library. The qListForm determines which template is used to create the new document using one of the following methods:

By using the document template specified in the content type. The content type is specified by the ContentTypeId HTTP parameter in the URL. If the ContentTypeId is not specified, the default content type is used by the list form.

The user can select a document template from a document library. The 2 properties of the list form, Template List Site URL and Template List Name, specify the Site URL and List Name of the doc library that contains the document template. When both are specified, the qListForm will display a drop-down menu above the Field Name field that contains list of documents in that doc library. The user can then select a document that will serve as a template for the new document.

When this property is set to DisplayListItem, EditListItem, DisplayDocument, or EditDocument, the URL of the current page must contain an ID HTTP parameter to indicate the identifier of the item to be displayed or edited. The ID HTTP parameters are usually included by the List Form when you click New Item in its toolbar or View Properties or Edit Properties in its context menu.

Form Layout For more information, see Form Layout on page 142 .

For more information, see

list.

Display Fields on page 150 .

NOTE: Use the Related Items check box if you want to display the child list along with parent

Defines the fields that should be displayed in the view for the child records. For more information, see Child List Display Fields on page 183 .

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

141

Table 2. Primary Content

Element

Relationship

Mapping

ID HTTP

Parameter

Name

Description

For more information, see Relationship Mapping on page 184 .

NOTE: If qListForm is placed on a web part page that is contained within a document library, the page will generate an error if the value of the ID HTTP Parameter is bigger than the number of pages within the document library. To prevent this error from happening, rename the ID HTTP

Parameter.

By default, the value of this property is "ID". You can change the value of this property to something else, such as LID. In that case, when you select "View Properties" or "Edit Properties" in the context menu, the URL of the display or edit form becomes: http://mysite.com/EditFormURL.aspx?LID=xxx

Set the same property in the qListForm to the same value.

Form Layout

This property enables you to define the layout of the fields in the List Form. If this property is not defined, the

List Form will display the fields in two column format: the first column is the field title and the second column is the control for the field.

This property is related to the Display Fields property. The Form Layout property defines the layout type and the containers. In order to place a certain field in a specific container, you will use the Tab/Container ID attribute of the Field element in the Display Fields property.

The Form Layout element can contain zero or more Container elements. You may not have to define any container for a certain type of layout manager. Some custom layout manager may have a fixed set of containers that do not need to be defined.

The Form Layout section contains the following: www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

142

Table 3. Form Layout

Form Layout type

Description

Advanced Mode Turn on if you want to edit Form Layout in XML format:

<Container Type="containerType" ID="containerID1" Label="tabText1"

ShowUserGroups="group1,group2" HideUserGroups="group3,group4">

<Container Type="containerType" ID="containerID2" Label="tabText2"

ShowUserGroups="group3,group4" HideUserGroups="group1,group2">

</FormLayout>

Tab Layout Groups the fields in multiple tabs. You can add tabs to this layout by setting values for the following:

• ID — the identifier for the tab. This ID must be unique for each container that is defined in the Form Layout. This identifier is referred to in the ContainerID attribute of the Field element in the Display Fields Property.

• Label — the label for the container. Otherwise, if the container needs a label, it will use the ID.

• ShowUserGroups — the container is shown if the current user is a member of at least one of the specified SharePoint groups. You can define multiple SharePoint group names here by separating them with commas.

• HideUserGroups — the container is hidden if the current user is a member of at least one of the specified SharePoint groups. You can define multiple SharePoint group names here by separating them with commas. The HideUserGroups attribute will take precedence if the current user is a member of one of the groups specified in the HideUserGroups and ShowUserGroups.

Custom Layout Uses the custom layout manager class specified in the LayoutManagerClassName attribute to layout the fields. Using the custom layout, you can write your own custom Layout

Manager where you can layout the fields in any way you want it or even create your own custom controls in the form. For more detail on how to write your own custom Layout

Manager class, see System Integration on page 159

You can add containers to this layout by setting values for the following:

• Type — they type of container.

• Label — the label for the container. Otherwise, if the container needs a label, it will use the ID.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

143

Table 3. Form Layout

Form Layout type

MultiColumn

Layout

Tab and

MultiColumn

Layout

Description

Displays the data in multiple columns. You can select the number of columns, and select if you want to render and control in a single row (displays the Label/Input control on the same row. If not selected, the Label/Input control is on separate row. Being on the separate row gives more screen real estate to render multiple columns. If this is selected, column span and row span attributes are applied to grouped field.)

Groups the fields in multiple tabs and in multiple columns in each tab.

You can add tabs to this layout by setting values for the following:

• Label — the label for the tab. Otherwise, if the container needs a label, it will use the ID.

• ShowUserGroups — the tab is shown if the current user is a member of at least one of the specified SharePoint groups. You can define multiple SharePoint group names here by separating them with commas.

• HideUserGroups — the tab is hidden if the current user is a member of at least one of the specified SharePoint groups. You can define multiple SharePoint group names here by separating them with commas. The HideUserGroups attribute will take precedence if the current user is a member of one of the groups specified in the

HideUserGroups and ShowUserGroups.

• Render and Control in a single row — the tab displays the Label/Input control on the same row. If not selected, the Label/Input control is on separate row. Being on the separate row gives more screen real estate to render multiple columns. If this is selected, column span and row span attributes are applied to grouped field.

Custom Layout

The Custom Layout capability enables you to write your own Layout Manager for the qListForm or qSIListForm.

This document explains the programming interface for writing the custom Layout Manager and how to deploy your custom Layout Manager into the server.

Layout Manager

A Layout Manager is a part of the list form that determines the layout of the controls on the form. The type of the layout for your form is specified in the Form Layout property. Out of the box, the list form provides two layout managers:

Table 4. Layout Manager

Layout manager Description

Default Layout Manger Is used if the Form Layout property of the list form is blank. The default layout manager lays out the controls vertically in two columns: the first column is the field title and the second column is the control for the field.

Tab Layout Manager Enables you to group your fields into multiple tabs. You can use the Tab layout manager by specifying TabLayout in the Type attribute of the FormLayout element in the Form Layout property.

You can create your own Layout Manager:

• When you want to layout the controls in a way that is not provided by the out of the box layout managers. For example, grouping the controls in different sections and having multiple sections in the same row.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

144

• When you want to create a custom control for one or more fields in the form. For example, in Figure 1, the table at the bottom of the form is a custom control created by the custom layout manager. This table contains the list of opening hours for a restaurant for every day during the week.

Figure 1. Creating a custom control

You can create your own custom Layout Manager class or use the sample custom Layout Manager class that is shipped with QuickApps for SharePoint.

To open the sample code

1 Select Start | All Programs | Dell | QuickApps for SharePoint | Sample Code.

The Sample Code folder opens in Windows Explorer.

2 Double-click SampleCode.sln.

This opens the solution in Microsoft Visual Studio. The sample custom Layout Manager class can be found in SampleLayoutManager.cs file in the SampleCustomActionsAndCustomLayouts project.

Custom Layout Manager Class

If you want to write your own custom Layout Manager class, ensure the following:

• A Class Library project is created using Microsoft Visual Studio

• Microsoft SharePoint Server is installed and running properly

• QuickApps for SharePoint is installed and running properly in your SharePoint environment

• You have a strong name key file to sign your assembly

Programming Interface

Your custom Layout Manager classes must be derived from WA.Core.LayoutManager.FormLayoutManager class.

This class is located in WA.Core.DLL that is installed in the Global Assembly Cache (GAC) when you install the

QuickApps for SharePoint.

Properties

The following are the properties of the WA.Core.LayoutManager.FormLayoutManager class: www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

145

Table 5. WA.Core.LayoutManager.FormLayoutManger class properties

Property

FormType

WebPart

FormItem

FormLayout

ClientSide

ValidationError

Handler

Description indicates the type of list form that contains the layout manager class. The type of this property is FormTypeEnum enumeration and the options are New, Edit or Display. This property is useful when you create custom controls in your layout manager. For example, when the FormType is Display, you may want to make your custom control read only.

references the parent web part, which is either a qListForm or a qSIListForm.

references the item that is being created, edited, or displayed in the form. The type of this property is System.Object. The real type of the FormItem depends on whether the

Layout Manager is used in the qListForm or qSIListForm. The qListForm will assign a

Microsoft.SharePoint.SPListItem object to the FormItem property. The qSIListForm will assign a System.Collections.Hashtable object to the FormItem property. The Hashtable contains a key value pair of field name and field value. You can use the FormItem to get the values of the fields to populate your custom controls and to save the value from your custom controls back to the form.

indicates an XML string that is entered in the Form Layout property of the qListForm or qSIListForm. You can use this information to find out about the containers that are specified for your layout manager.

indicates a read only property to get the name of the Javascript function that is called in the validation error in the client side, such as a required field that is empty, number field outside a specific range. You do this only if you need special handling such as showing the control with the validation error. For example, the Tab layout manager groups fields in different tabs. The field with the validation error maybe located in the tab that is not currently shown. In that case, the Tab layout manager needs to show the tab that contains the field with the validation error.

NOTE: Your layout manager class can override this property.

Methods

The following are the methods of the WA.Core.LayoutManager.FormLayoutManager class.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

146

Table 6. WA.Core.LayoutManager.FormLayoutManager class methods

Method public abstract void

AddControlToContainer(System.

Web.UI.Control control, string containerID, string fieldDisplayName, string fieldInternalName, Guid fieldID, string fieldDescription, bool isFieldRequired, bool isControlHidden) public abstract void

AddMessageToContainer(string message, string containerID) public abstract void

HideControl(Guid fieldID)

Description

Is called by the list form during initialization phase (in the OnInit method).

The list form will create controls for the fields specified in the Display

Fields property and then call this method to add the control to the layout manager. Your layout manager class must override this method. The following are the parameters for this method:

• control – the control to be added

• containerID – the ID of the container where this control should be added. The containerID for the field is specified in the Display

Fields property of the list form. If not specified, the containerID is

NULL.

• fieldDisplayName – the display name of the field that owns this control. For qListForm, this means the display name for the

SharePoint field, which is usually different than the internal name of the field.

• fieldInternalName – the internal name of the field that owns this control. For qListForm, this means the internal name for the

SharePoint field, which is usually different than the display name of the field. For example, the internal name of the “Assigned To” field may be “Assigned _x0020_To”. For qSIListForm, the fieldDisplayName and the fieldInternalName are the same.

• fieldID – the unique identifier for the field. This is a good candidate to use as a unique key to keep track of your fields. For example, when the list form needs to hide the controls for certain fields by using the HideControl method, it will use the fieldID as parameter.

• fieldDescription – the description for the field. This is the field description that is specified by the user in the Display Fields property of the list form. It’s up to you on how you want to display it in your layout manager. One option is to display the description underneath the control. If not specified, the fieldDescription is

NULL.

• isFieldRequired – a boolean flag to indicate whether or not this is required field. You may want to put some visual indicator for required fields such as a ‘*’ in the field title.

• isControlHidden – a boolean field to indicate whether or not the control for the field should be hidden. The user can mark a certain field as a hidden field in the Display Fields property. If a field is hidden, you still have to add the control into the control hierarchy but you need to hide it in a certain way. For example, you can set the style’s Display attribute to None.

Is called if the list form needs to display a certain message on the form.

For example, if the Email Notification Section in the qListForm is enabled, the qListForm will call this method to generate this message: "If you want to send an email notification, please complete the following information.”

The email is sent if you enter one or more email addresses in the To field.

You need to display the message in the layout manager when this method is called.

Is called if the list form needs to hide a certain control. For example, when the qListForm is editing a Calendar item, the Start Time and End

Time fields needs to be hidden when the user checks the All Day Event and

Recurrence fields. You must implement this method for your layout manager to support the Form Component Behavior property of the list form.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

147

Table 6. WA.Core.LayoutManager.FormLayoutManager class methods

Method public abstract void

ShowControl(Guid fieldID) public virtual void

EnableControl(Guid fieldID) public virtual void

DisableControl(Guid fieldID) public virtual void

ShowContainer(Guid fieldID) public virtual void

HideContainer(Guid fieldID) public virtual void

EnableContainer(Guid fieldID) public virtual void

DisableContainer(Guid fieldID) public virtual void

PopulateFormControls() public virtual void

SaveValuesToFormItem()

Description

Is called if the list form needs to show a certain control. For example, when the qListForm is editing a Calendar item, the Start Time and End

Time fields needs to be shown when the user unchecks either the All Day

Event or Recurrence fields. You must implement this method for your layout manager to support the Form Component Behavior property of the list form.

Is called if the list form needs to enable a certain control. You must implement this method for your layout manager to support the Form

Component Behavior property of the list form.

Is called if the list form needs to disable a certain control. You must implement this method for your layout manager to support the Form

Component Behavior property of the list form.

Is called if the list form needs to show a certain container in your layout manager. You must implement this method for your layout manager to fully support the Form Component Behavior property of the list form.

You layout manager class may override this method. The list form will call this method if it needs to hide a certain container in your layout manager.

You must implement this method for your layout manager to fully support the Form Component Behavior property of the list form.

Is called if the list form needs to enable a certain container in your layout manager. You must implement this method for your layout manager to fully support the Form Component Behavior property of the list form.

Is called if the list form needs to disable a certain container in your layout manager. You must implement this method for your layout manager to fully support the Form Component Behavior property of the list form.

Overridden if this method creates custom controls for certain fields. You must create the custom controls already in the OnInit method. The list form will call this method during pre-render phase and you can use the

FormItem property to get the values for the fields and populate your custom controls. You do not have to populate the controls that are created by the list form and added by the AddControlToContainer method.

Those controls is populated by the list form.

Overridden if this method creates custom controls for certain fields. The list form will call this method after the user clicks the save button in the form. You must write back the value from your custom controls to the

FormItem so that the list form can save the value back to SharePoint or your external system.

Debugging

In order to debug the code, generate the debug version of the DLL and copy the DLL and PDB file into the bin folder under the root folder of your SharePoint application. If you cannot find the bin folder, you can create one. Sign your assembly with a strong name key file.

NOTE: You can set the output folder of your project to the bin folder of your SharePoint application.

Therefore, the DLL and PDB files are automatically updated every time you compile your application.

Physical Path

To find the physical path of the root folder of your SharePoint application

1 Select Start | Control Panel | Administrative Tools | Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager.

2 Expand the node with your computer name.

3 Expand the Web Sites folder. www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

148

4 Find the node that represents your site. The SharePoint site should contain _layouts, _vti_bin and

_wpresources underneath it.

5 Right-click the node and select Properties.

6 Select Home Directory tab.

The value in the Local path tells you the physical path of your root folder.

Trust Level

Once you generate the debug version, you should change the trust level for your web application to Full while debugging the custom Layout Manager class. The trust level is specified in the web.config. Find the trust element in your web.config and change the level to Full.

Using the Custom Layout Manager Class

In order to use your custom Layout Manager class, you should refer to it in the F orm Layout property of the qListForm or qSIListForm as follows:

NOTE: When you specify the class name in the LayoutManagerClassName attribute in the FormLayout element, you must use a fully qualified class name.

For example, in order to use the SampleLayoutManager class that comes in the sample code, specify the following in the Form Layout property:

<FormLayout Type="CustomLayout"

LayoutManagerClassName="MyCompany.DevStudio.SampleLayoutManager,

MyCompany.DevStudio, Version=1.0.0.0, Culture=neutral,

PublicKeyToken=451cac61f7ec4225" />

Constructing the XML

To use the Form Layout property editor to construct the XML

1 Make sure that you have compiled your custom layout manager project and put the resulting DLL into the bin folder of your SharePoint web application.

2 Create a qSIListForm.

3 Select Web Part Menu | Configure from the SI List Form.

4 Click Edit on the Form Layout property.

5 Select CustomLayout in the Form Layout Type drop-down menu.

6 Select the class name in the drop-down menu under the Layout Manager Class Name.

7 Click OK.

Debugging the Code

To debug the code in your custom Layout Manager class

1 Open the SharePoint page that contains the qListForm or qSIListForm that contains the custom Layout

Manager.

2 Open your project's solution using Visual Studio.

3 Select Debug | Attach to Process.

4 Select w3wp.exe in the process list.

If w3wp.exe is not listed, make sure that you check Show processes in all sessions. You may see more than one w3wp.exe listed. If you do, select the one with your user name or try it one by one until you find the process that contains the executable for your code.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

149

5 Click Attach.

6 Set some breakpoints in your custom action code.

7 Invoke your custom action by clicking the custom toolbar button or the custom context menu that you configure in qListView or qListForm.

Deploying the Custom Layout Manager Class

When it is ready to deploy the solution, build your custom action project in release mode. Sign the assembly with a strong name key file. This ensures the assembly created can be deployed into Global Assembly Cache

(GAC).You can deploy your assembly into the GAC by using the gacutil.exe that comes with the .NET Framework

SDK. Here is the command: gacutil /i <DLLName>.

Once the assembly is dropped into the GAC, your class is ready to use.

Display Fields

This property defines what fields should be displayed in the List Form and how the fields are populated.

When you select the Edit button, a dialog box opens with a list of field names based on the list you have selected. You can enter a title and description for each field name.

You can add more details to the field names.

Table 7. Display Fields

Element Description

Advanced Mode Turn on if you want to edit Display fields in XML format. For example:

</Fields>

</DisplayFields>

Field Name Displays the field name.

Title Allows you to change the displayed title for the field. The value can be a plain string or an encoded HTML string. Change the displayed title, for example, when the title is too long or to make the title more descriptive.

Title Resource ID If supporting a multi-lingual site, you may want to display a different Title for the field depending on the current culture. This property defines the identifier in the Resource List that is used as the title of the field. The TitleResourceID and the current cultural setting

(identified with the Culture HTTP parameter) are used to retrieve the string in the

Resource List. If the string with the given identifier is not found, the default Title is used.

Tooltip

Tooltip Resource

Allows you to set the text that is displayed in the tooltip when you hover your mouse over the control for the field in the list form. If you do not specify this attribute, the display name of the field is used as the tooltip text.

If supporting a multi-lingual site, you may want to display a different tooltip for the field depending on the current culture. This property defines the identifier in the Resource List that is used as the title of the field. The Tooltip Resource ID and the current cultural setting

(identified with the Culture HTTP parameter) are used to retrieve the string in the

Resource List. If the string with the given identifier is not found, the default tooltip is used.

Description

Resource ID

Allows you to set the field description. It can be a plain string or an encoded HTML string.

The Description is added below the field value.

If supporting a multi-lingual site, you may want to display a different description for the field depending on the current culture. This property defines the identifier in the Resource

List that is used as the title of the field. The Description Resource ID and the current cultural setting (identified with the Culture HTTP parameter) are used to retrieve the string in the Resource List. If the string with the given identifier is not found, the default description is used.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

150

Table 7. Display Fields

Element Description

Width (in pixels) Allows you to set the width of the control in pixels.

Some controls, such as the Rich Text Editor, have minimum width and it will not honor the specified width if it is smaller than its minimum width.

Column Span

Row Span

Hidden

Group Name

Column Count

Hide Select and

Unselect All

Allows you to set the span of the column.

Allows you to set the span of the row.

Allows you to hide the field.If the field is hidden, the List Form will not modify that field at all. If you hide the field using the Hidden attribute, the field is processed according to the way it is defined, but it will not be shown in the List Form.

Allows you to create dynamic behavior for a group of fields. The list form can be defined to have dynamic behavior where certain fields or group of fields can be hidden, shown, disabled, or enabled based on certain conditions. The value in the Group Name field is referred to in the Form Component Behavior property.

Allows you to define the number of columns that the choices for the multi-choice field should be broken into. This is useful if you have many choices in your multi-choice field to minimize the vertical scrolling when entering the data into the list form. This attribute is ignored if the field is not a multi-choice field.

Allows you to hide the Select All and Unselect All links in the multi-choice field control. If not specified, the Select All and Unselect All links are shown by default. This attribute is ignored if the field is not a multi-choice field.

Auto Post Back

Use People

Editor

Use Current User as Default Value

Do not Render as

Hyperlink

Disable Resize

If selected, allows the control to refresh the form when its value changes. This attribute is applicable for the following field types: Lookup field, Cross-site lookup field, Yes/No and

Choice. This attribute is ignored for other field types. This attribute should be set to true in the following scenarios:

• When a lookup field or cross site lookup field is defined as the Parent Field of another field.

• When a lookup field, cross site lookup field, Yes/No, or choice field is being used in the conditions of the Form Component Behavior property.

If selected, allows the qListForm to display the People Editor control for the People and

Group field. With the People Editor control, you can lookup any user in your directory service. By default, the value is false. If set to false, the qListForm will display the users from the site user list.

This attribute only effects the People and Group field. It is ignored for any other fields.

There is a known issue in the SharePoint People Editor control where it cannot persist its value during AJAX operation. Therefore, you need to set Enable AJAX property to false when you use the People Editor control and have an auto-postback lookup field in the form.

If selected, allows the name of the current user to become the default value of the People and Group field when the Form Type is set to New List Item or Upload Document. This attribute is ignored if the Form Type property is set to another value or when the field is not a People and Group field. By default, the value is false.

This attribute affects the display of the Person or Group field, the lookup field or the crosssite lookup field when the Form Type is set to Display List Item or Display Document. If set to true, the value of those kinds of field is rendered as plain text instead of hyperlink.

This attribute determines whether or not the Rich Text Editor for the Rich Text Field can be resized. To resize a Rich Text Editor, you can drag the resize handle in the lower right hand corner of the editor. The resize handle is hidden when this attribute is set to true.

Allows you to expand the list of users or options when selected.

Expand Options on Load

Show User

Groups

Allows you to list SharePoint groups whose members can view the web part. Separate groups with commas.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

151

Table 7. Display Fields

Element Description

Hide User Groups Allows you to list SharePoint groups whose members cannot view the web part. Separate site group names with commas (for example, Administrators, Readers).

If users are defined in Show User Groups and Hide User Groups, Hide Groups takes precedence.

Mask Allows you to define the format of the input for a single line of text field. This property is ignored for another field type. The mask can contain characters and input-mask-flags such as:

# — digit or space, optional. If this position is blank in the mask, it is rendered as a prompt character.

L — uppercase letter, optional. Restricts input to the ASCII letters A-Z.

l (lower case L) — lowercase letter, optional. Restricts input to the ASCII letters a-z.

a — accepts any character

<n..m> — restricts the user input to the declared numeric range, for example: <0..255>.

The numeric range mask part must occupy multiple characters of the mask.

<option1|option2|option3> — restricts user input to one of the set options, for example:

<Sun|Mon|Tue|Wed|Thu|Fri|Sat>.

\ — escapes a mask character, turning it into a literal. "\\" is the escape sequence for a backslash.

All other characters — all non mask elements will appear as themselves. Literals always occupy a static position in the mask at run time, and cannot be moved or deleted by the user.

Prompt

Character

Allows you to define the character that is displayed and saved in place of the empty characters when you specify a Mask. If not specified, "_" (underscore) is used as the default prompt character. Specify only a single character in this attribute.

Parent Field

Parent Filter

Field Name

Field Type

Allows you to define another lookup or cross-site lookup field that is used to filter this field. The parent field must be listed before this field in the XML property.

Allows you to define the field in the parent field that is used to filter this field. In other words, it is the primary key in the list that is used in the lookup or cross-site lookup field.

Filter Field Name Allows you to define the field in the list that is used by this lookup or cross-site lookup field that is filtered by the parent filter field.

Allows you to select a field type. More options are available depending on the field type selected. The default is regular field. See the following fields for more information:

•

Fixed Value

•

Consume Value from an HTTP Parameter

•

Calculated Format

•

Autofill with a lookup/cross-site lookup field

•

Consume value from a row provided by another web part

•

Consume value from a session

•

•

•

•

Fixed Value

You can assign a fixed value to a field using the FixedValue attribute.

For example, to assign Accounting to the Department field:

Additionally, you can use special variables for the FixedValue attribute. www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

152

• <CurrentUserID/>

— this value is replaced by the ID of the currently logged in user. If you want to assign the current user to the People and Group field, use this variable. If you are using Advanced Mode and you would like to assign a task to the currently logged in user, you can specify the following Field element:

<Field Name="Assigned To" FixedValue="<CurrentUserID/>" /> (If you are using Advanced Mode)

• <CurrentUserName/>

— this value is replaced by the name of the currently logged in user.

• <CurrentUserEmail/>

— this value is replaced by the email of the currently logged in user.

• <CurrentLoginName/>

— this value is replaced by the login name of the currently logged in user. The login name is usually in the form of domain\username.

• <Today/>

— this value is replaced by today's date.

• <Now/>

— this value is replaced by the current date and time.

NOTE: If you are using SharePoint Form-Based Authentication, the above variables will return the following, for example:

• CurrentUserName=testuser

• CurrentLoginName=i:0#.f|<site>|testuser

• CurrentUserID=6

• [email protected]

You can edit the following:

Table 8. Fixed Value

Element

Allow Edit

Description

Allows you to edit the fixed value field.The value that is retrieved from the Fixed Value attribute will only be used to initialize the field. Afterwards, the user can modify the value as they wish and save it.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

153

Consume Value from an HTTP Parameter

The HTTP Parameter Consumer field gets its value from an HTTP parameter. This is the attribute to create an

HTTP Parameter Consumer field:

Table 9. Consume Value from an HTTP Parameter

Element

Consume HTTP

Parameter Name

Allow Edit

Description

Allows you to enter the name of the HTTP parameter whose value is to be consumed.

Calculated Format

You can format a value of a field using values from other fields by using the CalculatedFormat attribute. The value of the another field can be referred to using the <%fieldName%> field replacement expression. If you are using Advanced Mode, you must use the encoded form of the < and > characters, which are < and >, respectively unless you type in the value in the Display Fields editor in the List Form Editor, where the Editor will encode the characters automatically for you.

For example, if you want to format the Full Name field as Last Name, First Name, the Field element should be specified as:

Another example is to assign a ten-digit number to the AccountNumber field using the ID of the list item. If the

ID is less than 10 digits, it is padded with zeros.

<Field Name="AccountNumber" CalculatedFormat="<%{0:0000000000}

ID%>"/>

This attribute can also be used to make a field read-only. For example, to make the AccountNumber a read-only field:

Autofill with a lookup/cross-site lookup field

The Auto Fill field gets its value from the parent field. The parent field must be a lookup field or a cross-site lookup field.

The following are the attributes to create an auto-fill field:

Table 10. Autofill with a lookup/cross-site lookup field

Element

Parent Field

Description

Allows you to defines the name of the parent field. The parent field must be specified before any of the child fields.

Allows you to define the field in the parent field where the value comes from Auto Fill Display

Field Name

Auto Fill Display

Format

Allow Edit

Allows you to define the string format for the values. This attribute takes precedence over the Auto Fill Display Field Name attribute. The format of the

Auto Fill Display Format is the same as the format used in the Calculated Format attribute.

Allows you to define if this field is editable. By default, the list form displays this field type as a non-editable field. If this attribute is set to true, this field is editable.

For example, a List Form is used to edit the Employee list. Manager is a field in the Employee list, and it is a lookup field. Two other fields, ManagerFirstName and ManagerLastName, are filled based on the row selected in the Manager field. The Fields element for the Manager, ManagerFirstName,and ManagerLastName will look like the following: www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

154

</Fields>

</DisplayFields>

Set the AutoPostBack attribute to true in the parent field. Otherwise, the ManagerFirstName and the

ManagerLastName fields will not be refreshed when the user selects another manager.

Consume value from a row provided by another web part

The row consumer field gets its value from the row that is consumed by this List Form. To create a row consumer field, you must connect the List Form with another web part that implements the IRowProvider interface (such as the qSelector or qMultiSelectors).

These are the attributes to create a row consumer field:

Table 11. Consume value from a row provided by another web part

Element

Consume Row

Display Field Name

Consume Row

Display Format

Description

Allows you to defines the field name in the row from where the value comes.

Allow Edit

Allows you to define the string format for the values. This attribute takes precedence over the Consume Row Display Field Name attribute. The format of the

Consume Row Display Format is the same as the format used in the Calculated

Format attribute.

Allows you to define if this field is editable. By default, the list form displays this field type as a non-editable field. If this attribute is set to true, this field is editable.

For example, a List Form is used to edit a Tasks list. The Tasks list contains a Project Name field, and this field is configured as a row consumer field. The row is provided by a qSelector web part that displays the list of projects from the Projects list and is connected to the List Form.

</Fields>

</DisplayFields>

Consume value from a session

Session consumer field gets its value from a row that is stored in the session object. The concept is similar to

Row Consumer Field Attributes. However, if you need to get values from multiple providers, you must use the

Session Consumer Field instead of Row Consumer Field because the List Form can only be connected to one row provider.

To create a session consumer field, you must first declare a Sessions element. A Sessions element can contain one or more Session elements. The Sessions element contains the information about the list where the row stored in the session comes from. After the Sessions element is defined, you can use it in the Field element. The

XML for the session consumer field looks like the following:

</Sessions>

<Field Name="field Name" ConsumeSessionName="sessionName"

ConsumeSessionDisplayFieldName="displayFieldName"/>

</Fields>

</DisplayFields> www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

155

These are the attributes to create a row consumer field:

Table 12. Consume value from a session

Element

Name

Site URL

List Name

Consume Session

Display Field Name

Consume Session

Display Format

Description

Allows you to enter the name of the session you want to consume.

Allows you to enter the URL of the list site.

Allows you to enter the list name.

Allows you to defines the field name in the session from where the value comes.

Allow Edit

Allows you to define the string format for the values. This attribute takes precedence over the Consume Session Display Field Name attribute. The format of the Consume

Session Display Format is the same as the format used in the Calculated Format attribute.

If you select New List Item type as Form type, leave this field blank unless it is in simple text format.

Allows you to define if this field is editable. By default, the list form displays this field type as a non-editable field. If this attribute is set to true, this field is editable.

You can replace the Consume Session Display Field Name attribute with Consume Session Display Format if you want to use multiple fields as the source of values for this field.

For example, a List Form is used to edit a Tasks list. The Tasks list contains a Project Name field, and this field is configured as a session consumer field. The row is provided by a qSelector web part in another page that is visited before this page is opened.

</Sessions>

<Field Name="ProjectName" ConsumeSessionName="ProjectsSession"

ConsumeSessionDisplayFieldName="Name"/>

</Fields>

</DisplayFields>

Lookup Field

You can sort and filter the entries for the Lookup fields by using the Sort Field and CAML Filter attributes, respectively. These attributes are ignored if the field is not a lookup field.

For example, if you are using Advanced Mode and you want to sort the Related Task lookup field by its title and only want to show high priority tasks, you can specify the following configuration:

<Field Name="Related Task" SortField="Title" CamlFilter="<Eq>
 <FieldRef

Name="Priority" />
 <Value Type="Choice">(1)

High</Value>
</Eq>" />

Cross-site Lookup

Cross-site lookup is the capability of the List Form to refer to multiple lists in different sites.

To use this feature, create a single-line-of-text field, not a lookup field. Internally, the List Form will store the field value in this format: siteUrl;#listName;#listItemId.

For example, add a Document Type field to the metadata of every document that you store in the document library. One way of doing this is to make this field a choice field. However, if you need to change the options for the Document Type, you have to go to every document library in every site to change it. The same problem occurs if you make the Document Type field a SharePoint lookup field (because SharePoint can look up a list in the same site). The solution is to make the Document Type field a cross-site lookup field. You can create a

Document Type list in a centralized place and create a DocumentType field (as single line of text field) in every document library. Configure this field as: www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

156

</Field>

The Display Field Name attribute can be replaced with Display Format attribute if you want to display multiple fields in the drop-down menu. The value of the Display Format attribute is in the same format as that of the

Calculated Format attribute.

The above configuration assumes the following conditions:

• The DocumentType list resides three levels above the current page (indicated by ../../.. in the Site URL attribute).

• The Document Type list contains one field called Type that contains the text for the document type, such as Budget, Proposal, Manual.

• You want to display the document types sorted alphabetically using the Sort Field attribute. If you do not specify the Sort Field, the document types are sorted in the order they appear in the list; sorted by list item ID.

• The Site Name attribute is a text description of the Site URL. It does not have to match with the real name of the site pointed to by Site URL.

• You want the form to be refreshed every time you select another item by specifying

AutoPostBack="true". This is necessary if this field is a parent field of other fields in the form and the child fields are visible. Otherwise, it is optional.

You can specify more than one List element inside the Field element. If you do, the List Form will display two dropdowns. The first drop-down menu selects the list and the second drop-down menu selects the items in the list. This function makes the Site Name important because the first drop-down menu displays the list as List

Name in SiteName.

System Integration

System Integration (SI) field gets its values from a data column accessible through the System Integration

Framework

—

the same mechanism used by SI Web Parts to connect to external data sources.

In order to use the SI Field, the qListForm should be added to a web part page which belongs to a SharePoint site that has System Integration configuration defined. It also requires that the Catalog property be defined prior to specifying the SI Field.

The required attributes for a field of this type:

Table 13. System Integration

Element

Entity Name

Operation Name

Data Member/Data

Index

Data Text Field

Data Value Field

Description

Allows you to specify which entity to use from Catalog property.

Allows you to specify which entity operation to use from Catalog property to retrieve the options from the external system. The syntax for the operation is

EntityName.OperationName. Both the entity and the operation must already be defined in the Catalog property.

Allows you to specify the data table name that contains the options in case the operation returns multiple tables. If the external system returns multiple data tables without names, you can use the DataIndex attribute to refer to the table. The index is a number and it starts with 0 (not 1).

Allows you to specify the column in the data table whose value is displayed in the dropdown menu.

Allows you to specify the column in the data table that contains the real value that should be saved back to the external system.

Define the DataTextField/DataValueField to be the primary key column for your external data and any other columns as the source for the secondary fields to ensure data integrity; however, it is not required.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

157

Table 13. System Integration

Element

Secondary Field

Name

Data Value Field

Eliminate Duplicate

Values

Use Item Picker

Description

Allows you to specify an additional column in the data table whose value is displayed in the drop-down menu. This is an optional field. Secondary fields are elements under the regular display field so you can specify one or more fields. These fields is read-only.

Allows you to specify the column in the data table from which the actual value is used that is associated with the displayed Secondary Field.

Allows you to specify whether you want to eliminate duplicate values in the drop-down menu.

Allows you to specify whether to use an entity item picker or a drop-down list to display the System Integration column. The default is to use the drop-down list. If you select to use the item picker, you may specify zero or more Finder Operations to be used by the entity item picker. The Finder Operation references the entity.operation defined in the

System Integration Catalog property. You can define one or more entity/operation in the Catalog to help filter the data returned from the external system. Select the Add

Operation button to add a Finder Operation:

• Finder Operation — specifies a valid entity and operation defined in Catalog property to be used in the LookupOperation.

• Filter Field — the field name to be used for filtering. If the operator takes an argument, the filtering happens in the back-end server. If not, the filtering happens in the web server by using the data view filter. The filter field name is also used to match the finder operation during the item picker search.

• Data Member/Data Index — defines the data table name that contains the options in case the operation returns multiple tables. If the external system returns multiple data tables without names, you can use the DataIndex attribute to refer to the table. The index is a number and it starts with 0 (not 1).

The Item Picker option provides the ability to filter a large amount of data before bringing the filtered data into the list form. The default, drop-down list, option will bring all the data over to SharePoint and display it all in a list. Make sure to take into account the amount of data that is returned when deciding the best option to display SI column data using drop-down menu or item picker.

Here is an example:

<Field Name="AWEmployeeID" LookupOperation="Product.EmployeeList"

DataMember="row" DataTextField="LoginID" DataValueField="EmployeeID">

</Field>

</Fields>

</DisplayFields>

Complex Category

The Complex Category field allows the SharePoint discussion view webpart to function like the Lotus Notes response document which contains a category attribute. Categories that allow multiple values are not supported.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

158

The attributes for a field of this type:

Table 14. Complex Category

Element

Edit Mode

Description

Allows you to define how the treeview for the complex category control should be displayed. There are two options:

• Inline — the treeview control is displayed in the form itself which enable the user to assign and edit the complex category values directly in the form

• Popup — the treeview control will display the complex category value as a read only field with and Edit link. When the user clicks the Edit link, it will display the treeview in a popup dialog box. The Popup option is recommended if you have many categories to be displayed in the treeview.

Complex

Category Index

Site URL

Complex

Category Index

List Name

Allows you to index the Complex Category field. Another SharePoint list is used to store the index. The Complex Category Index Site URL is the site URL of the index list. If not defined, the Complex Category Index Site URL will default to the current site URL.

Allows you to set the list name of the index list. If not defined, the Complex Category Index

List Name will default to the name of the discussion list plus Categories. For example, if your discussion list name is Team Discussion, then the index list name is Team Discussion

Categories.

Height Allows you to define the height of the complex category control in pixels. If not specified, it will always fit the whole categories in the form without a scrollbar

Expand to Level Allows you to define the number of category levels that can be expanded when the complex category control is loaded for the first time.

System Integration

This property defines the entity and the operations related to the entity. www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

159

Catalog

Entities contain the following elements:

Table 15. Catalog

Element

Advanced Mode

System

Service

Name

Description

Turn on if you want to edit the Catalog in XML format. This property is an XML string in this format:

<Entity Name="entityName" System="systemName" Service="serviceName"

Default="true/false">

</Properties>

<Parameter Source="sourceType" SessionName="sessionName"

SourceName="sourceName" Type="parameterType" Name="parameterName"

Usage="usageType" Value="value" />

<Parameter Source="sourceType" SessionName="sessionName"

SourceName="sourceName" Type="parameterType" Name="parameterName"

Usage="usageType" Value="value" />

</Operation>

</Entity>

..</Entity>

</Catalog>

Allows you to specify the system name that is defined in the System Integration configuration file. If the system name does not exist in the System Integration configuration file, you will get an error.

Allows you to specify the service name that is defined in the System Integration configuration file. The service name that you specify here must belong to system that you specify in the System attribute. If the service name does not exist in the System

Integration configuration file, you will get an error.

Allows you to specify the name of the entity which must be unique within this Catalog.

The name does not have to match with any name in your external system. However, it is recommended that you use a descriptive name for your entity.

Set Session Name Allows you to enter name of the session variable where the edited or newly created item is stored when it is saved, or the item that is being displayed or edited is stored when it is loaded.

Reset Session

Names

Default

Allows you to reset (set to NULL) the value of the session variable whose name is specified in this attribute. Specify multiple names by separating them with commas.

Allows you to define this entity as the default for the list form. If this element is not specified, the first entity that is listed in the catalog becomes the default entity. The default operation of the default entity is the operation that is used to retrieve the data when the list form is loaded for the first time in edit or display mode.

You can add operations to your entities by configuring the following elements:

Table 16. Operations

Element

Name

Description

Allows you to specify the name of the operation. This name does not have to match with any name in your external system. This name is used to refer to this operation in the Action property.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

160

Table 16. Operations

Element

Method

Default

Description

Allows you to specify the real name of the operation in your external system. For example, it may refer to the name of a web service method. Or it may refer to the name of a stored procedure in your SQL Server database.

Allows you to define this operation as the default. The default operation is the first operation that is called to retrieve the entity to be displayed or edited. If this attribute is not specified, the first operation listed in the entity becomes the default operation.

You can define parameters for the operation by configuring the following elements:

Table 17. Parameters

Element

Name

Source

Usage

Description

Allows you to specify the name of the parameter.

Allows you to define the source of this parameter. The source can be one of the following:

• DefaultValue — the value of the parameter that is the default

• NullValue — the value of the parameter is blank

• FixedValue — the value of the parameter that is defined in the Value attribute

• HttpRequest — the value of the parameter that is retrieved from the HTTP parameters in the page URL. The name of the HTTP parameter is defined in the SourceName attribute.

As an example, say the current page URL is http://mysite.com/default.aspx?ProductType=Hardware. If the SourceName attribute is

ProductType, the value of the ProductType HTTP parameter, which is Hardware, is used as the value of the parameter.

• Input — the value of the parameter that is retrieved from one of the input fields in the form. You specify the name of the input field in the SourceName attribute. Additionally, you can retrieve the current user information as the value of the parameter. You can specify one of the following name in the SourceName attribute to retrieve the current user information:

• RowFromAnotherWebPart — the value of the parameter that is retrieved from the row that is consumed from another web part. You specify the name of the field that is consumed in the SourceName attribute.

• Session — the value of the parameter that is retrieved from the row that is stored in the session. You specify the name of the session in the SessionName attribute. You specify the name of the field that is consumed in the SourceName attribute.

• ComplexType — the value of the parameter is an object based on the Type attribute and

Member definition inside the Parameter. Array and nested complex types are supported.

• Array — the value of the parameter is an array of values

• XML — the value of the parameter that is dynamically built when the condition is execute at runtime

Allows you to define the direction for this parameter. The options are In, Out, InOut, or

ReturnValue.

You can define one or more Property elements.

Table 18. Properties

Element Description

Name Allows you to specify the name of the property. Refer to the documentation for the DAO Provider to your external system will tell you the name of the property that you must define.

Type

Value

Allows you to specify type of value that is specified in the Value attribute. Example:

System.String.

Allows you to specify the value of the property.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

161

Optional Content

You can configure the following optional content:

Table 19. Optional Content

Element Description

Display Attachment Field Allows Display Attachment field to be displayed on the form

Allows Display Creation and Modification Info field to be displayed on the form Display Creation and

Modification Info

Display Required Field

Message

Allows Required Fields Messages to be displayed on the form

Enable Multiple File

Upload

Check Overwrite Existing

File check box

Allows Enable Multiple File Upload field to be displayed on the form

Allows Check Overwrite Existing File check box to be displayed on the form

Show Save As File Textbox Allows Show Save As File textbox to be displayed on the form

Hide Parent Folder Name Allows Hide Parent Folder Name to be displayed on the form

Allow Lookup Item

Addition

Allows Add New Lookup Item link to be displayed in the form using which a user can add new lookup item from the form itself. The link will be visible only in edit mode of the form.

NOTE: This only works if you have edit permission for the list.

Behavior Page

The Behavior page allows you to configure behaviors, such as adding buttons or menus, so the user can perform operations when using the web part.

The Behavior page contains the following:

•

•

•

•

Actions

The list form has some pre-defined actions, such as Save, Delete, Copy or Move. You can also write your own custom action and hook it up with the list form.

The Actions page contain the following elements: www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

162

Table 20. Actions

Element

Custom Actions

Custom Action Error

Display

Description

For more information, see Custom Actions on page 163 .

Allows you to set where the error message is displayed if the custom action throws an exception. The options are:

• Inline — the error message is displayed in the list form above the displayed fields.

• Popup — the error message is displayed in a popup dialog box.

• InlineAndPopup — the error message is displayed in a popup dialog box and inline above the displayed fields.

Popup is the default.

This property will only affect the error message that is returned by the ICustomAction implementation. It will not affect the error that is generated internally by the List

Form.

Custom Actions

This property enables you to define additional buttons in the toolbar or context menu item in the context menu.

Custom Action Help on page 330 to see how to write your own custom actions.

Form.

Here are some ways that you can use this functionality:

• Add a custom toolbar button called "Assign All to Me" that will assign all of the selected tasks in the List

Form to me.

• Add a custom toolbar called "Approve" that will change the status of all of the selected expense items to

Approved.

• Create a custom context menu item called "Publish" that will move the right-clicked document into another document library.

• Create a custom context menu item or toolbar item to start a workflow.

• With the ability to write your own custom action, you can virtually do anything to the data when you click the custom button that you define.

NOTE: The custom action in the List Form does not support the Save action.

The Custom Actions element contains one Toolbar element and one Context Menu element. These elements can contain one or more Action Item elements. You can associate the Action Item with one or more Action elements.

The Action element define a certain operation that is carried out by the action item when it is clicked. When you add an action item, you can configure the following: www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

163

Table 21. Custom Actions

Element

Advanced Mode

IsSeparator

Text

Description

Turn on if you want to edit Custom Actions in XML format. Here are the schema of this property:

<ActionItem ID="UniqueID" Text="text" TextResourceID="textResourceID"

Position="0" PromptText="promptText" PrompTextResourceID=”prompTextResourceID”

ImageUrl=”URL” AccessKey=”AccessKeyCharacter”>

<Action Type="Move" TargetFolder="targetFolder"

TargetSiteURL="targetSiteUrl" TargetListName="targetListName" />

<Action Type="Copy" TargetFolder="targetFolder" TargetSiteURL="targetSiteUrl"

TargetListName="targetListName" />

<Parameter Name="parameterName" Source="Session"

SourceName="fieldName" SessionName=”sessionName” />

<Parameter Name="parameterName" Source="RowFromAnotherWebPart"

SourceName="fieldName" />

<Parameter Name="parameterName" Source="HttpRequest"

SourceName="httpParameterName" />

<Parameter Name="parameterName" Source="ListItem"

SourceName="httpParameterName" />

</Action>

</ActionItem>

</Toolbar>

<ActionItem ID="UniqueID" Text="text" TextResourceID="textResourceID"

Position="0" PromptText="promptText" PrompTextResourceID=”prompTextResourceID”

ImageUrl=”URL” AccessKey=”AccessKeyCharacter”>

<Action Type="Move" TargetFolder="targetFolder"

TargetSiteURL="targetSiteUrl" TargetListName="targetListName" />

<Action Type="Copy" TargetFolder="targetFolder" TargetSiteURL="targetSiteUrl"

TargetListName="targetListName" />

<Parameter Name="parameterName" Source="Session"

SourceName="fieldName" SessionName=”sessionName” />

<Parameter Name="parameterName" Source="RowFromAnotherWebPart"

SourceName="fieldName" />

<Parameter Name="parameterName" Source="HttpRequest"

SourceName="httpParameterName" />

<Parameter Name="parameterName" Source="ListItem"

SourceName="httpParameterName" />

</Action>

</ActionItem>

</ContextMenu>

</CustomActions>

Allows you to set the item as a separator.

Allows you to enter a unique ID that will identify the item. Use a descriptive identifier to configure the action item with the editor.

Allows you to enter how the action item is displayed in the toolbar.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

164

Table 21. Custom Actions

Element

Text Resource ID

Hide User Groups

Description

Allows you to define this property if you support a a multi-lingual site. This attribute defines the identifier of the string in the Resource List that is used as the title of the

Web Part. The Text Resource ID and the current cultural setting (identified with the

Culture HTTP parameter) are used to retrieve the string in the Resource List. If the string with the given identifier and culture is not found, the value in the Text attribute is used.

Prompt Text Allows you to prompt the user to click the toolbar button or the context menu item.

Prompt Text Resource ID Allows you to define this property if you support a multi-lingual site. The property defines the identifier of the string in the Resource List that is used as the title of the

Web Part. The Resource ID and the current cultural setting (identified with the

Culture HTTP parameter) are used to retrieve the string in the Resource List. If the string with the given identifier and culture is not found, the default is used.

Access Key (Toolbar

Only)

Allows you to define one character from the Text attribute that becomes the access key to this toolbar button or context menu item. For example, if you define a letter

T as the access key, you can press ALT+T and the browser will put the focus on this button or context menu item. If there are multiple elements on the page with the same access key, you can repeat ALT+T repeatedly until you get the focus on this toolbar button or context menu item.

Position

Show User Groups

Allows you to set the position of the button in the toolbar. The index starts with 0.

Allows you to list SharePoint groups whose members can view the Web Part. Separate groups with commas.

Allows you to list SharePoint groups whose members cannot view the Web Part.

Separate site group names with commas (for example, Administrators, Readers).

If a user is a member of a group that is defined in both Show User Groups and Hide

User Groups, the user cannot www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

165

When you add an action, you can configure the following:

Element Description

Name An optional element which allows you to identify a given action in order to access it from another action. You can refer to this action from the GoToURL action and from I CustomActionEx Interface.

Type Allows you to determine the type of the action. Here are the options:

• Delete — deletes the item.

• Move — allows you to move the item to a target. You must specify a Target Site URL, Target

List Name, and Target Folder. This action only works for document in a document library.

• Copy — allows you to copy the item to a target. You must specify a Target Site URL, Target

List Name, and Target Folder.

• GoToURL — redirects the user to a specific URL. You must specify the URL and where you want the URL to open. You must specify the following parameters:

• Input - the current user information as the value of the parameter

• Session - the name of the session variable where the value comes from when the source is set to Session

• HttpRequest - the value of the parameter that is retrieved from the HTTP parameters in the page URL. The name of the HTTP parameter is defined in the

SourceName attribute. As an example, say the current page URL is http://mysite.com/default.aspx?ProductType=Hardware. If the SourceName attribute is ProductType, the value of the ProductType HTTP parameter, which is

Hardware, is used as the value of the parameter.

• ListItem - the value of the parameter is a list item or row

SourceName attribute when you use ResultFormAction source:

<ActionName>.<ResultType>[.Name], where ActionName refers to the Name attribute of the action that produces the output, ResultType can be OutParameter

(if the action result is returned through one of the out or inout parameter) or

RawData - (if the action result is returned as an object). Name is optional. It further designates the object we want to use for the parameter. You do not have to specify the Name when the ResultType is RawData. However, if the ResultType is

OutParameter, this name specifies the name of the out or input key value pair.

• ResultFromAction - the parameter for the GoToURL action can be retrieved from the output of another action that comes first in the sequence of actions defined in the

ActionItem

You must define a source name (where in the source you want to get your information from), name (the name of the parameter that is appended to the URL you specified), and Session (the name of the session variable where the value comes from when the source is set to Session)

• GoToSource — redirects the user to the URL specified in the Source HTTP parameter. The

URL to the page must look like: http://...?Source=URL for this option to work.

• StartWorkflow — starts the specified workflow in the Workflow Name drop-down field. You must select a Workflow name.

• ReturnToMasterChart — returns the user to the master chart page. You use this action type if this web part is located in the drill down page.

• Custom — implements your own custom action and call it with this action type. Enter a

Class name that implements the ICustomActionEx or ICustomAction interface, or select a class from the drop-down list, if available.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

166

Form

The Form page contains the following elements:

Table 22. Form

Element

Form Initialization

Actions

Description

Allows the List Form to be automatically pre-populated when the Form Type property is set to NewListItem, CreateDocument, or UploadDocument. The List

Form will call the defined custom actions that are specified in this property.

The fields that cannot be automatically pre-populated are:

• Auto-fill field (fixed value, consume value from an HTTP parameter, calculated format, consume value from a session, consume row from a row provided by another web part, auto fill with a lookup or cross-site lookup field)

• BDC Column

• SI Column

• Complex category field

• Cross site lookup field

See the Custom Action Help on page 330

chapter on how to write a custom action to initialize the list form.

You can click Edit and turn on Advanced Mode to edit Form Initialization Actions in

XML:

<Action Name=”initial 1” Type="Custom"

Class="MyCompany.DevStudio.SampleFormInitializationAction,

MyCompany.DevStudio, Version=1.0.0.0, Culture=neutral,

PublicKeyToken=451cac61f7ec4225" / >

<Action Name=”initial 2” Type="Custom"

Class="MyCompany.DevStudio.SampleFormInitializationAction2,

MyCompany.DevStudio, Version=1.0.0.0, Culture=neutral,

PublicKeyToken=451cac61f7ec4225" / >

</FormInitialization>

Form initialization is a way to auto fill the form. It should not be used in conjunction with another auto fill method. If you do this, the result is unpredictable (that is sometimes the value from form initialization will take precedence, but sometimes the value from the other auto fill method will take precedence).

For more information, see Form Component Behavior on page 168 .

Form Component

Behavior

Dependent Lists

For more information, see Dependent Lists on page 171 .

Template List Site URL Allows you to specify the site URL of the document library that contains the document template that is used to create a new document when the Form Type is

“Create Document”.

Template List Name Allows you to specify the List Name of the document library that contains the document template that is used to create a new document when the Form Type is

‘CreateDocument’.

When both the Template List Site URL and the Template List Name are specified, the qListForm will display a drop-down menu above the Field Name field that contains list of documents in that doc library. The user can then select a document that will serve as a template for the new document.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

167

Form Component Behavior

This property is used to control the conditional behavior of the different components in the form, such as a field, a group of fields, or a tab. You can specify the following conditional behaviors: Show When, Hide When,

Enabled When, Disabled When, Valid When, Invalid When, and Required When. See

Table 24

for more information.

ValidWhen, InvalidWhen, and RequiredWhen are used with SharePoint List Item and Column validation. The validation is processed by:

1 The Form Component Behavior is processed first. If it succeeds (meaning no condition is true for

InvalidWhen and no condition fails for ValidWhen and no condition is true for RequiredWhen), it goes on to perform SharePoint Column and List Item Validation. If they succeed, then Save and Close procedures follow.

2 The implementation of SharePoint List and Column validation applies to qListForm Save and Close action only. If user defines a custom action that has "performValidation" flag set to true, it will only enforce

Form Component Behavior and will ignore List and Column Validation.

This property is an XML string in this format:

The Form Component Behavior element can contain one or more Component elements. Each Component element controls the behavior of a specific component in the form like a field or tab.

The Component element contains the following elements:

Table 23. Form Components

Element

Advanced Mode

Description

Allows you to edit Form Component Behavior in XML.

[Condition specified in CAML Filter format]

</ShowWhen>

[Condition specified in CAML Filter format]

</HideWhen>

[Condition specified in CAML Filter format]

</EnabledWhen>

[Condition specified in CAML Filter format]

</DisabledWhen>

[Condition specified in CAML Filter format]

</InvalidWhen>

[Condition specified in CAML Filter format]

</ValidWhen>

[Condition specified in CAML Filter format]

</RequiredWhen>

</Component>

</FormComponentBehavior> www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

168

Table 23. Form Components

Element

Type

Description

Defines the type of the component that is assigned the dynamic behavior. The choices are: Field, Group, or Container (that is, tab).

Defines the ID or name of the component whose behavior is defined to be dynamic.

When the Type is set to Field, this ID refers to the Name of a field that is defined in the Display Fields property. When the Type is set to Group, this ID refers to the

Group Name attribute of a field that is defined in the Display Fields property.

When the Type is set to Container, this ID refers to the ID of a container that is defined in the Form Layout property.

The Component element may contain any or none of the following conditional behavior elements:

Table 24. Conditional Behavior Components

Element

Show When

Hide When

Enabled When

Disabled When

Required When

Valid When

Invalid When

Description

Defines the conditions of when the form component should be shown.

Defines the conditions of when the form component should be hidden. This conditional behavior takes precedence over the other conditional behavior.

Therefore, if Hide When and Show When are defined and both evaluate to true, the component is hidden.

Defines the conditions of when the form component should be enabled.

Defines the conditions of when the form component should be disabled. This conditional behavior takes precedence over the Enabled When conditional behavior. Therefore, if Enabled When and Disabled When are defined and both evaluate to true, the component is disabled.

Defines the conditions of when the form component should be required. This conditional behavior is for fields only. It has no effect on a field that has been defined as required by SharePoint. A custom message can be specified. It is displayed when the Required When condition is satisfied. The message is displayed by default in red after the input control on the form. However you can specify any text or HTML code as the Message attribute.

Defines the conditions of when the form component should be valid. This conditional behavior is for fields only. A custom message can be specified. It is displayed when the Valid When condition is satisfied. The message is displayed by default in red after the input control on the form. However you can specify any text or HTML code as the Message attribute.

Defines the conditions of when the form component should be invalid. This conditional behavior is for fields only. This conditional behavior takes precedence over the Valid When conditional behavior. Therefore, if Valid

When and Invalid When are defined and both evaluate to true, the field is invalid. A custom message can be specified. It is displayed when the Invalid

When condition is satisfied. The message is displayed by default in red after the input control on the form. However you can specify any text or HTML code as the Message attribute.

For fields of type text, numeric or date/time, regular expression matching can be used for validation. Use the

“Matching” operator in the conditional behavior element.

The following are some examples of how to use this property:

1 Show the Resolved Date and Resolved By fields when the Status field is changed to "Resolved". By specifying both fields’ GroupName attribute in the Display Fields property to “ResolvedFieldsGroup”, it is defined that both fields belong to the same group.

<Eq><FieldRef Name="Status"/><Value Type="Choice">Resolved</Value></Eq> www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

169

</ShowWhen>

</Component>

</FormComponentBehavior>

2 Enable the "Amount Paid" field when the Invoice Status field is changed to "Paid".

</EnabledWhen>

</Component>

</FormComponentBehavior>

3 Hide the Reason field when the Project Status field is not "Behind"

<Neq><FieldRef Name="Project Status"/><Value Type="Choice">Behind</Value></Neq>

</HideWhen>

</Component>

</FormComponentBehavior>

4 Show error message if field, Assigned To, is blank when Status is “In Process”

<And>

</IsNull>

<Eq>

<Value Type="Choice">In Progress</Value>

</Eq>

</And>

</InvalidWhen>

</Component>

</FormComponentBehavior>

5 Field % Complete must be between 0 and 100

<And>

<Geq>

</Geq>

<Leq>

</Leq>

</And>

</ValidWhen>

</Component>

</FormComponentBehavior> www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

170

Dependent Lists

This property identifies the child lists to be updated when the List Form saves the changes to the current list item.

This property works in conjunction with the Form Type property. When the Form Type property is set to

EditListItem or EditDocument, the List Form will update the values in the child lists. When the Form Type property is set to NewListItem or UploadDocument, the List Form will create a new record in the child lists. This is useful when you have two lists with a one-to-one relationship.

This property also prevents the deletion of the current item if there are any child records in the specified lists.

The user can delete a record when the Form Type property is set to DisplayListItem or EditListItem.

The Lists element can contain multiple List elements. One List element represents one child list. These are the attributes of the List element:

Table 25. Dependent Lists

Element Description

Advanced Mode Allows you to edit Dependent Lists in XML. The value of this property is an XML string in this format:

<Lists>

</List>

</Lists>

Site URL Allows you to set the URL of the site that contains the child list.

List Name Allows you to set the name of the child list. The name is case sensitive

Key Field Name Allows you to set the name of the field in the child list that contains the ID of the parent item. The key field is usually a single line of text that contains the parent item ID or a crosssite lookup field to the parent list. The name is case sensitive.

The List element can contain zero or more Field elements. One Field element represents a field in the child list that needs to be updated. These are the attributes of the Tasks list:

• Source

—

The name of the field in the parent list where the value comes from. The name is case sensitive.

• Target

—

The name of the field in the child list where the value is copied to when the parent record is saved. The name is case sensitive.

The following diagram illustrates parent child relationship between two different lists

Figure 2. Parent/Child Relationship between two lists

The Project Phases list is the parent list of the Tasks list. The ID field is the primary key in the Project Phases list because the value of the ID field is guaranteed to be unique (every SharePoint list and library contains a field called ID. This field cannot be modified and its value is uniquely auto-generated by SharePoint). The Phase List www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

171

Item ID is the foreign key in the Tasks list. We replicate the value of the Project List Item ID, Project Name and

Phase Name into the fields with the same name in the Tasks list.

For example, if the List Form is configured to edit an item in the Project Phases list, then every time we modify the information in the Project Phase list we need to make sure the values that are replicated and the Tasks lists are modified. The following is how the Dependent List property should be setup:

<Lists>

</List>

</Lists>

Navigation

The Navigation page allows you to configure how and where the user will navigate in the web part. It contains the following elements:

Table 26. Navigation

Element Description

Save Button Click Action Determines what will happen when the user clicks the Save and Close button on the toolbar. These are the choices for this property:

• GoToNextPageUrl — Go to the page specified in the Next Page URL property.

You can use this option if you always want the user to go to the same URL every time they save the form.

• GoToSource — Go to the page specified in the Source HTTP parameter. For this option to work, the URL of the current page must contain the Source

HTTP parameter (http://...?Source=...). This option will give you the same behavior as the Microsoft List Form. If you open the form using qListView, the listview automatically sets the Source HTTP parameter for you. If you use this option and the Source HTTP is not in the URL, the list form will give you an error.

• TrySourceThenNextPageUrl — Go to the page specified in the Source http parameter if one exists. If not, go to the page specified in the Next Page URL property. This option is the most commonly used one. Most of the time, you want to go the URL specified in the Source HTTP parameter. However, if that parameter is not available (for example, the user may type in the URL directly in the address bar), you want to have an alternative URL to go to.

Next Page URL Works in conjunction with the Save Button Click Action property. When this property is set to GoToNextPageUrl or TrySourceThenNextPageUrl, allows you to set the page to go to when the user clicks the Save and Close button on the toolbar if the Save

Button Click Action property is set to GoToNextPageUrl or

TrySourceThenNextPageUrl.

If this field is blank, you are redirected to the List's Web Address.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

172

Table 26. Navigation

Element

Cancel Button Click

Action

Go Back URL

Show Edit Button

Edit Form URL

Show Version History

Button

Display Form URL

Description

Determines what will happen when the user clicks the Cancel button on the toolbar.

• SameActionAsSaveAndClose — This is the default value. You may want to select another option if you want the Cancel button to behave differently than the Save and Close button. This option is useful if you want to guide the user through a series of steps when doing data entry. For example, when user is in Form1, clicking Save and Close will bring them to Form 2 while clicking

Cancel button will bring them back to the home page.

• GoToGoBackUrl — Go to the page specified in the Go Back URL property. You can use this option if you always want the user to go to the same URL every time they save the form.

• GoToSource — Go to the page specified in the Source HTTP parameter. For this option to work, the URL of the current page must contain the Source

• TrySourceThenGoBackUrl — Go to the page specified in the Source http parameter if one exists. If not, go to the page specified in the Go Back URL property. This option is the most commonly used one. Most of the time, you want to go the URL specified in the Source HTTP parameter. However, if that parameter is not available (for example, the user may type in the URL directly in the address bar), you want to have an alternative URL to go to.

Allows you to set which page to go to after the user clicks the Cancel button on the toolbar if the Cancel Button Click Action property is set to GoToGoBackUrl or

TrySourceThenGoBackUrl.

Allows you to display the Edit Item button when the Form Type is set to

DisplayListItem or DisplayDocument.

Allows you to set the page to go to after the Edit Item button is clicked. If not defined, the user will redirected to the EditForm.aspx of the list.

The Edit Item button will show up when the Form Type is set to Display Item or

Display Document and the Show Edit Button property is set to true.

Allows you to display the Version History button.

Displays the history of changes in the Multiple Lines of Text field when the Append

Changes to Existing Text setting in the field is turned on. The user can click one of the texts in the history list to view that version of the text. This property define the

URL of the Display Form to display previous version of the text. If this property is not defined, the default Display Form of the list is used.

Email Notification

The Email Notification page allows you to configure the web part to be sent as an email. It contains the following:

Table 27. Email Notification

Element

Display Email

Notification Section

Subject

Message

Allow Custom Message

Description

Allows you to determines whether or not the email notification section should be displayed in the List Form. The email notification will enable the user to send an email to one or more recipients when an item is added or modified.

Allows you to specify the default subject that is displayed by the list item email.

Allows you to specify the default message that is displayed by the list item email.

Allows you to set the list item to allow the user to modify the message.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

173

Table 27. Email Notification

Include Link to List or

Library

Include Link to Item

Allows you to allows the hyperlinks to the AllItems.aspx of the list or document library.

Allows you to determine whether the message will include the hyperlink to the newly added or modified list item.

Allows you to allow the email to contain the selected document as attachments.

Include Document as

Attachment

User Selection Mode

User Selection Scope

Allows you to select user from the parent site or address book.

• Plain Text— If the plain text option is selected, a text box will be displayed in which you can type email IDs. Also, a list of all parent site users will be displayed from which the user can be selected.

• People Picker — If the people picker is selected, address book will be displayed from which you can add user.

Allows you to choose the source from which the user will be selected. It can be from All Web User or a specific SharePoint Group.

Advanced Mode: Turn on if you want to edit Web User in XML format. XML will look like the following:

</Scopes>

Turn on if you want to edit SharePoint Group in XML format. XML will look like the following:

<Scope Name="SPGroup" [selected scope] GroupName="SPGroupName" [sharepoint group name] GroupID=" GroupID " [sharepoint group ID]

GroupSiteUrl="groupSiteUrl" />

</Scopes>

Appearance Page

The Appearance page allows you to set the overall look and feel of the web part. This page contains the following:

•

•

•

•

•

Ribbon

The Ribbon page allows you to set the display name of the Ribbon.

Table 28. Ribbon

Element

SharePoint Ribbon Tab

Name

Description

Allows you to edit the display name of the Ribbon tab.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

174

Toolbar

The Toolbar page allows you to configure the appearance of the toolbar. It contains the following:

Table 29. Toolbar

Element

Toolbar Location

Toolbar Skin Name

Show Save Button

Show Cancel Button

Show Delete Button

Show Mark Private/Public

Button

Show Manage Permissions

Button

Show Manage Copies Button

Show Workflows Button

Show Alert Me Button

Save and Close Button Text

Cancel Button Text

Description

Allows you to define where a toolbar for the list form should be displayed. The choices are TopAndBottom, Top, Bottom or None. Select None if you do not want to display the regular toolbar. Only the Ribbon buttons are displayed in this case.

Allows you to enter the skin name for the toolbar.

Allows you to display the Save and Close button.

Allows you to display the Cancel button.

Allows you to show the Delete button in the toolbar.

Allows you to display the Mark Private/Public toggle button. This button will only be displayed for a new form or an edit/display form and the logged in user is the creator of the item. If an item is marked as private, only the creator can see it.

In New or Edit mode, if this property is changed for an item, the change takes place when the Save button is clicked. In Display mode, if this property is changed for an item, the change takes place immediately with the following popup message:

“Are you sure you want to make this item private? This change will take place immediately”

“Are you sure you want to make this item public? This change will take place immediately”

Allows you to display the Manage Permissions button.

Allows you to display the Manage Copies button.

Allows you to display the Workflows button.

Allows you to show the Alert Me button in the toolbar. The Alert Me button creates a list-level alert.

Allows you to set the display text for Save and Close button.

Allows you to set the display text for the Cancel button.

Control

The Control page allows you to set the appearance of your user controls in a web part. It contains the following:

The Control page contains the following: www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

175

Table 30. Control

Element

Rich Text Editor Skin

Name

Rich Text Editor Toolbar

Settings

Complex Category Tree

Skin Name

Drop-Down Skin Name

Description

Allows you to select the skin name for the rich text editor. The rich text editor appears in the form when the Type attribute of the Field element in the Display

Fields property is set to RichText. If you have a custom skin, you can add it to the following folder for SharePoint 2010:C:\Program Files\Common Files\Microsoft

Shared\Web Server

Extensions\14\TEMPLATE\LAYOUTS\QuestSoftware\Telerik\Q32013SP1\Skins, for

SharePoint 2013: C:\Program Files\Common Files\Microsoft Shared\Web Server

Extensions\15\TEMPLATE\LAYOUTS\QuestSoftware\Telerik\Q32013SP1\Skins or for

SharePoint 2016: C:\Program Files\Common Files\Microsoft Shared\Web Server

Extensions\16\TEMPLATE\LAYOUTS\QuestSoftware\Telerik\Q32013SP1\Skins

When creating a custom skin, you can refer to the Sample Skin folder in the install directory.

Clear your browser cache frequently while working with custom skins. In IE, CSS cache can be cleared by clicking the Clear Cache button in the CSS tab of

Developer Tools, located under the Tools menu of the browser.

Define the toolbar groups and the order in which they appear in the toolbar for the text editor for rich text and enhanced rich text.

You can edit Rich Text Editor Toolbar Settings in XML by turning on Advanced

Mode.

Allows you to specify the skin name for the Complex Category Tree in the list form. If you have a custom skin, you can add it to the following folder for

SharePoint 2010:C:\Program Files\Common Files\Microsoft Shared\Web Server

Extensions\14\TEMPLATE\LAYOUTS\QuestSoftware\Telerik\Q32013SP1\Skins, for

SharePoint 2013: C:\Program Files\Common Files\Microsoft Shared\Web Server

Extensions\15\TEMPLATE\LAYOUTS\QuestSoftware\Telerik\Q32013SP1\Skins.

SharePoint 2016: C:\Program Files\Common Files\Microsoft Shared\Web Server

Extensions\16\TEMPLATE\LAYOUTS\QuestSoftware\Telerik\Q32013SP1\Skins.

When creating a custom skin, you can refer to the Sample Skin folder in the install directory.

Allows you to specify the skin name for the drop-down menu control for the choice field. If you have a custom skin, you can add it to the following folder for

SharePoint 2010:C:\Program Files\Common Files\Microsoft Shared\Web Server

Extensions\14\TEMPLATE\LAYOUTS\QuestSoftware\Telerik\Q32013SP1\Skins, for

SharePoint 2013: C:\Program Files\Common Files\Microsoft Shared\Web Server

Extensions\15\TEMPLATE\LAYOUTS\QuestSoftware\Telerik\Q32013SP1\Skins.

SharePoint 2016: C:\Program Files\Common Files\Microsoft Shared\Web Server

Extensions\16\TEMPLATE\LAYOUTS\QuestSoftware\Telerik\Q32013SP1\Skins.

When creating a custom skin, you can refer to the Sample Skin folder in the install directory.

Layout

The Layout page allows you to set the overall layout of the web part. It contains the following:

Table 31. Layout

Element

Width

Height

Chrome State

Chrome Type

Description

Allows you to set the web part to a fixed width

Allows you to set the web part to a fixed height

Allows you to select if the web part can be minimized or not when you open the web part.

If Minimized is selected, then only the Title Bar displays.

Allows you to select the kind of border to display around the web part. www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

176

Table 31. Layout

Element

Hidden

Direction

Description

Select this check box if you want the web part hidden

Allows you to set how the text in the web part displays depending on the language, either from Left to Right or Right to Left

Other

The Other page allows you to set the appearance of other elements in the web part. It contains the following:

Table 32. Other

Element

Allow Minimize

Allow Close

Allow Hide

Allow Zone Change

Allow Connections

Select this check box if you want the web part moved to a different zone

Select this check box if you want the web part to participate in connections to other web parts

Allow Editing in Personal View Select this check box if you want the web part modified in a personal view

Export Mode

Title URL

Description

Allows you to select the level of data that can be exported for this web part

Allows you to add the title of a URL as extra information about the web part

Help URL

Allows you to enter a description of the web part that is displayed as a Tooltip when you hover your mouse over the web part title or icon.

Allows you to enter the location of a file containing Help information about the web part.

Help Mode

Description

Select this check box if you want the web part minimized

Select this check box if you want the web part removed from the page

Select this check box if you want the web part hidden

Catalog Icon Image URL

Title Icon Image URL

Import Error Message

Allows you to specify how a browser displays Help content for the web part, either in a separate window which you must close before returning to the

Web Page (Mode), in a separate window that you do not need to close before returning to the Web Page (Modeless), or in the current browser window

(Navigate)

Allows you to specify the location of a file containing an image to be used as the web part icon in the Web Part List. The image size must be 16 by 16 pixels.

Allows you to specify the location of a file containing an image to be used in the web part title bar. The image size must be 16 by 16 pixels.

Allows you to specify a message that appears if there is a problem importing the web part

Advanced Page

The Advanced page allows you to set advanced features of the web part, such as the following:

•

•

•

•

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

177

Ajax

The AJAX page allows you to configure AJAX in your web part.It contains the following:

Table 33. AJAX

Element Description

Enable AJAX Allows you to enable AJAX for the List Form. AJAX enables the List Form to carry out some operations within the grid without refreshing the whole page. For example, when you sort a column by clicking its column header or change the page by clicking the pager, the List Form only refreshes the data in the grid without causing the whole page to post back. However, there are times when AJAX causes some issues. In this case, you must disable the AJAX capability of the List Form.

The following are some known situations where you need to disable AJAX:

• In Internet Explorer 6, the data grid will fail to carry out the AJAX operation. If your user base reports this issue, you can disable the AJAX to fix it.

• If you use javascript's document.write() method in the Results Body property of the

Custom Display, the text that is generated using document.write() will not be rendered after the AJAX operation. This is true even if you do not call the document.write() directly within the Results Body but rather through another javascript function that calls document.write(). www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

178

Session

The Session page allows you to set or reset the session variable in the web part. It contains the following:

Table 34. Session

Element

Set Session

Name

Reset Session

Name

Description

Defines the name of the session variable where:

• The edited or newly created item is stored when it is saved.

• The item that is being displayed or edited is stored when it is loaded.

Use the list form to display a Task and a listview underneath it to display Task Serial Notes.

The list form will filter the listview so that the listview will only show the serial notes for the displayed task. When you click the New Item button to create a new task serial notes, you want some of the fields in the task serial notes to be auto-filled with the fields from the current task. In that case, you set the session name in the list form so that the current task is stored in the session and you can consume it in the new form for the task serial notes.

Allows you to reset the List Form (set to NULL) the value of the session variable whose name is specified in this attribute. You can specify multiple names by separating them with commas.

Security

The Security page allows you to set which users are allowed to view the web part. It contains the following:

Table 35. Security

Element

Target

Audiences

Description

Allows you to have the Web Part to appear only to people who are members of a particular group or audience.

An audience can be identified by using a SharePoint group, a distribution list, a security group, or a global audience.

Resources

The Resources page allows you to enable Localization

in the web part using resource lists.

Localization

Localization contains the following elements.

NOTE:

While this feature is still available to use, we recommend using ezLocalizer. For more information, see ezLocalizer on page 341 .

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

179

Table 36. Localization

Element

Resource List

Title Resource ID

Save and Close Button

Text Resource ID

Cancel Button Text

Resource ID

Delete Button Text

Resource ID

Edit Button Text

Resource ID

Approve/Reject Item

Button Text Resource ID

Check In Button Text

Resource ID

Check Out Button Text

Resource ID

Manage Permissions

Button Text Resource ID

Manage Copies Button

Text Resource ID

Version History Button

Text Resource ID

Workflows Button Text

Resource ID

Alert Me Button Text

Resource ID

Mark Private Button

Text Resource ID

Mark Public Button Text

Resource ID

Description

• Resource ID — This field contains the identifier to refer to the string. You can have multiple strings with the same Resource ID as long as their Culture value is different.

• Culture — This field contains the culture for the string. For the default culture, leave the Culture field blank.

• Value — This field contains the value for the string.

The Lists element can contain only one List element. The following are the attributes for the List element:

• SiteUrl — The URL to the site that contains the resource list. The URL can be absolute (http://...) or relative to the current page URL. This attribute is mandatory.

• ListName — The name of the resource List. The list name is case sensitive.

Allows you to enter a text resource ID for the Save and Close button.

Allows you to enter a text resource ID for the Cancel button.

Allows you to enter a text resource ID for the Delete button.

Allows you to enter a text resource ID for the Edit button.

Allows you to enter a text resource ID for the Approve/Reject Item button.

Allows you to enter a text resource ID for the Check In button.

Allows you to enter a text resource ID for the Check Out button.

Allows you to enter a text resource ID for the Manage Permissions button.

Allows you to enter a text resource ID for the Manage Copies button.

Allows you to enter a text resource ID for the Version History button.

Allows you to enter a text resource ID for the Workflows button.

Allows you to enter a text resource ID for the Alert Me button.

Allows you to enter a text resource ID for the Mark Private button.

Allows you to enter a text resource ID for the Mark Public button.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

180

Table 36. Localization

Element

Indicates Required Field

Button Text Resource ID

Parent Folder Text

Resource ID

Destination Folder Text

Resource ID

Description

Allows you to enter a text resource ID for the Indicates Required Field button.

Allows you to enter a text resource ID for the Parent folder.

Allows you to enter a text resource ID for the Destination Folder.

qListForm Procedures

You can perform the following procedures using qListForm:

•

Configuring Basic Settings using the Configuration Wizard

•

Adding items to a list in SharePoint using qListForm

•

Creating and Editing Collapsible Sections

Configuring Basic Settings using the Configuration

Wizard

To configure basic settings

1 Add qListForm to your page.

2 Select the ezWizard menu item from the qListForm Web Part Menu or Ribbon.

3 Select a list, from the current site, whose data you want to view, and click Next.

4 Define form configurations (ID Http Parameter Name field is a mandatory field and only becomes available if selected form type is DisplayListItem, EditListItem, DisplayDocument, or EditDocument.), and click Next.

If you want to change your selections, select Previous.

5 Click Finish.

NOTE: Once a Web Part is configured, the ezWizard item will not appear on the Web Part Menu or the Web Part

Ribbon.

Adding items to a list in SharePoint using qListForm

If you want to add items to a SharePoint list using qListForm, you must replace the out-of-box web part with qListForm.

To replace out-of-box SharePoint ListForm with qListForm

1 Create a list in SharePoint, for example Document List.

2 From Modify Form Web Parts, select New Default List.

3 Add qListForm.

4 Open ezEdit.

5 From Primary Content, enter a title, a site URL, and the name of the list you created in SharePoint.

6 From Form Type, select NewListItem. Click OK.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

181

7 Hide the out-of-the-box SharePoint List.

a From the SharePoint list, select Edit Web Part.

b From the Layout section, click Hidden.

NOTE: Do not delete the Microsoft List Form. Doing so may render your list unusable.

Figure 3. Edit Web Part

8 Click Stop Editing from the SharePoint ribbon.

You are returned to the list in SharePoint. When you click Add new item, the QuickApps qListForm opens.

Creating and Editing Collapsible Sections

Collapsible Sections are useful for organizing documents that contain a lot of information since you can use them to collapse one or more paragraphs into a single line. You can expand the paragraphs when necessary by clicking the triangle that appears to the left of a collapsed section. In Lotus Notes, this capability already exists and for users migrating from Notes to SharePoint, this feature allows for seamless migration of this type of text.

There are three editing modes in rich text editor:

• Design

—

allows you to turn a section of text to collapsible or expanded

• HTML

—

allows you to work directly with specified markup to turn text into a collapsible section

• Preview

—

allows you to click to expand or collapse a section of text that is marked up as collapsible text.

NOTE: Collapsible text does not work in Internet Explorer 7.

To create a collapsible section

1 Select the text that you want to collapse.

2 Click Apply Section.

The selected text becomes a collapsible section with a section header with a default title of “New

Section”. This title can be changed.

To remove a collapsible section

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

182

1 Select the section header.

2 Click Remove Section.

Nested sections can be created by allowing a section header and section repeated inside the parent section. The section header can be aligned to the left (default), right, and center.

Child List

This property defines the following:

• The list whose data is viewed in the listform and the manner it is aggregated. There are a few ways that you can aggregate information from multiple lists in the listform. First, you can define the lists to be aggregated one by one. Second, you can define the site URL for the aggregated lists in a Rolled-Up list.

Third, you can aggregate the information from lists with a particular name from all the subsites

(recursive rollup).

The Lists element can contain one or more List elements. The listform will aggregate the information from all of the List elements that you specify. To define the hierarchical listform, each List element can contain one child

List element.

The following are the elements for the Child List attribute.

Table 37. Child List

Element

Advanced Mode

Site URL

List Name

Description

Turn on if you want to edit Viewed Lists in XML format. XML will look like the following:

<Lists>

</Lists>

Allows you to set the URL to the site that contains the list to be searched. The URL can be absolute (http://...) or relative to the current page URL. This attribute is mandatory.

When using a relative URL, you can use a single dot (.) to denote the current path, a double dot (..) to denote the previous path, and a slash (/) to denote the root path.

NOTE: If you want to connect the listform with another Web Part in Microsoft

SharePoint Designer, the SiteUrl property must contain an absolute URL. We recommend that you keep all URLs in the Web Part configuration relative to ensure site portability. If you must, use an absolute URL temporarily, make the connection, and then change the URL to a relative one.

Allows you to enter the name of the SharePoint list that is edited or displayed. The list name is case sensitive. If the list name contains spaces, include the spaces here as well.

To denote the current list, you can use a single dot (.) as the list name.

NOTE: This only works if the qListForm is contained in the AllItems.aspx. For example, if you are replacing the Microsoft List View in the AllItems.aspx of the Tasks list and you use a single dot as the ListName attribute, the ListName attribute of the qListForm is set to Tasks. If you want to save the list as a template and then add it somewhere else, the name of the new list might not be Tasks and using this relative list name will automatically pick up the new list name for the view.

Child List Display Fields

This property defines what fields should be displayed in the List Form and how the fields are populated. When you select the Edit button, a dialog box opens with a list of field names based on the list you have selected.

You can add more details to the field names.

The following are the elements for the Child List Display Fields attribute.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

183

Table 38. Child List Display Fields

Element

Advanced Mode

Description

Turn on if you want to edit Display Fields in XML format. XML will look like the following:

Query All Fields

Title

Width (in pixels)

Align

</Fields>

Controls how Web Parts behave in relation to the List Form Lookup Threshold in

SharePoint Resource Throttling. The options are:

• Default — uses the level set in the Configuration Editor. If you have selected

Query All Fields check box in the Configuration Editor, the Web Part will query only those fields that are not included in the List View Lookup Threshold. If the

Query All Fields check box is cleared, the Web Part will query all fields.

• On — If the Web Part level is On, the Web Part queries all fields in lists, except

Lookup fields.

• Off — If the Web Part level is Off, the Web Part queries all fields in lists, including Lookup fields.

NOTE: Explicit — If the Web Part level is Explicit, the Web Part queries only those fields selected in the Display Fields. This option renders the best performance for your Web

Part.

Allows you to change the displayed for the field. The value can be a plain string or an encoded HTML string. Change the displayed title, for example, when the title is too long or to make the title more descriptive.

Allows you to set the width of the control in pixels.

Some controls, such as the Rich Text Editor, have minimum width and it will not honor the specified width if it is smaller than its minimum width.

Indicates the horizontal alignment for the field. The values is one of the following: left, right, or center. For example:

Relationship Mapping

Allows you to create a relationship between parent and child list. When you select the Edit button, a dialog box opens with a list of parent and child key fields based on the list.

The following are the elements for the Relationship Mapping attribute.

Table 39. Relationship Mapping

Element

Advanced Mode

Description

Turn on if you want to edit Relationship Mapping in XML format. XML will look like the following:

<Mapping ParentListName="ListName" ParentSiteUrl="siteUrl"

ChildListName="ListName" ChildSiteUrl=" siteUrl " ParentFieldName=" parentKeyFieldName" Operator="EqualsTo" ChildFieldName=" childkeyFieldName" />

</Mappings>

Parent Key Field

Name

Allows you to select Parent Key Field Name.

Child Key Field Name Allows you to select Child Key Field Name.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

184

qListView

•

•

•

•

Overview

qListView aggregates data from one or more SharePoint lists and displays the information in a grid.

This Web Part has an intuitive user interface that allows you to:

• Configure the most complex aspects of web parts. This user interface is accessed from the Configure item on the web part menu at the upper right corner of the list display.

• Aggregate data from multiple lists from various SharePoint sites. The lists to be aggregated are defined in the Viewed Lists property. You can define the lists that you want to aggregate individually in the property, define it in a centralized list or ask the listview to aggregate lists with a specific name from all the subsites (recursive rollup).

• Display hierarchical data. For example, you can display the information from the Customer list and Sales list in the same view.

• Display data from lists with multiple content types. The listview displays a New button for each content type in the list so that the user can create items with different content types from the listview.

• Ensure the referential integrity of the records in the dependent lists by preventing the deletion of the parent record.

• Divide the data into multiple pages to limit their size and render pages faster. This feature is called

Paging. There are two Paging Modes available: Numeric Pager and Next Previous. If the number of rows in a table is more than the specified Page Size, the data is divided into multiple pages and a Pager is displayed at the bottom of the listview to enable the user to navigate to different pages.

• Define a static filter using CAML Filter expression or Complex Filter expression. Both types of filter expression supports time functions and time expression (such as [TODAY]) to filter out data based on a moving time window. This feature is called Data Aging.

• Define the dynamic filter or search criteria using the Find panel. The web part author can define the fields that are shown in this panel using the Searched Fields property.

• Filter a lookup/cross-site lookup field with another lookup/cross-site lookup field.

• Replace the value of a certain field in the list. The user can either mass-replace the value of the selected item or define the condition for the items to be replaced.

• Define the initial static sort expression using the Sort Fields property. The listview can sort the data based on multiple fields.

• Export child list to Microsoft Excel in conjunction with qExcelViewer.

• Sort the data in the listview by clicking the grid headers.

• Define multiple levels of grouping on the data using the Grouped attribute in the Display Fields property.

You can also display the sum or item counts in the group header.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

185

• Support the List Searcher mode in listview. If Turn On List Searcher Mode is set to True, the listview does not display data until the user performs a search.

• Turn off the individual buttons in the toolbar.

• User can edit office documents in browser after installing Office Web App and configure with SharePoint.

• Manage the folders from one or more lists/document libraries in the Folder Panel.

• Display the value of a cross-site lookup field. A cross-site lookup field is similar to the SharePoint lookup field, except that it can look up multiple lists in any workspaces that are accessible from the current site by the current user. The cross-site lookup field is identified by the Display Field Name or Display Format attributes in the Display Fields property. You can use qListForm to populate a cross-site lookup field.

• Access the most common functions for data items, such as View Properties, Edit Properties and Send

Email. If enabled, you can access the context menu by right-clicking the entry in the listview.

NOTE: The Send Email item in the context menu enables the user to send an email with a custom message to one or more recipients. The email message may contain the link to the item, the link to the list or library and in case of document library, the document as an attachment. This feature requires you to put the MailSettings configuration in your web.config file. You need to do this because the Send Email does not use the SharePoint email capability due to its limitation of sending a maximum of 1000 characters.

• Change the URL of the new form, edit form, and display form using the Viewed Lists property.

• Show or hide the listview based on the site group membership of the currently logged in user.

• Display the data in virtually any format that can be achieved with JavaScript and HTML. With this feature, you can create many types of custom reports on the data.

• Support dynamic language switching and Flash and JavaScript (HTML5)

• Export data to Microsoft Excel in conjunction with qExcelViewer.

• Provide data from the whole listview to another web part using IWebPartTable interface.

• Consume a filter from another web part that implements IRowProvider or IFilterProvider interface.

NOTE: The IFilterConsumer interface is obsolete. It is provided here only for backward compatibility reason. When you establish the web part connection, this interface is labeled

Consume Filter From (Obsolete) in the web part Connections menu. Use the

IWebPartParameter consumer implementation that is labeled with Get Filter From.

The listview is a consumer for the IWebPartParameter interface. This capability enables the chart view to consume a filter from another web part that implements IWebPartRow or IWebPartParameter interface.

The IWebPartParameter consumer implementation is labeled with Get Filter From in the web part

Connection menu. This interface cannot be connected with the obsolete IFilterProvider or IRowProvider implementation. Do not connect this new interface with the old interface that is marked obsolete

Configuration Wizard

qListView uses a configuration wizard to walk you through basic configuration tasks. For more information on

using the Configuration Wizard, see Configuring Basic Settings using the Configuration Wizard on page 219 .

qListView Pages

You can configure this web part through its pages that are accessible through ezEdit. qListView contains the following pages:

•

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

186

•

Behavior Page

•

•

Content Page

The Content page contains the following:

•

Search/Filter/Replace Panel

•

Filtering

•

•

Sorting/Paging

•

Custom Display

Primary Content

The Primary Content page is default category. You need to configure one or more elements in this page to get started using this web part.

Primary Content contains the following:

Table 1. Primary Content

Element

Title

Viewed Lists

Display Fields

Child View Display

Fields

Expand Child View on

Load

Description

Allows you to enter a title for the Web Part, or accept the default. This field is mandatory.

See

Viewed Lists on page 187

for more information.

See

Display Fields on page 191

for more information.

Defines the fields that should be displayed in the view for the child records. See

Display Fields on page 191

for more information.

Determines if the child view is expanded or collapsed when the listview is loaded for the first time. By default, this property is set to false which means the hierarchical listview does not expand the child view. If set to true, the entire child view expands when the listview is loaded for the first time.

Allows you to display the New Item link in the child view.

Enable New Item Link in Child View

ID HTTP Parameter

Name

Allows the qListForm and several other web parts to an HTTP Parameter called ID to identify the item to be displayed or edited. This HTTP Parameter is usually generated automatically by the viewer web part, such as qListView or qCalendarView, when you select an item to be displayed or edited.

By default, the value of this property is "ID". You can change the value of this property to something else, such as LID. In that case, when you select "View Properties" or "Edit

Properties" in the context menu, the URL of the display or edit form becomes: http://mysite.com/EditFormURL.aspx?LID=xxx

Set the same property in the qListForm to the same value.

Viewed Lists

This property defines the following: www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

187

• The lists whose data is viewed in the listview and the manner it is aggregated. There are a few ways that you can aggregate information from multiple lists in the listview. First, you can define the lists to be aggregated one by one. Second, you can define the site URL for the aggregated lists in a Rolled-Up list.

Third, you can aggregate the information from lists with a particular name from all the subsites

(recursive rollup).

• The parent list and the child list in the hierarchical listview. You can only define one child element per list. The hierarchical listview does not work when you aggregate the information using the Rolled-Up list and recursive rollup.

• The Dependent Lists for each list. If the Dependent Lists information is provided, the listview checks whether there are child records in the Dependent Lists when the user tries to delete items from the listview. If there are any, the listview will not delete the selected items.

The Lists element can contain one or more List elements. The listview will aggregate the information from all of the List elements that you specify. To define the hierarchical listview, each List element can contain one child

List element.

The following are the elements for the Viewed List attribute.

Table 2. Viewed List

Element

Advanced Mode

Site URL

Description

Turn on if you want to edit Viewed Lists in XML format. XML will look like the following:

<Lists>

<List SiteUrl="siteUrl" ListName="listName" IncludeSubsites="true/false"

IncludeThisSite="true/false" IsRollupList="true/false" SiteUrlFieldName="fieldName"

RolledUpListName="listName" TargetUrl="targetUrl" SetSessionName="sessionName"

ResetSessionNames="name1, name2" NewFormUrl="URL" EditFormUrl="URL"

DisplayFormUrl="URL">

<List SiteUrl="siteUrl" ListName="listName"

ParentKeyFieldName="parentKeyFieldName" ChildKeyFieldName="childkeyFieldName"

TargetUrl="targetUrl" SetSessionName="sessionName" ResetSessionNames="name1, name2" NewFormUrl="URL" EditFormUrl="URL"

UseUploadFormInLayoutsFolder="true/false" DisplayFormUrl="URL">

<!-- To define dependent lists, add a DependentLists element inside the List element

-->

</DependentLists>

</List>

</Lists>

Allows you to set the URL to the site that contains the list to be searched. The URL can be absolute (http://...) or relative to the current page URL. This attribute is mandatory.

When using a relative URL, you can use a single dot (.) to denote the current path, a double dot (..) to denote the previous path, and a slash (/) to denote the root path.

NOTE: If you want to connect the listview with another Web Part in Microsoft

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

188

Table 2. Viewed List

Element

List Name

Description

Allows you to enter the name of the SharePoint list that is edited or displayed. The list name is case sensitive. If the list name contains spaces, include the spaces here as well.

To denote the current list, you can use a single dot (.) as the list name.

NOTE: This only works if the qListView is contained in the AllItems.aspx. For example, if you are replacing the Microsoft List View in the AllItems.aspx of the Tasks list and you use a single dot as the ListName attribute, the ListName attribute of the qListView is set to Tasks. If you want to save the list as a template and then add it somewhere else, the name of the new list might not be Tasks and using this relative list name will automatically pick up the new list name for the view.

Include Subsites

Include This Site

If set to true, the listview searches all the subsites for a list whose name specified in the ListName and aggregate the information from those list.

NOTE: If you have many subsites, the information may take a long time to aggregate.

Used in conjunction of the IncludeSubsites attribute. If you set this property to true, the list in the current site will not be aggregated by the listview. The current site is the site whose URL is specified in the SiteUrl attribute.

Is Rollup List Indicates whether or not the list specified by the SiteUrl and ListName attributes contains the Site URLs of the lists to be aggregated instead of the data to be aggregated. If you set this to true, the list specified by the SiteUrl and ListName must have a field that contains the URL information. By default, the name of that field is

Site URL. If you use different field name, specify the name using the SiteUrlFieldName attribute.

Rolled Up List Name Used in conjunction with the IsRollupList property, indicates the name of the lists to be rolled up if you set the IsRollupList to true.

If you want to aggregate more than one list from each site specified in the rollup list, you can define more than one List elements with the same rollup list, but different

RolledUpListName.

Site URL Field Name Used in conjunction with the IsRollupList property, indicates the field that contains the

Site URLs of the lists to be aggregated. This attribute is optional if the field name is

Site URL.

NOTE: The Site URL field must be a single line of text field.

Active Field Name Used in conjunction with the v IsRollupList property. The rollup list may contain a

Yes/No field to indicate whether or not a particular site should be included in the rollup. This property is optional if the name of this field is Active.

NOTE: The Active field must be a Yes/No field.

Reset Session Names Resets (sets to NULL) the value of the session variables whose name is specified in this attribute. You can specify multiple names by separating them with commas; for example TaskSession, IssueSession.

You can reset the session name if a list has one or more tasks associated with it. In addition to storing the selected list in the session, you may store the dependent task information in the session as well. This means that every time you store a new list into a session, you need to reset the dependent task information from the session as well.

Set Session Name Defines the name of the session variable where the listview stores the item whose column is being clicked by the user. The user can click the item if one of the LinkTo,

LinkToTarget or the LinkToSource attributes in the Display Fields property is defined.

This attribute is usually used if you have another Web Part (such as the qListForm) that can consume the stored values from the session.

You can set the session name when you want to consume the item from a session variable in a qListForm later.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

189

Table 2. Viewed List

Element

Target URL

Create Document

Form URL

New Form URL

Edit Form URL

Display Form URL

Description

When the LinkToTarget attribute of a specific column is set to true (in the Display

Fields property), the data in that column becomes a hyperlink to the URL specified in this attribute.

NOTE: If you using Advanced Mode, the TargetUrl can use the <%field name%> field replacement expression. But you must use the encoded form of the < and > characters, which are < and > respectively.

When specified, the New button (and all the buttons for specific content types underneath it) will redirect the user to the URL specified by this attribute. Normally, the page pointed to by CreateDocumentFormUrl will contain a qListForm to create the new document. For more detail about this, see the Create Document section of the qListForm chapter.

CreateDocumentFormUrl will affect all types of list, not just document library.

There is no difference between CreateDocumentFormUrl and NewFormUrl when the list is not a document library. You can specify either to affect the target URL for the

New button. But if both are specified, the CreateDocumentFormUrl will take precedence. When the list is a document library, CreateDocumentFormUrl will affect the New button and the NewFormUrl will affect the Upload button.

Indicates the URL where the form to create a new item resides. The URL is relative to the Site URL of the list. The user is redirected to the specified URL when one of the

New buttons in the toolbar is clicked. If not defined, the user is redirected to the

NewForm.aspx of the list (or Upload.aspx for the document library).

NOTE: The Source HTTP parameter is automatically appended to the New Form URL during redirection.

This attribute is usually used in conjunction with the qListForm Web Part.

EditForm.aspx of the list.

NOTE: The ID and Source HTTP parameters are automatically appended to the Edit

Form URL during redirection.

This attribute is usually used in conjunction with the qListForm Web Part.

The URL where the form to display an item in the list resides. The URL is relative to the

Site URL of the list. The user is redirected to the specified URL when the user clicks

View Properties in the Context Menu. If not defined, the user is redirected to the

DisplayForm.aspx of the list.

NOTE: The ID and Source HTTP parameters are automatically appended to the Display

Form URL during redirection.

This attribute is usually used in conjunction with the qListForm Web Part.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

190

Table 2. Viewed List

Element

Launch Form In

Use Upload Form in

Layouts Folder

Description

Defines how the form pages (NewForm, EditForm, DisplayForm) associated with a

SharePoint list are launched. There are 3 different options: Dialog, New Window, and

Current Window. This property defaults to <Empty> in which case the form dialog obeys the settings under List Settings/Advanced Settings.

NOTE: If you select Dialog, you can configure the dialog width and height.

Allows you to link to the Upload.aspx page in the _Layouts folder instead of the

Upload.aspx page in the Forms folder of the document library.

NOTE: This option was useful with SharePoint 2007. It is still available for legacy purposes, but you no longer need to enable it.

The List element for the child list must contain these additional attributes:

Table 3. List element for child list

Element

Parent Key Field

Name

Description

Allows you to enter a name in the field in the parent list that will act as the filter for the child records. In other words, this is the primary key field in the parent list.

Child Key Field Name Allows you to enter a name in the field in the child list that is filtered by the value from the parent key field. In other words, this is the foreign key field in the child list.

The List element can contain only one DependentLists element. The DependentLists element can contain one or more List element. The List element inside the DependentList can contain the following attribute:

Table 4. List element inside Dependent Lists

Element

Site URL

List Name

Key Field Name

Description

Allows you to enter the URL to the site that contains the dependent list.

Allows you to enter the name of the dependent list. The list name is case sensitive.

This property along with the SiteUrl defines the dependent list.

Allows you to enter the name of the field in the dependent list that contains the ID of the parent item. In another word, the KeyFieldName is the foreign key in the dependent list. The key field is usually a single line of text that contains the parent item ID or a cross-site lookup field to the parent list. The name is case sensitive

Display Fields

This property defines the fields that should be displayed.

This property is optional if the properties in the Custom Display section is specified. In that case, the default display is turned off and the custom display is used. You can also combine the custom display with the Display

Fields. A good example is when you want to display data in a grid and provide a summary of the data or a disclaimer using a custom display.

The Display Field contains the following elements:

NOTE: In addition to the fields in the list, the listview recognizes several special fields. You can display the following fields, group the fields or use it as a field replacement expression in the CalculatedValue attribute.

• Item Location — The format of the Item Location value is ListName in SiteUrl. This field is useful when you aggregate multiple values into the listview to tell you where a particular item comes from.

• Workspace URL — This field contains the URL of the site that contains the containing list.

• List Name — This field contains the name of the containing list.

• Folder — The server relative URL of the folder that contains this item.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

191

• File Path — The complete URL for a file in the document library. This variable is only available for document library.

Table 5. Display Field

Element

Advanced Mode

Description

Turn on if you want to edit Display Fields or Child View Display Fields in XML format. In

XML, Displayed Fields look like:

<Field Name="fieldName" Grouped="true" SortDirection="asc|desc"

GroupExpanded="true|false">

</Field>

</Fields>

Query All Fields

Add Field

Field Name

Controls how Web Parts behave in relation to the List View Lookup Threshold in

SharePoint Resource Throttling. The options are:

• Default — uses the level set in the Configuration Editor. If you have selected Query

All Fields check box in the Configuration Editor, the Web Part will query only those fields that are not included in the List View Lookup Threshold. If the Query All

Fields check box is cleared, the Web Part will query all fields.

• On — If the Web Part level is On, the Web Part queries all fields in lists, except

Lookup fields.

• Off — If the Web Part level is Off, the Web Part queries all fields in lists, including

Lookup fields.

• Explicit — If the Web Part level is Explicit, the Web Part queries only those fields selected in the Display Fields. This option renders the best performance for your

Web Part.

Allows you to add custom fields to be displayed in the web part.

NOTE: If you are using a CalculatedValue or FixedValue attribute, you must first add and configure at least one custom field.

Indicates the name of the field selected. If you select Custom, you can change the field name.

NOTE: If you configure Calculated Value, Fixed Value, Display Field Name, and Display

Format, ensure the custom field name does not contain spaces. If the name contains spaces, an error message is returned.

Title Resource ID Indicates the identifier in the Resource List that is used as the title of the field. The

TitleResourceID and the current cultural setting (identified with the Culture HTTP parameter) is used to retrieve the string in the Resource List. If the string with the given identifier is not found, the default Title is used.

Width Indicates the width of the field. You can specify the value in pixels (Width="20px") or percentage (Width="20%").

We recommend leaving at least one field where you do not specify this property. That field will take up the remaining width of the page. For example:

<Field Name="Subject" Width="100px" /> www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

192

Table 5. Display Field

Element

Align

Item Style

Item CSS Class

Fixed Value

Description

Indicates the horizontal alignment for the field. The values is one of the following: left, right, or center. For example:

Indicates the style for the item in the row. You can define the style as you would in a CSS class; for example, color: red; font-weight: bold

Indicates the distinct style for the column and you already have defined the style in an external CSS file.

Fixed Value appears if you have selected Custom as a Display Field. This allows you to display text as a value for this field. This is useful when you want static text such as Edit displayed in a field. You can then make this text a hyperlink using either the Link To, Link

To Target or Link To Source attributes.

NOTE: If you are using Advanced Mode, you can configured Fixed Value as in the following example:

<Field Name="EditColumn" FixedValue="Edit"

LinkTo="Lists/ListName/EditForm.aspx?ID=<%ID%>" />

To display an icon instead of a text, you can do the following (it assumes that you have pencil.gif in the images folder in your site:

<Field Name="EditColumn" FixedValue="<img src="images/edit.gif" border=0>" LinkTo="Lists/ListName/EditForm.aspx?ID=<%ID%>" /> www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

193

Table 5. Display Field

Element

Calculated Value

Description

Calculated Value appears if you have selected Custom as a Display Field.

NOTE: If you are using Advanced Mode, this attribute recognizes the field replacement expression <%Field%> to refer to a field. The listview will replace the field replacement expression with the value of the field for each row of data. You must use the encoded form of the < and > characters, which are < and >, respectively, unless you type in the value in the Display Fields editor in the List View Editor, where the Editor will encode the characters automatically for you.

You can use this attribute to:

• Display the values from multiple fields in one grid column. For example, to display a full name, you can concatenate the first name and last name as follows:

<Field Name="CalculatedFullName" Title="Full Name" CalculatedValue="<%First

Name%> <%Last Name%>" />

• Reformat the values of another field, using the

Display Format on page 11 . You can

specify the Display Format in the Field replacement expression as follow:

<%{DisplayFormat}FieldName%>

For example, if you have a Date Time Field called "Start Date" and you want to display it in a short date format, you can use the following field replacement expression: <%{0:d}Start Date%>. To see the available display format, see

Display

Format on page 11

• Format the display of a certain column in the grid. For example, you can display the Status of your project with different colors depending on its value. In order to do this, you can write a JavaScript function and then call that JavaScript function using this attribute.

<Field Name="CalculatedProjectStatus" Title="Status"

CalculatedValue="<script>FormatProjectStatus('<%Status%>');</scri pt>" />

The above example assumes you have a JavaScript method called

DisplayProjectStatus defined on your page or in a JavaScript file that is included in your page. That JavaScript method looks like:

{

var displayedStatus = status;

if (status = 'Behind')

{

displayedStatus = '<font color="red">' + status + '</font>';

}

return displayedStatus;

}

</script>

You can format the value of the field in virtually any way you want..

NOTE: You can only call one JavaScript function in the CalculatedValue attribute and the

JavaScript function must return a string.

Display Field Name If specified, indicates a cross-site lookup field. It contains the name of the field in the cross-site list that contains the value to be displayed. The field name is case sensitive.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

194

Table 5. Display Field

Element

Display Format

Show User Groups Allows you to show groups where the user is a member of one of the SharePoint groups listed. Separate site group names with commas.

Hide User Groups Allows you to hide groups where the user is a member of one of the SharePoint groups listed. Separate site group names with commas.

Hyperlink Field

Target

Link To

Link To Target

If this field is a SharePoint Hyperlink or Picture field, indicates the target window for the hyperlink. For example, use "_blank" if you want to open the target URL in a new window.

If this attribute is left blank, the target URL will open in the current window.

This attribute will not affect the hyperlink column created with the LinkTo, LinkToSource or LinkToTargetURL attributes.

Indicates that the list view turns the field into a hyperlinked column to the specified URL.

The URL can be an absolute or relative URL.

NOTE: If you are using Advanced Mode, the LinkTo can use the <%field name%> field replacement expression. You must use the encoded form of the < and > characters, which are < and >, respectively unless you type in the value in the Display Fields editor in the List View Editor, where the Editor will encode the characters automatically for you. If you use a relative URL, the URL is appended to the site URL of the target site. For example, specify "Lists/TeamDiscussion/EditForm.aspx?ID=<%ID%>" as the value of this property. If you click a customer record that comes from the Customers list in

Allows the list view to make the field value a hyperlink to the URL specified in the Target

Url attribute in the Viewed Lists property.

The LinkToTarget URL is used when you aggregate lists with different names. You can specify a different TargetUrl for each list in the Viewed Lists property and the list view will redirect the user to the correct URL depending on the list from where the clicked item comes.

Link To Source

Open Link In

HTML Encode

Description

If specified, indicates a cross-site lookup field. It contains the format of the value that is displayed. Define this attribute if you want to display values from multiple fields.

NOTE: If you are using Advanced Mode, you can use the field replacement expression

<%Field%> to refer to a field. You must use the encoded form of the < and > characters, which are < and >, respectively unless you type in the value in the Display Fields editor in the List View Editor, where the Editor will encode the characters automatically for you.

NOTE:

For more information, see Display Format on page 11 .

The list view will make the field value a hyperlink to the URL specified in the Source

HTTP parameter of the current request. For this option to work, the current page URL must look like: http://.....?Source=....

Use this element when the URL for the hyperlink is dynamic. This could be because it contains dynamic parameters or the URL is different depending on the referral page.

Also, when you want to make the URL in the link dynamic. In that case, you can pass in the URL for the link into the HTTP parameter of your page.

Allows you to define how the Link To Field opens. There are 3 different options: Dialog,

NewWindow, and CurrentWindow.

NOTE: If you select Dialog, you can configure the dialog width and height.

If selected, the value in the field is encoded first prior to being displayed. You need to set this to true if this field contains values that are surrounded by < and >, such as <abc>.

Without the encoding, the value will not be displayed properly.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

195

Table 5. Display Field

Element

Do Not Render as

Hyperlink

Grouped

Description

If selected, the value of fields is rendered as plain text instead of hyperlink.

Allows you to group data by:

• Group Expanded — If set to true, the group is initially expanded. Otherwise, it is collapsed. If not specified, the default value is false.

NOTE: Grouping is not supported on any field that has "Allow Multiple Values" enabled.

The Field element can contain one or more Aggregate elements if its Grouped attribute is set to true. The following are the attributes of the Aggregate element:

Table 6. Aggregate element attributes

Element Description

Text Allows you to enter the text that will precede the aggregated value when displayed.

Aggregate Function Allows you to select a function.

Field Name Allows you to enter a field name where the aggregation is performed.

Filtering

The Filtering page allows you to use CAML filters to dynamically filter records or use Complex Filters to define static filter for the data.

The Filtering page contains the following:

Table 7. Filtering

Element

CAML Filter

CAML Filter for

Folders

Apply CAML Filter on

First Level Folder

Only

Complex Filter

Description

For more information, see CAML Filters on page 15 .

Allows you to filter the folders that are displayed in the folder panel. This is useful if you maintain the metadata on your folders and want to display folders with specific properties.

For more information, see CAML Filters on page 15 .

Allows you to apply the CAML Filter for folders only on the first level folder. By default, the value is false. If set to true, the listview applies the CAML Filter for folders on the first level folder (that is, folders located directly under the root folder) but will not apply the CAML Filter on the subsequent level.

Allows you to use the Complex Filter expression to define a static filter for the data.

The complex filter is applied to the data after the CAML Filter is applied.

NOTE: The Complex Filter is provided here only for backward compatibility reason. In the past, Complex filter was used to support date functions.

For more information, see Complex Filters on page 17 .

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

196

Search/Filter/Replace Panel

The Search/Filter/Replace Panel allows you to define the panels for search, filter, and replace in the web part.

You will be able to perform a search by pressing Enter.

NOTE: Pressing Enter will not allow you to perform a search on such fields as external data, people picker, managed metadata, and a drop-down list. Instead, the default behavior will occur.

The Search/Filter/Replace Panel contains the following elements:

Table 8. Search/Filter/Replace Panel

Element

Searched Fields

Fields Excluded from

Replace Panel

Description

See

Searched Fields on page 198 .

Defines which fields from the list must be excluded from the Field Name drop-down menu in the Replace panel.

The Fields element can contain one or more Field elements. The Field element can contain one attribute, which is the Name attribute. The Name attribute is the display name of the field to be excluded from the Replace panel.

NOTE: Turn Advanced Mode on if you want to edit this field in XM L format. This property is an XML in this format:

</Fields>

Show Include Sub

Folders Check Box In

Search Panel

Show Search All Fields

Control in Search

Panel

Determines whether the Include Sub Folders check box is displayed in the Filter panel. When you select this property and the Show Folders Button property in the

Toolbar Appearance page, the Include Sub Folders check box will appear as the first row in the search/Filter panel.

NOTE: Select this element when the folder panel is enabled and the view and the search are limited only on the currently selected folder. The Include Sub Folders check box is useful if you want to include the subfolders of the current folder in the search.

Determines whether the Filter panel should display the control to search all fields in the list. When set to true, the following control is shown in the Filter panel:

The Search All Fields Control allows you to do the following:

• Combine the search all fields functionality with other search criteria that has been entered for specific fields.

• When the search all fields criteria is entered, the Filter panel will construct a filter expression with the "Contain" operator for the following fields in the list:

Single line of text, Multiple lines of text, Choice, Lookup (only Lookup to a

Single Text field and Lookup to a Number field are supported), Person or Group and Hyperlink or Picture. If the list contains a Lookup to Number field, Search

All Fields will not work for negative numbers for that field. The Filter panel will use the entire keywords as the value to be searched. Therefore, if you enter "High Priority" in the search all fields control and perform the search, it will find the following sentence:

‘This is a high priority task’

However, it will not find the following sentence:

‘The priority is not always high’

Expand Filter panel on Load

Allows you to automatically open the Filter panel by default so that the user can perform a search quickly. When set to true, the Filter panel opens when the web part is loaded for the first time.

Panel Button Location Determines the location of the Go, Reset and Close buttons in the Filter panel. This property also determines the location of the Go and Close buttons in the Replace panel. www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

197

Table 8. Search/Filter/Replace Panel

Turn On List Searcher

Mode

Allows the user to perform a search before the listview display any data.

Show Filter On Fields Allows you to display a filter control on the listview column headers. When this element is set to true, the filter control appears next to each column header.

However, you can only use this element when the Turn On list Searcher Mode element is set to False.

NOTE: This filter does not support SharePoint List fields such as Lookup, Choice

(check box type), Person or Group, Multiple lines of text, Managed metadata (with multiple values), Hyperlink or Picture, Calculated (calculation based on other columns), and External data. The filter also does not support fields provided by the web part such as Edit, Type, Item Location, and Add Field (Custom field that supports fixed and calculated values). However, the filter control supports, SharePoint List fields such as Single line of text, Choice (radio buttons and drop-down list), Number

(1, 10, 100), Currency ($, ¥, €), Date and Time, Yes/No (check box), Managed metadata (which accepts single value), and Task Outcome. The filter also supports the following fields provided by the web part such as List Name, Workspace URL,

Folder, and Site Name. Also, the maximum number of options available in the filter checklist will only be the first 500 items that are displayed in the List View. You can filter items beyond this 500 items limit directly using the search options provided in the filter control.

Searched Fields

This property defines which fields are displayed in the Filter panel. If defined, the listview displays Filter or

Search menu items under the Actions button in the toolbar.

NOTE: If the item count in the list exceeds the List View Threshold in SharePoint (see, http://office.microsoft.com/en-us/sharepoint-foundation-help/manage-lists-and-libraries-with-manyitems-HA010377496.aspx) , the search will fail. Set the filter settings to lessen the item count, and set the search fields in the index. If the returned items, based on the search, return too many results, the search will still fail.

ID field.

To disable the search feature in the listview, leave this property blank.

The Searched Fields element can contain multiple Field elements:

Table 9. Searched Fields

Element

Advanced Mode

Field Name

Description

Turn on if you want to edit Searched Lists in XML format. This property is an XML string in the following format:

<Field Name="fieldName" DisplayFieldName="fieldName" SortField="fieldName"

[optional attributes]>

</Field>

<Field Name="fieldName" DisplayFormat="fieldName" SortField="fieldName"

[optional attributes]>

</Field>

</Fields>

Indicates the element you are editing.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

198

Table 9. Searched Fields

Element

Title

Description

Default Value

Description

Displays title for the field. The value can be a plain string or an encoded HTML string.

Describes the field. This is useful if you want to give a short instruction or explanation about the field.

Defines the default value for the field.

You can define a text, a number or a date. A date value must be specified in ISO

8601 format: YYYY-MM-DDThh:mm:ssZ, for example: midnight of February 14, 2002 is 2002-02-14T00:00:00Z.

Defines the default operator for the field.

Default Operator

Fixed Operator

Use People Editor

Column Count

Enable Multi Choice

Sort Field

Defines the operator for the field. If specified, the drop-down menu to select the operator for this field is turned off.

Enables you to enter any user information that is in your directory service.

If you set this to True and the field to be searched is a People and Group field, the

Filter panel will show the People Editor control for entering the search criteria.

Allows you to select multiple options for the choice-and-lookup field. Therefore, the user can specify a condition like "A or B". This attribute is ignored by other field types.

To search a cross-site lookup field, you must specify one or more List elements inside the Field element. The cross-site lookup field is displayed as two drop downs.

Defines the field that is used to sort the value in the drop-down menu. The field name is case sensitive.

Sort Order

AutoPostBack

Allows you to sort the values in ascending or descending order.

Use the Filter panel to refresh when the user changes the selection in a lookup field or cross-site lookup field.

You need to set AutoPostBack to true if this field is a lookup or a cross-site lookup field and it is being used to filter another lookup or cross-site lookup field in the

Filter panel.

Parent Field Defines another lookup or cross-site lookup field that is used to filter this field. The parent field must be listed before this field in the XML property.

Parent Filter Field Name Defines the field in the parent field that is used to filter this field. It is the primary key in the list that is used in the lookup or cross-site lookup field.

Filter Field Name Defines the field in the list that is used by this lookup or cross-site lookup field that is filtered by the parent filter field.

Display Field Name Shows the name of the field whose value is displayed in the drop-down menu. The field name is case sensitive. Use this attribute instead of the Display Format attribute if you only want to display a single field in the drop-down menu.

Display Format

Site URL

Indicates the format of the value that is displayed in the drop-down menu. Define this attribute instead of the Display Field Name attribute if you want to display multiple fields in the drop-down menu. You can use the field replacement expression <%Field%> to refer to a field.

NOTE: If you are using Advanced Mode, you must use the encoded form of the < and

> characters, which are < and >, respectively unless you type in the value in the Searched Fields editor in the List View Editor, where the Editor will encode the characters automatically for you.

Indicates the Site URL of the field. You can use an absolute or relative URL.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

199

Table 9. Searched Fields

Element

List Name

Site Name

Description

Indicates the name of the List. The field name is case sensitive.

Indicates the name of the site specified in the Site URL. This is used in case you have multiple lists. In this case, the first drop-down menu to select the list will display as "List Name in Site Name". You can use any name for the Site Name. It does not have to match the real title of the Site.

Sorting/Paging

The Sorting/Paging page allows you to define the sorting criteria and paging type and size in the web part.

The Sorting/Paging page contains the following elements:

Table 10. Sorting/Paging

Element Description

Sort Fields

Child View Sort Fields Defines the initial sorting criterion for the data in the view for the child records. This property has the same syntax as that of the Sort Fields property.

Disable Multi Column

Sorting

Allows you to sort the listview one column at a time. This means that if the user clicks a column header to sort the data by that column, any previous sort with another column is cancelled.

The default value of this property is false, which means the user can sort using multiple columns.

Paging Mode

Allows you to define the initial sorting criterion for the data. This is the syntax for this property:

FieldName1 [SortDirection], FieldName1 [SortDirection]

SortDirection is either ASC (ascending order) or DESC (descending order). The

FieldName and the SortDirection are case sensitive. If the SortDirection is not specified, ascending order is assumed. For example:

First Name ASC, Last Name DESC, Company

NOTE: You cannot define criteria to sort custom fields. To sort custom fields, click the column in qListView. You can sort custom fields under the following circumstances only:

• the custom field search data total count is less than MaxQueryRowCount's value

(by default, this value is 2000)

• the custom field is only a calculated value

• the custom field’s calculated value is not written in JavaScript code

Page Size

Allows you to select the type of pager that is displayed at the bottom of the listview if the items must be divided into multiple pages.

Allows you to set the maximum number of rows that is displayed in one page. If the number of rows is larger than the Page Size, the data is divided into several pages. You can navigate the pages using the Pager displayed at the bottom of the listview.

Custom Display

The custom display properties lets the page designer customize the display of the data using HTML and

JavaScript. The custom display appears after the default display (if the Display Fields property is defined).

Three properties define the custom display. The example in each property illustrates how to display the

FullName field of the search results in an HTML table.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

200

Table 11. Custom Display

Element

Results Header

Results Body

Results Footer

Description

Allows you to set the value of this property that is rendered once before the Results

Body. This property is a good place to include any JavaScript file, defining any

JavaScript function, or define any HTML elements for the header.

Example: These are the customers that match your search criteria.<br><table><tr><th>Full Name</th></tr>

Allows you to set the value of this property that is repeated once for every row in the search results. You can use the <%field name%> field replacement expression to refer to the value of a certain field.

Example: <tr><td><%FullName%></td>

Allows you to set the value of this property that is rendered once after the Results

Body.

Example: </table>

Behavior Page

The Behavior page allows you to configure behaviors, such as adding buttons or menus, so the user can perform operations when using the web part.

The Behavior page contains the following:

•

Actions

•

Views

•

Email Notification

Actions

This property enables you to define additional buttons in the toolbar or context menu item in the context menu.

You can program that button or context menu item to do a series of actions. The listview supports some built-in actions. However, you can write your own custom action using one of the .NET languages, compile it, and call it by the listview. See

Custom Action Help on page 330

to see how to write your own custom actions.

NOTE: The toolbar button affects all the items that are selected in the listview. The context menu item affects only the item that is being right-clicked regardless of how many items are selected in your listview.

Here are some ways that you can use this functionality:

• Add a custom toolbar button called "Assign All to Me" that will assign all of the selected tasks in the listview to me.

• Add a custom toolbar called "Approve" that will change the status of all of the selected expense items to

Approved.

• Create a custom context menu item called "Publish" that will move the right-clicked document into another document library.

• Create a custom context menu item or toolbar item to start a workflow.

• With the ability to write your own custom action, you can virtually do anything to the data when you click the custom button that you define.

The Actions page contain the following elements: www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

201

Table 12. Actions

Element

Custom Actions

Description

For more information, see Custom Actions on page 202 .

Custom Actions

NOTE: The custom action in the listview does not support the Save action.

The Action element define a certain operation that is carried out by the action item when it is clicked.When you add an action item, you can configure the following: www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

202

Table 13. Custom Actions

Element

Advanced Mode

IsSeparator

Text

Description

Turn on if you want to edit Custom Actions in XML format. Here are the schema of this property:

<ActionItem ID="UniqueID" Text="text" TextResourceID="textResourceID"

Position="0" PromptText="promptText" PrompTextResourceID=”prompTextResourceID”

ImageUrl=”URL” AccessKey=”AccessKeyCharacter”>

<Action Type="Move" TargetFolder="targetFolder"

TargetSiteURL="targetSiteUrl" TargetListName="targetListName" />

<Action Type="Copy" TargetFolder="targetFolder" TargetSiteURL="targetSiteUrl"

TargetListName="targetListName" />

<Parameter Name="parameterName" Source="Session"

SourceName="fieldName" SessionName=”sessionName” />

<Parameter Name="parameterName" Source="RowFromAnotherWebPart"

SourceName="fieldName" />

<Parameter Name="parameterName" Source="HttpRequest"

SourceName="httpParameterName" />

<Parameter Name="parameterName" Source="ListItem"

SourceName="httpParameterName" />

</Action>

</ActionItem>

</Toolbar>

<ActionItem ID="UniqueID" Text="text" TextResourceID="textResourceID"

Position="0" PromptText="promptText" PrompTextResourceID=”prompTextResourceID”

ImageUrl=”URL” AccessKey=”AccessKeyCharacter”>

<Action Type="Move" TargetFolder="targetFolder"

TargetSiteURL="targetSiteUrl" TargetListName="targetListName" />

<Action Type="Copy" TargetFolder="targetFolder" TargetSiteURL="targetSiteUrl"

TargetListName="targetListName" />

<Parameter Name="parameterName" Source="Session"

SourceName="fieldName" SessionName=”sessionName” />

<Parameter Name="parameterName" Source="RowFromAnotherWebPart"

SourceName="fieldName" />

<Parameter Name="parameterName" Source="HttpRequest"

SourceName="httpParameterName" />

<Parameter Name="parameterName" Source="ListItem"

SourceName="httpParameterName" />

</Action>

</ActionItem>

</ContextMenu>

</CustomActions>

Allows you to set the item as a separator.

Allows you to enter a unique ID that will identify the item. Use a descriptive identifier to configure the action item with the editor.

Allows you to enter how the action item is displayed in the toolbar.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

203

Table 13. Custom Actions

Element

Text Resource ID

Hide User Groups

Description

Allows you to define this property if you support a a multi-lingual site. This attribute defines the identifier of the string in the Resource List that is used as the title of the

Web Part. The Text Resource ID and the current cultural setting (identified with the

Culture HTTP parameter) are used to retrieve the string in the Resource List. If the string with the given identifier and culture is not found, the value in the Text attribute is used.

Prompt Text Allows you to prompt the user to click the toolbar button or the context menu item.

Prompt Text Resource ID Allows you to define this property if you support a multi-lingual site. The property defines the identifier of the string in the Resource List that is used as the title of the

Web Part. The Resource ID and the current cultural setting (identified with the

Culture HTTP parameter) are used to retrieve the string in the Resource List. If the string with the given identifier and culture is not found, the default is used.

Access Key (Toolbar

Only)

Allows you to define one character from the Text attribute that becomes the access key to this toolbar button or context menu item. For example, if you define a letter

Position

Show User Groups

Allows you to set the position of the button in the toolbar. The index starts with 0.

Allows you to list SharePoint groups whose members can view the Web Part. Separate groups with commas.

Allows you to list SharePoint groups whose members cannot view the Web Part.

Separate site group names with commas (for example, Administrators, Readers).

If a user is a member of a group that is defined in both Show User Groups and Hide

User Groups, the user cannot www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

204

When you add an action, you can configure the following:

Table 14. Action

Element Description

Name An optional element which allows you to identify a given action in order to access it from another action. You can refer to this action from the GoToURL action and from I CustomActionEx

Interface.

Type Allows you to determine the type of the action. Here are the options:

• Delete — deletes the item.

• Move — allows you to move the item to a target. You must specify a Target Site URL, Target

List Name, and Target Folder. This action only works for document in a document library.

• Copy — allows you to copy the item to a target. You must specify a Target Site URL, Target

List Name, and Target Folder.

• GoToURL — redirects the user to a specific URL. You must specify the URL and where you want the URL to open. If you select to open the URL in a dialog, you can configure the dialog width and height. You must specify the following parameters:

• Input - the current user information as the value of the parameter

• Session - the name of the session variable where the value comes from when the source is set to Session

• HttpRequest - the value of the parameter that is retrieved from the HTTP parameters in the page URL. The name of the HTTP parameter is defined in the

Hardware, is used as the value of the parameter.

• ListItem - the value of the parameter is a list item or row

Custom that points to custom action implementation of ICustomActionEx Interface.

You do that by defining the SourceName attribute of the action. This is the syntax of the SourceName attribute when you use ResultFormAction source:

<ActionName>.<ResultType>[.Name], where ActionName refers to the Name attribute of the action that produces the output, ResultType can be OutParameter

(if the action result is returned through one of the out or inout parameter) or

OutParameter, this name specifies the name of the out or input key value pair.

• ResultFromAction - the parameter for the GoToURL action can be retrieved from the output of another action that comes first in the sequence of actions defined in the ActionItem. You must define a source name (where in the source you want to get your information from), name (the name of the parameter that is appended to the URL you specified), and Session (the name of the session variable where the value comes from when the source is set to Session)

• GoToSource — redirects the user to the URL specified in the Source HTTP parameter. The

URL to the page must look like: http://...?Source=URL for this option to work.

• StartWorkflow — starts the specified workflow in the Workflow Name drop-down field. You must select a Workflow name.

• ReturnToMasterChart — returns the user to the master chart page. You use this action type if this web part is located in the drill down page.

• Custom — implements your own custom action and call it with this action type. Enter a

Class name that implements the ICustomActionEx or ICustomAction interface, or select a class from the drop-down list, if available.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

205

Views

The Views page allows you to set views so the user to view the data in Excel or a chart.

The Views page contains the following elements:

Table 15. Views

Element

Search Session Name

Excel Viewer URL

Chart Viewer URL

Description

The listview will store the search criteria, last selected folder, sort criteria, and other listview dynamic settings in the session variable with this name.

The listview also use the Search Session Name to communicate those settings to qExcelViewer and qChartView located in the page whose URL specified in the Excel

Viewer URL or Chart Viewer URL property, respectively. Therefore, the Search

Session Name in those web parts must be set to the same value as the session name in this listview.

Allows you to set the URL of the page that contains qExcelViewer. If this property is specified, the Export to Excel button is displayed in the toolbar. The target page specified by the URL must contain qExcelViewer. The Search Session Name property of qExcelViewer must be set to the same value as the Search Session Name property of this qListView.

Allows you to set the URL of the page that contains qChartView. If this property is specified, the View in Chart button is displayed in the toolbar. The target page specified by the URL must contain qChartView. The Search Session Name property of qChartView must be set to the same value as the Search Session Name property of this qListView.

Email Notification

The Email Notification page allows you to configure the web part to be sent as an email.

The Email Notification page contains the following:

Table 16. Email Notification

Element

Subject

Message

Allow Custom Message

Include Link to List or

Library

Send Email Context Menu

Text

Include Document as

Attachment

Description

Allows you to specify the default subject that is displayed by the list item email.

Allows you to specify the default message that is displayed by the list item email.

Allows you to set the list item to allow the user to modify the message.

Allows you to allows the hyperlinks to the AllItems.aspx of the list or document library.

Allows you to display the text for the "Send Email" item of the right-click context menu. The default value for this text is "Send Email". An example of another value that is commonly used is "Forward".

Allows you to allow the email to contain the selected document as attachments.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

206

Appearance Page

The Appearance page allows you to set the overall look and feel of the web part. This page contains the following:

•

•

•

•

•

•

Email Notification Editor

•

•

The Resources page allows you to enable Localization

Ribbon

The Ribbon page allows you to set the display name of the Ribbon.

Table 17. Ribbon

Element

SharePoint Ribbon Tab Name

Description

Allows you to edit the display name of the Ribbon tab.

Grid

The Grid page allows you set the appearance of the grid in the web part.

The Grid contains the following:

Table 18. Grid

Element

Selection Column Type

Hide Expand\Collapse Image

When No Child Item

Description

Allows you to set a column type:

• None: Use None if you want to click the row to select it or press Ctrl or

Shift and click the row to select multiple rows.

• MultiRowSelector: Use this option if want the listview to display a check box as the first column. To select a row, select the check box for that row. To select multiple rows, select the check box for each row to be selected.

• SingleRowSelector: Use this option if want the listview to display a check box as the first column. To select a row, select the check box for that row.

Allows you to hide the +/- sign next to a list item if the item contains 0 child items.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

207

Table 18. Grid

Element

Skin Name

Header Style

Header CSS Class

Pager Style

Pager CSS Class

Item Style

Item CSS Class

Alternating Item Style

Alternating Item CSS Class

Selected Item Style

Selected Item CSS Class

Main View Appearance Field

Name

Description

Allows you to select the skin name for the grid in the listview. If you have a custom skin, you can add it to the following folder for SharePoint

2010:C:\Program Files\Common Files\Microsoft Shared\Web Server

Extensions\14\TEMPLATE\LAYOUTS\QuestSoftware\Telerik\Q32013SP1\Skins, for

SharePoint 2013: C:\Program Files\Common Files\Microsoft Shared\Web Server

Extensions\15\TEMPLATE\LAYOUTS\QuestSoftware\Telerik\Q32013SP1\Skins.

or for SharePoint 2016: C:\Program Files\Common Files\Microsoft Shared\Web

Server

Extensions\16\TEMPLATE\LAYOUTS\QuestSoftware\Telerik\Q32013SP1\Skins.

When creating a custom skin, you can refer to the Sample Skin folder in the install directory.

Allows you to enter the style for the header. You can define the style as you would in a CSS class.

Example: font-family: verdana; color: black; background-color: #FFCC99; height: 20px;

Allows you to enter the CSS class name for the grid's header. If this property is specified, it will override the style defined in the Header Style property. You must define the class specified here in an external CSS file.

Allows you to enter the style for the pager. You can define the style as you would in a CSS class; for example, font-family: verdana; color: black; background-color: #FFCC99; height: 20px;

Allows you to enter the CSS class name for the pager. If this property is specified, it will override the style defined in the Pager Style property. You must define the class specified here in an external CSS file.

Allows you to enter the style for the item. You can define the style as you would in a CSS class; for example, color: red; font-weight: bold

Allows you to enter the CSS class name for the item in the odd-numbered row

(1, 3, 5, and so on.). If this property is specified, it will override the style defined in the Item Style property. You must define the class specified here in an external CSS file.

Allows you to enter the style for the item in the even-numbered row (2, 4, 6, and so on). You can define the style as you would in a CSS class; for example, font-family: verdana; color: yellow; font-weight: bold;

Allows you to enter the CSS class name for the item in the even number row (2,

4, 6, and so on). If this property is specified, it will override the style defined in the Alternating Item Style property. You must define the class specified here in an external CSS file.

Allows you to enter the style for the selected item in the grid. You can define the style as you would in a CSS class; for example, backgroundcolor: orange

!important; color: blue !important;

You can add "!important" after the color name so that this color will override the selected item style provided by the skin.

Allows you to enter the CSS class name for the selected item in grid. If this property is specified, it overrides the style defined in the Selected Item Style property. You must define the class specified here in an external CSS file.

Allows you to define the name of the field whose values determine the color of the row in the main view. The value of this field is compared against the

FieldValue and FieldValueRange in the Color Appearance property.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

208

Table 18. Grid

Element

Child View Appearance Field

Name

Color Appearance

Description

Allows you to define the name of the field whose values determine the color of the row in the child view. The value of this field is compared against the

FieldValue and FieldValueRange in the Color Appearance property.

Allows you to define the color of the rows in the main view, child view, and group header.

Turn Advanced Mode on if you want to edit Color Appearance in XML format:

<RowAppearance FieldValue="value1"

BackgroundColor="color1" FontColor="color2" />

<RowAppearance FieldValueRange="number - number"

BackgroundColor="color3" FontColor="color4" />

</MainViewAppearance>

<RowAppearance FieldValue="value1"

BackgroundColor="color1" FontColor="color2" />

<RowAppearance FieldValueRange="number - number"

BackgroundColor="color3" FontColor="color4" />

</ChildViewAppearance>

<RowAppearance FieldValue="value1"

BackgroundColor="color1" FontColor="color2" />

<RowAppearance FieldValueRange="number - number"

BackgroundColor="color3" FontColor="color4" />

</GroupHeaderAppearance>

</Appearance>

You must specify those elements in that sequence. For example, if you specify

ChildViewAppearance before the MainViewAppearance you will get an error that the XML is not valid.

To add color for the group header, you must enable grouping for displayed fields before specifying field value, background color and font color.

Select the Edit button, then click Add Row Appearance to enter values in the following:

• Field Value — value for the field

• Field Value Range — a range of values for the field, including negative values

• Background Color — the background color of the row for the specified value in the Field Value attribute. The color can be specified as a wellknown color such as white, black, cyan, lightGray, as a RGB value such as

255, 255,255, or you can specify it as #FFFFFF, #CCDDEE.

• Font Color — the font color of the row for the specified value in the Field

Value attribute. The color can be specified as a well-known color such as white, black, cyan, light gray, as a RGB value such as 255, 255,255, or you can specify it as #FFFFFF, #CCDDEE. The Font Color attribute is ignored if you specify a URL in the LinkTo attribute or set the

LinkToSource or LinkToTargetURL attributes to true.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

209

Toolbar

The Toolbar page allows you to configure the appearance of the toolbar. It contains the following:

Table 19. Toolbar Appearance

Element

Toolbar Skin Name

Show Filter Button at Top

Show New Item Button

Show Upload Button

Show Upload Button Type

Description

Allows you to enter the skin name for the toolbar.

Allows you to show the Filter/Search button as a top level button. If not selected, If set to false, the Filter/Search button is shown under the

Actions button.

Allows you to show the New Item button in the toolbar.

Allows you to show the Upload button in the toolbar.

When the Show Upload Button property is selected, the Show Upload

Button Type property will determine which upload button will be displayed in the toolbar. This property has three options: SingleFileUploadOnly,

MultipleFileUploadOnly, or SingleFileAndMultipleFileUpload.

NOTE: The Show Upload Button Type is available in SharePoint 2010 only.

Allows you to show the Folders button in the toolbar.

Allows you to show the Delete button in the toolbar.

Allows you to show the Replace button in the toolbar.

Show Folders Button

Show Delete Button

Show Replace Button

Show Copy/Move Button

Show Open with Windows Explorer

Button

Allows you to show the Copy/Move button in the toolbar.

Allows you to show the Open with Windows Explorer button in the toolbar.

Show Connect to Outlook Button Allows you to show the Connect to Outlook button in the toolbar. The

Connect To Outlook button lets users view their SharePoint lists in their

Microsoft Outlook Calendar. The Connect To Outlook button will work only if you have Microsoft Outlook installed in you computer and it only works for the SharePoint list.

Show Alert Me Button

Show Export Button

Show Print Button

Allows you to show the Alert Me button in the toolbar. The Alert Me button creates a list-level alert.

Allows you to show the Export button in the toolbar.

Allows you to show the Print button in the toolbar.

Context Menu

The Context Menu page allows you to set the look and feel of the context menu. It contains the following:

Table 20. Context Menu Appearance

Element

Enable Context Menu

Context Menu Method

Show View Properties

Show Edit Properties

Description

Allows you to show the context menu.

Allows you to define how the context menu is shown if the Enable Context Menu property is set to True. There are three options in this property:

• RightClick — The user can open the context menu by right clicking the row in the listview. This is the default option.

• ShowContextMenuColumn — The listview will show the context menu column. The context menu column shows a drop-down arrow image which will open the context menu when clicked.

• RightClickAndShowContextMenuColumn — The user can open the context menu either by right clicking the row or by using the context menu column.

Allows you to show the View Properties menu item in the context menu.

Allows you to show the Edit Properties menu item in the context menu.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

210

Table 20. Context Menu Appearance

Element Description

Show Delete Item Allows you to show the Delete Item menu item in the context menu.

Show Manage Permissions Allows you to show the Manage Permissions menu item in the context menu.

Show Alert Me

Show Version History

Show Workflows

Show Check Out

Allows you to show the Alert Me menu item in the context menu.

Allows you to show the Show Version History menu item in the context menu.

Allows you to show the Show Workflows menu item in the context menu.

Allows you to show the Show Check Out menu item in the context menu.

Show Check In Allows you to show the Show Check In menu item in the context menu.

Show Discard Check Out Allows you to show the Show Discard Check Out menu item in the context menu.

Show Edit Document

Show Edit in Browser

Allows you to show the Show Edit Document menu item in the context menu.

Allows you to show the Show Edit in Browser menu item in the context menu.

Show Download a Copy

Show Create Document

Workspace

Show Send Mail

Show Publish/Unpublish

Major Version

Allows you to show the Show Download a Copy menu item in the context menu.

Allows you to show the Show Create Document Workspace menu item in the context menu.

Allows you to show the Send Mail menu item in the context menu.

Allows you to show the Show Publish/Unpublish Major Version menu item in the context menu.

Folder Tree

The Folder Tree page allows you set the appearance of the Folder panel. It contains the following:

Table 21. Folder Tree

Element

Folder Tree Skin Name

Show Folder Tree on Page Load

Folder Tree Height

Description

Allows you to specify the skin name.

The folder tree is enabled if you select the Show Folders Button check box in the Toolbar Appearance tab.

If this check box and the Show Folders Button property are selected, the folder panel is initially expanded. This is convenient for your user if they use folders a lot in the lists or library.

Allows you to set the height of the folder panel in pixels. The default is

300.

Email Notification Editor

The Email Notification Editor allows you to set the appearance of rich text editor in the Send Email panel. It contains the following: www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

211

Table 22. Email Notification

Element

Rich Text Editor Skin

Name

Description

Allows you to specify the skin name for the rich text editor in the Send Email panel.

If you have a custom skin, you can add it to the following folder for SharePoint

2010:C:\Program Files\Common Files\Microsoft Shared\Web Server

Extensions\14\TEMPLATE\LAYOUTS\QuestSoftware\Telerik\Q32013SP1\Skins, for

SharePoint 2013: C:\Program Files\Common Files\Microsoft Shared\Web Server

Extensions\15\TEMPLATE\LAYOUTS\QuestSoftware\Telerik\Q32013SP1\Skins.

or for SharePoint 2016: C:\Program Files\Common Files\Microsoft Shared\Web Server

Extensions\16\TEMPLATE\LAYOUTS\QuestSoftware\Telerik\Q32013SP1\Skins.

When creating a custom skin, you can refer to the Sample Skin folder in the install directory.

Layout

The Layout page allows you to set the overall layout of the web part. It contains the following:

Table 23. Layout

Element

Width

Height

Chrome State

Chrome Type

Hidden

Direction

Description

Allows you to set the web part to a fixed width

Allows you to set the web part to a fixed height

Allows you to select if the web part can be minimized or not when you open the web part.

If Minimized is selected, then only the Title Bar displays.

Allows you to select the kind of border to display around the web part.

Select this check box if you want the web part hidden

Allows you to set how the text in the web part displays depending on the language, either from Left to Right or Right to Left

Other

The Other page allows you to set the appearance of other elements in the web part. It contains the following:

Table 24. Other

Element

New Item Panel Style

Allow Minimize

Allow Close

Allow Hide

Allow Zone Change

Allow Connections

Allow Editing in

Personal View

Export Mode

Description

Defines the style of the new item panel. The new item panel is displayed when you click the New button in the toolbar and there are multiple lists being aggregated in the view. The new item panel lets the user select which list the new item should be created into. There are two options for the style:

• Elaborate — the new item panel displays the list of possible content types for the list, the location and the description for the list. This is the default value.

• Compact — the new item panel displays the list of possible content types for the list but it does not display the location and the description for the list.

Select this check box if you want the web part minimized

Select this check box if you want the web part removed from the page

Select this check box if you want the web part hidden

Select this check box if you want the web part moved to a different zone

Select this check box if you want the web part to participate in connections to other web parts

Select this check box if you want the web part modified in a personal view

Allows you to select the level of data that can be exported for this web part www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

212

Table 24. Other

Element Description

Title URL

Description

Help URL

Help Mode

Allows you to add the title of a URL as extra information about the web part

Allows you to enter a description of the web part that is displayed as a Tooltip when you hover your mouse over the web part title or icon.

Allows you to enter the location of a file containing Help information about the web part.

Allows you to specify how a browser displays Help content for the web part, either in a separate window which you must close before returning to the Web Page (Mode), in a separate window that you do not need to close before returning to the Web Page

(Modeless), or in the current browser window (Navigate)

Catalog Icon Image

URL

Allows you to specify the location of a file containing an image to be used as the web part icon in the Web Part List. The image size must be 16 by 16 pixels.

Title Icon Image URL Allows you to specify the location of a file containing an image to be used in the web part title bar. The image size must be 16 by 16 pixels.

Import Error Message Allows you to specify a message that appears if there is a problem importing the web part

Advanced Page

The Advanced page allows you to set advanced features of the web part, such as the following:

•

•

•

•

Ajax

The AJAX page allows you to configure AJAX in your web part.It contains the following:

Table 25. AJAX

Element Description

Enable AJAX Allows you to enable AJAX for the listview. AJAX enables the listview to carry out some operations within the grid without refreshing the whole page. For example, when you sort a column by clicking its column header or change the page by clicking the pager, the listview only refreshes the data in the grid without causing the whole page to post back. However, there are times when AJAX causes some issues. In this case, you must disable the AJAX capability of the listview.

The following are some known situations where you need to disable AJAX:

• In Internet Explorer 6, the data grid will fail to carry out the AJAX operation. If your user base reports this issue, you can disable the AJAX to fix it.

• If you use javascript's document.write() method in the Results Body property of the

Query Settings

The Query Settings page allows you to set a query in the web part. It contains the following: www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

213

Table 26.

Element

Maximum Row

Count

Description

Determines the maximum number of rows that are retrieved from the list. As an example of when you may need to do this, when you want to show the last 5 documents that were modified recently. In this case, you will set the Maximum Row Count property to 5.

Most of the time when you use this property, turn off the paging feature and show all of the rows in one page. In this case, you need to set the Page Size property (in the Grid Appearance page) to a bigger number than in the Maximum Row Count property.

Security

The Security page allows you to set which users are allowed to view the web part. It contains the following:

Table 27. Security

Element

Show User

Groups

Hide User

Groups

Target

Audiences

Description

Allows you to list SharePoint groups whose members can view the web part. Separate groups with commas.

Allows you to list SharePoint groups whose members cannot view the Web Part. Separate site group names with commas (for example, Administrators, Readers).

If a user is a member of a group that is defined in both Show User Groups and Hide User

Groups, the user cannot view the Web Part.

Allows you to have the Web Part to appear only to people who are members of a particular group or audience.

An audience can be identified by using a SharePoint group, a distribution list, a security group, or a global audience.

Resources

elements in the web part using resource lists.

Localization

Localization contains the following elements.

NOTE:

While this feature is still available to use, we recommend using ezLocalizer. For more information, see ezLocalizer on page 341 .

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

214

Table 28. Localization

Element

Resource List

Description

Allows you to support a multi-lingual site. In a multi-lingual site, there are some settings, such as the Web Part , whose value can change depending on the current culture setting.

The Resource List property defines the list that contains the string values for different cultures. The resource list must contain 3 columns:

• Resource ID — This field contains the identifier to refer to the string. You can have multiple strings with the same Resource ID as long as their Culture value is different.

• Culture — This field contains the culture for the string. For the default culture, leave the Culture field blank.

• Value — This field contains the value for the string.

The Lists element can contain only one List element. The following are the attributes for the List element:

• SiteUrl — The URL to the site that contains the resource list. The URL can be absolute (http://...) or relative to the current page URL. This attribute is mandatory.

• ListName — The name of the resource List. The list name is case sensitive.

Title Resource ID Allows you to support a multi-lingual site. The property defines the identifier of the string in the Resource List that is used as the text of the Web Part. The Resource ID and the current cultural setting (identified with the Culture HTTP parameter) are used to retrieve the string in the Resource List. If the string with the given identifier and culture is not found, the default is used.

View Properties

Context Menu

Text Resource ID

By default, the text for the View Properties context menu is retrieved from the resource file that is included in the product. If the resource file is not available, define the text for the

View Properties context menu item in the Resource List and specify its Resource ID. This

Edit Properties

Context Menu

Text Resource ID

Delete Item

Context Menu

Text Resource ID

By default, the text for the Edit Properties context menu is retrieved from the resource file that is included in the product. If the resource file is not available, define the text for the

Edit Properties context menu item in the Resource List and specify its Resource ID. This

By default, the text for the Delete Item context menu is retrieved from the resource file that is included in the product. If the resource file is not available, define the text for the

Delete Item context menu item in the Resource List and specify its Resource ID. This

Manage

Permissions

Context Menu

Text Resource ID

By default, the text for the Manage Permissions context menu is retrieved from the resource file that is included in the product. If the resource file is not available, define the text for the Manage Permissions context menu item in the Resource List and specify its

Resource ID. This Resource ID and the current cultural setting (identified with the Culture

HTTP parameter) are used to retrieve the string in the Resource List. If the string with the given identifier and culture is not found, the default text from the invariant resource file is used.

Alert Me Context

Menu Text

Resource ID

By default, the text for the Alert Me context menu is retrieved from the resource file that is included in the product. If the resource file is not available, define the text for the Alert Me context menu item in the Resource List and specify its Resource ID. This Resource ID and the current cultural setting (identified with the Culture HTTP parameter) are used to retrieve the string in the Resource List. If the string with the given identifier and culture is not found, the default text from the invariant resource file is used.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

215

Table 28. Localization

Element

Version History

Context Menu

Resource ID

Workflows

Context Menu

Text Resource ID

Check Out

Context Menu

Text Resource ID

Check In Context

Menu Text

Resource ID

Undo Check Out

Context Menu

Text Resource ID

Edit Document

Context Menu

Text Resource ID

Edit in Browser

Context Menu

Text Resource ID

Download Copy

Context Menu

Text Resource ID

Description

By default, the text for the Version History context menu is retrieved from the resource file that is included in the product. If the resource file is not available, define the text for the

Version History context menu item in the Resource List and specify its Resource ID. This

By default, the text for the Workflows context menu is retrieved from the resource file that is included in the product. If the resource file is not available, define the text for the

Workflows context menu item in the Resource List and specify its Resource ID. This Resource

ID and the current cultural setting (identified with the Culture HTTP parameter) are used to retrieve the string in the Resource List. If the string with the given identifier and culture is not found, the default text from the invariant resource file is used.

By default, the text for the Check Out context menu is retrieved from the resource file that is included in the product. If the resource file is not available, define the text for the Check

Out context menu item in the Resource List and specify its Resource ID. This Resource ID and the current cultural setting (identified with the Culture HTTP parameter) are used to retrieve the string in the Resource List. If the string with the given identifier and culture is not found, the default text from the invariant resource file is used.

By default, the text for the Check In context menu is retrieved from the resource file that is included in the product. If the resource file is not available, define the text for the Check In context menu item in the Resource List and specify its Resource ID. This Resource ID and the current cultural setting (identified with the Culture HTTP parameter) are used to retrieve the string in the Resource List. If the string with the given identifier and culture is not found, the default text from the invariant resource file is used.

By default, the text for the Undo Check Out context menu is retrieved from the resource file that is included in the product. If the resource file is not available, define the text for the Undo Check Out Context Menu in the Resource List and specify its Resource ID. This

By default, the text for the Edit Document context menu is retrieved from the resource file that is included in the product. If the resource file is not available, define the text for the

Edit Document context menu in the Resource List and specify its Resource ID. This Resource

By default, the text for the Edit in Browser context menu is retrieved from the resource file that is included in the product. If the resource file is not available, define the text for the

Edit in Browser context menu in the Resource List and specify its Resource ID. This Resource

By default, the text for the Download Copy context menu is retrieved from the resource file that is included in the product. If the resource file in the culture that you want to use is not available, define the text for the Download Copy in the Resource List and specify its

Resource ID. This Resource ID and the current cultural setting (identified with the Culture

HTTP parameter) are used to retrieve the string in the Resource List. If the string with the given identifier and culture is not found, the default text from the invariant resource file is used.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

216

Table 28. Localization

Element

Create

Document

Workspace

Context Menu

Text Resource ID

Send Email

Context Menu

Text Resource ID

Action Button

Text Resource ID

Filter Button

Text Resource ID

New Button Text

Resource ID

Upload Button

Text Resource ID

Upload

Document

Button Text

Resource ID

Upload Multiple

Documents

Button Text

Resource ID

Description

By default, the text for the Create Document Workspace context menu is retrieved from the resource file that is included in the product. If the resource file is not available, define the text for the Create Document Workspace context menu in the Resource List and specify its

Resource ID. This Resource ID and the current cultural setting (identified with the Culture

HTTP parameter) are used to retrieve the string in the Resource List. If the string with the given identifier and culture is not found, the default text from the invariant resource file is used.

By default, the text for the Send Email context menu is retrieved from the resource file that is included in the product. If the resource file is not available, define the text for the

Send Email context menu in the Resource List and specify its Resource ID. This Resource ID and the current cultural setting (identified with the Culture HTTP parameter) are used to retrieve the string in the Resource List. If the string with the given identifier and culture is not found, the default text from the invariant resource file is used.

Resource List and specify its Resource ID here. This Resource ID and the current cultural setting (identified with the Culture HTTP parameter) are used to retrieve the string in the

Resource List. If the string with the given identifier and culture is not found, the default text from the invariant resource file is used.

Resource List and specify its Resource ID here. This Resource ID and the current cultural setting (identified with the Culture HTTP parameter) are used to retrieve the string in the

Resource List. If the string with the given identifier and culture is not found, the default text from the invariant resource file is used.

By default, the text for the New toolbar button is retrieved from the resource file that is included in the product. However, we may not have the resource file in the culture that you want to use. In this case, you can simply define the text for the New toolbar button in the

Resource List and specify its Resource ID here. This Resource ID and the current cultural setting (identified with the Culture HTTP parameter) are used to retrieve the string in the

Resource List. If the string with the given identifier and culture is not found, the default text from the invariant resource file is used.

By default, the text for the Upload toolbar button is retrieved from the resource file that is included in the product. However, we may not have the resource file in the culture that you want to use. In this case, you can simply define the text for the View in Chart toolbar button in the Resource List and specify its Resource ID here. This Resource ID and the current cultural setting (identified with the Culture HTTP parameter) are used to retrieve the string in the Resource List. If the string with the given identifier and culture is not found, the default text from the invariant resource file is used.

By default, the text for the Upload Documents toolbar button is retrieved from the resource file that is included in the product. However, we may not have the resource file in the culture that you want to use. In this case, you can simply define the text for the Upload

Documents toolbar button in the Resource List and specify its Resource ID here. This

By default, the text for the Upload Multiple Documents toolbar button is retrieved from the resource file that is included in the product. However, we may not have the resource file in the culture that you want to use. In this case, you can simply define the text for the Upload

Multiple Documents toolbar button in the Resource List and specify its Resource ID here.

This Resource ID and the current cultural setting (identified with the Culture HTTP parameter) are used to retrieve the string in the Resource List. If the string with the given identifier and culture is not found, the default text from the invariant resource file is used.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

217

Table 28. Localization

Element

Delete Button

Text Resource ID

Show Folders

Button Text

Resource ID

Replace Button

Text Resource ID

Copy Move

Button Text

Resource ID

Open with

Windows

Explorer Button

Text Resource ID

Connect to

Outlook Button

Text Resource ID

Alert Me Button

Text Resource ID

Export Button

Text Resource ID

Description

By default, the text for the Delete toolbar button is retrieved from the resource file that is included in the product. However, we may not have the resource file in the culture that you want to use. In this case, you can simply define the text for the Delete toolbar button in the

Resource List and specify its Resource ID here. This Resource ID and the current cultural setting (identified with the Culture HTTP parameter) are used to retrieve the string in the

Resource List. If the string with the given identifier and culture is not found, the default text from the invariant resource file is used.

By default, the text for the Show Folders toolbar button is retrieved from the resource file that is included in the product. However, we may not have the resource file in the culture that you want to use. In this case, you can simply define the text for the Show Folders toolbar button in the Resource List and specify its Resource ID here. This Resource ID and the current cultural setting (identified with the Culture HTTP parameter) are used to retrieve the string in the Resource List. If the string with the given identifier and culture is not found, the default text from the invariant resource file is used.

By default, the text for the Replace toolbar button is retrieved from the resource file that is included in the product. However, we may not have the resource file in the culture that you want to use. In this case, you can simply define the text for the Replace toolbar button in the Resource List and specify its Resource ID here. This Resource ID and the current cultural setting (identified with the Culture HTTP parameter) are used to retrieve the string in the

Resource List. If the string with the given identifier and culture is not found, the default text from the invariant resource file is used.

By default, the text for the Copy Move toolbar button is retrieved from the resource file that is included in the product. However, we may not have the resource file in the culture that you want to use. In this case, you can simply define the text for the Copy Move toolbar button in the Resource List and specify its Resource ID here. This Resource ID and the current cultural setting (identified with the Culture HTTP parameter) are used to retrieve the string in the Resource List. If the string with the given identifier and culture is not found, the default text from the invariant resource file is used.

By default, the text for the Open with Windows Explorer toolbar button is retrieved from the resource file that is included in the product. However, we may not have the resource file in the culture that you want to use. In this case, you can simply define the text for the

Open with Windows Explorer toolbar button in the Resource List and specify its Resource ID here. This Resource ID and the current cultural setting (identified with the Culture HTTP parameter) are used to retrieve the string in the Resource List. If the string with the given identifier and culture is not found, the default text from the invariant resource file is used.

By default, the text for the Connect to Outlook toolbar button is retrieved from the resource file that is included in the product. If the resource file is not available, define the text for the Connect to Outlook toolbar button in the Resource List and specify its Resource

ID. This Resource ID and the current cultural setting (identified with the Culture HTTP parameter) are used to retrieve the string in the Resource List. If the string with the given identifier and culture is not found, the default text from the invariant resource file is used.

By default, the text for the Alert Me toolbar button is retrieved from the resource file that is included in the product. However, we may not have the resource file in the culture that you want to use. In this case, you can simply define the text for the Alert Me toolbar button in the Resource List and specify its Resource ID here. This Resource ID and the current cultural setting (identified with the Culture HTTP parameter) are used to retrieve the string in the Resource List. If the string with the given identifier and culture is not found, the default text from the invariant resource file is used.

Resource List and specify its Resource ID here. This Resource ID and the current cultural setting (identified with the Culture HTTP parameter) are used to retrieve the string in the

Resource List. If the string with the given identifier and culture is not found, the default text from the invariant resource file is used.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

218

Table 28. Localization

Element

Print Button Text

Resource ID

View in Excel

Button Text

Resource ID

View in Chart

Button Text

Resource ID

Description

Resource List and specify its Resource ID here. This Resource ID and the current cultural setting (identified with the Culture HTTP parameter) are used to retrieve the string in the

Resource List. If the string with the given identifier and culture is not found, the default text from the invariant resource file is used.

By default, the text for the View in Excel toolbar button is retrieved from the resource file that is included in the product. However, we may not have the resource file in the culture that you want to use. In this case, you can simply define the text for the View in Excel toolbar button in the Resource List and specify its Resource ID here. This Resource ID and the current cultural setting (identified with the Culture HTTP parameter) are used to retrieve the string in the Resource List. If the string with the given identifier and culture is not found, the default text from the invariant resource file is used.

By default, the text for the View in Chart toolbar button is retrieved from the resource file that is included in the product. However, we may not have the resource file in the culture that you want to use. In this case, you can simply define the text for the View in Chart toolbar button in the Resource List and specify its Resource ID here. This Resource ID and the current cultural setting (identified with the Culture HTTP parameter) are used to retrieve the string in the Resource List. If the string with the given identifier and culture is not found, the default text from the invariant resource file is used.

qListView Procedures

You can perform the following procedures using qListView:

•

Configuring Basic Settings using the Configuration Wizard

•

Configuring a Basic ListView with Filters using ezEdit

Configuring Basic Settings using the Configuration

Wizard

To configure basic settings

1 Add qListView to your page.

2 Select the ezWizard menu item from the qListView Web Part Menu or Ribbon.

3 Select one or more lists, from the current site, whose data you want to view, and click Next.

4 Select the fields you want displayed and the order you want them displayed. Click Next.

If you want to change your selections, select Previous.

5 Click Finish.

NOTE: Once a Web Part is configured, the ezWizard item will not appear on the Web Part Menu or the Web Part

Ribbon.

Configuring a Basic ListView with Filters using ezEdit

To configure basic List View with filters

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

219

1 Open ezEdit.

2 From the Content page, select Primary Content.

3 Replace the default title with a new one.

4 Select Edit from the Viewed List section.

This section is populated with lists selected when you configured basic settings.

5 If you want to

Add a list

Edit a list that is already displayed then

Click Add List to find a list.

1 Enter the Site URL or if using a relative URL, you can use a single dot (.) to denote the current path, a double dot (..) to denote the previous path, and a slash (/) to denote the root path.

2 Select Search Subsites check box.

3 Click Get Lists.

4 Select the lists that you want to use and click OK.

5 Click Save.

Click Edit next to the name of a list.

If you want to include a child list, select Add Child List.

If you want to include a dependent list, select Add Dependent

List.

6 From the Display Fields section, click Edit.

a Select the Field Names that you wish to display.

b If you want, click Edit to edit any of the fields.

c Click Save.

7 Select the Search/Filter/Replace page.

8 Click Edit in Searched Fields, and select some field names on which you want to filter your web part.

Click OK.

9 Click OK again.

A basic List View displays. Click Actions | Filter to filter the web part based on the fields selected in step 8.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

220

qManagement

• Overview

• qManagement Pages

•

qManagement Procedures

Overview

qManagement allows you to view and manage your web parts in one location. From qManagement, you can:

• easily view and explore the hierarchy of the site where qManagement is located and its subsites

• search for one or more web parts by type or by property

• replace a property value with another one to one or more web parts

• display your search and replace results in a table view

• open ezEdit in the table view

NOTE: When you perform a search and replace, you will not see the ezEdit icon in the table view if you do not have proper permissions.

In order to see all sites and subsites in qManagement, you must have administrator permissions. If you do not have administrator permissions, some sites and subsites may not be displayed.

qManagement Pages

You can configure this web part through its tabs that are accessible through ezEdit. qManagement contains the following tabs:

•

•

•

Content Page

When you open ezEdit in qManagement, the Content Page opens by default, and contains the following:

•

•

Paging

Primary Content

The Primary Content page is default category. You need to configure one or more elements in this page to get started using this web part.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

221

Primary Content contains the following:

Table 1. Primary Content

Element

Title

Description

Allows you to enter a title for the web part.

Paging

Table 2. Paging

Element

Paging

Description

Allows you to set:

• Paging Mode - the type of pager that is displayed at the bottom of qManagement if the items must be divided into multiple pages.

Page Size - the maximum number of rows that is displayed in one page. If the number of rows is larger than the Page Size, the data is divided into several pages. You can navigate the pages using the Pager displayed at the bottom of qManagement.

Appearance Page

The Appearance page allows you to set the overall look and feel of the web part. This page contains the following:

•

•

Grid

•

• Other

Ribbon

The Ribbon page allows you to set the display name of the Ribbon.

Table 3. Ribbon

Element

SharePoint Ribbon Tab

Name

Description

Allows you to edit the display name of the Ribbon tab.

Grid

The Grid page allows you set the appearance of the grid in the web part.

The Grid contains the following: www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

222

Table 4. Grid

Element

Skin Name

Description

Allows you to select the skin name for the grid in the listview. If you have a custom skin, you can add it to the following folder for SharePoint 2010:C:\Program Files\Common

Files\Microsoft Shared\Web Server

Extensions\14\TEMPLATE\LAYOUTS\QuestSoftware\Telerik\Q32013SP1\Skins, for SharePoint

2013: C:\Program Files\Common Files\Microsoft Shared\Web Server

Extensions\15\TEMPLATE\LAYOUTS\QuestSoftware\Telerik\Q32013SP1\Skins or for SharePoint

2016: C:\Program Files\Common Files\Microsoft Shared\Web Server

Extensions\16\TEMPLATE\LAYOUTS\QuestSoftware\Telerik\Q32013SP1\Skins.

When creating a custom skin, you can refer to the Sample Skin folder in the install directory.

Layout

The Layout page allows you to set the overall layout of the web part. It contains the following:

Table 5. Layout

Element

Width

Height

Chrome State

Chrome Type

Hidden

Direction

Description

Allows you to set the web part to a fixed width

Allows you to set the web part to a fixed height

Allows you to select if the web part can be minimized or not when you open the web part.

If Minimized is selected, then only the Title Bar displays.

Allows you to select the kind of border to display around the web part.

Select this check box if you want the web part hidden

Allows you to set how the text in the web part displays depending on the language, either from Left to Right or Right to Left

Other

The Other page allows you to set the appearance of other elements in the web part. It contains the following:

Table 6. Other

Element

Allow Minimize

Allow Close

Allow Hide

Allow Zone Change

Allow Connections

Description

Select this check box if you want the web part minimized

Select this check box if you want the web part removed from the page

Select this check box if you want the web part hidden

Select this check box if you want the web part moved to a different zone

Select this check box if you want the web part to participate in connections to other web parts

Allow Editing in Personal View Select this check box if you want the web part modified in a personal view

Export Mode Allows you to select the level of data that can be exported for this web part

Title URL

Description

Help URL

Allows you to add the title of a URL as extra information about the web part

Allows you to enter a description of the web part that is displayed as a Tooltip when you hover your mouse over the web part title or icon.

Allows you to enter the location of a file containing Help information about the web part. www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

223

Table 6. Other

Element

Help Mode

Catalog Icon Image URL

Title Icon Image URL

Import Error Message

Description

Allows you to specify how a browser displays Help content for the web part, either in a separate window which you must close before returning to the

Web Page (Mode), in a separate window that you do not need to close before returning to the Web Page (Modeless), or in the current browser window

(Navigate)

Allows you to specify the location of a file containing an image to be used as the web part icon in the Web Part List. The image size must be 16 by 16 pixels.

Allows you to specify the location of a file containing an image to be used in the web part title bar. The image size must be 16 by 16 pixels.

Allows you to specify a message that appears if there is a problem importing the web part www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

224

Advanced Page

The Advanced page allows you to set advanced features of the web part, such as the following:

•

Ajax

•

Setting New Property Values

Ajax

The AJAX page allows you to configure AJAX in your web part.It contains the following:

Table 7. AJAX

Element Description

The following are some known situations where you need to disable AJAX:

• In Internet Explorer 6, the data grid will fail to carry out the AJAX operation. If your user base reports this issue, you can disable the AJAX to fix it.

• If you use javascript's document.write() method in the Results Body property of the Custom Display, the text that is generated using document.write() will not be rendered after the AJAX operation. This is true even if you do not call the document.write() directly within the Results Body but rather through another javascript function that calls document.write().

Security

The Security page allows you to set which users are allowed to view the web part. It contains the following:

Table 8. Security

Element

Show User

Groups

Hide User

Groups

Target

Audiences

Description

Allows you to list SharePoint groups whose members can view the web part. Separate groups with commas.

Allows you to list SharePoint groups whose members cannot view the web part. Separate site group names with commas (for example, Administrators, Readers).

NOTE: If a user is a member of a group that is defined in both Show User Groups and Hide User

Groups, the user cannot view the web part.

Allows you to have the Web Part to appear only to people who are members of a particular group or audience.

An audience can be identified by using a SharePoint group, a distribution list, a security group, or a global audience.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

225

Table 9. Display

Element

Enable AJAX

Skin Name

Description

When checked, allows you to enable AJAX for qManagement to carry out some operations within the web part without refreshing the whole page. For example, when you sort a column by clicking its column header or change the page by clicking the pager, qManagement only refreshes the data in the grid without causing the whole page to post back.

AJAX must be disabled in Internet Explorer 6, the data grid will fail to carry out the

AJAX operation. If a user reports this issue, you can disable the AJAX to fix it.

NOTE: You must enable AJAX to set an AJAX timeout value.

Allows you to select the skin name for the web part. If you have a custom skin, you can add it to the following folder for SharePoint 2010:C:\Program Files\Common

Files\Microsoft Shared\Web Server

Extensions\14\TEMPLATE\LAYOUTS\QuestSoftware\Telerik\Q32013SP1\Skins, for

SharePoint 2013: C:\Program Files\Common Files\Microsoft Shared\Web Server

Extensions\15\TEMPLATE\LAYOUTS\QuestSoftware\Telerik\Q32013SP1\Skins or for

SharePoint 2016: C:\Program Files\Common Files\Microsoft Shared\Web Server

Extensions\16\TEMPLATE\LAYOUTS\QuestSoftware\Telerik\Q32013SP1\Skins.

When creating a custom skin, you can refer to the Sample Skin folder in the install directory.

qManagement Procedures

You can perform the following procedures using qManagement:

•

Configuring qManagement

•

Exploring Web Parts

•

Searching Web Parts

•

Configuring qManagement

To configure qManagement

1 Add qManagement to your page.

2 Open ezEdit.

The Primary Content page opens by default.

3 Select the following:

• if you want to enable AJAX

• if you want to wait a specified amount of time for the result of an AJAX asynchronous postback operation

• the skin name

• if you want to display the web part to certain user groups

• if you want to hide the web part from certain user groups

4 Click OK.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

226

Exploring Web Parts

Once qManagement is configured, the Explorer View opens by default. The Explorer View shows the site where qManagement is located as the root node, and all its subsites as child nodes. From the Explorer View, you can:

• open a SharePoint web part page

• open ezEdit

• delete a web part

• get more details about the web part, such as web part type, web part product, and version number.

NOTE: The actions available in the treeview depend on your SharePoint permissions.

Searching Web Parts

You can search a list of specific web parts by selecting web part names only or selecting web part names and entering property values.

To search Web Parts

1 Open qManagement, and click Search.

2 Select a web part type.

Click the ... button to select a single web part type or multiple web part types.

3 Select a web part property.

The web part properties displayed depend on the web part type selected. If you have selected multiple web part types, then the common web part properties are displayed.

4 Select a search condition, and enter a property value.

These steps are optional.

5 Click Go.

The results is displayed in a table showing the following:

• Web Part title

• Web Part type

• the path where the web part is located

• an Edit icon which opens ezEdit for the found web part. You will not see the ezEdit icon if you do not have proper permissions.

Setting New Property Values

NOTE: Setting new property values in your web parts using qManagement may take a long time. If it times out, you can increase the time-out value in the Web.Config file by setting the executionTimeout attribute.

NOTE: This new time-out value is automatically applied to any web part that is on the same page as qManagement, and has an AJAX operation enabled.

TIP: Because it can take a long time, set new property values during off-peak hours. If you want to see which web parts are affected by setting new values, perform a search first. You can search and replace properties in Web Parts only.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

227

To set new property values

1 Open qManagement, and click Replace.

2 Select a web part type.

Click the ... button to open a dialog that allows you to select a single web part type or multiple web part types.

3 Select a web part property.

The web part properties displayed depend on the web part type selected. If you have selected multiple web part types, the common web part properties are displayed.

4 Select a search condition, and enter a property value.

These steps are optional.

5 Enter a new property value.

NOTE: Ensure you enter the applicable value you want set to a new value.

For example, if you enter the following:

• Web Part Type = qListView

• Web Part Property = Title

• Search Condition = Contains

• Property Value = Financial Department Web Part

• Set Property Value to = Human Resources

• The new value is Human Resources, not Human Resources Web Part.

NOTE: If you enter invalid values in the Web Parts property, that Web Part may become inoperable. If you leave this value blank, the old property value is replaced with a blank value.

6 Click Go.

NOTE: When you set a new property value, it cannot be undone.

The results is displayed in a table showing the following:

• the total number of results, including the number that have succeeded and/or failed

• Web Part title

• Web Part type

• the path where the Web Part is located

• an Edit icon which opens ezEdit for the found Web Part. You will not see the ezEdit icon if you do not have proper permissions.

• a status showing if setting the new property value succeeded or failed. If you see a Failed status,

you can click Failed to see an error message of why the action failed.

TIP: If you want to print your results, export the results to an Excel spreadsheet first.

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

228

qMediaView

•

•

qMediaView Pages

Overview

qMediaView provides support for the SharePoint Picture and Asset Libraries. The Picture Library provides the ability to upload and share pictures in SharePoint. The Asset Library provides the same ability but with all your digital assets such as images, audio, video, and other content from many applications.

VIDEO: Playing audio and video files requires Microsoft Silverlight. To download, go to http://www.microsoft.com/getsilverlight/Get-Started/Install/Default.aspx

. Make sure the status of Microsoft Silverlight is enabled in Internet Explorer’s Add-ons Manager.

To enable Silverlight in Internet Explorer Add-ons Manager

1 Click Tools | Manage Add-ons.

2 Select All add-ons.

3 Select Enabled for Microsoft Silverlight in the Add-on list. qMediaView allows you to:

• provides the ability to manage multiple media type resources in SharePoint

• aggregate media from multiple picture libraries and asset libraries from various SharePoint sites

• select one or more audio or video files and play them consecutively in a playlist fashion

• view the media in several different ways: List, Metadata, Slide Show, Image Gallery

• navigate the folder structures using breadcrumb navigation. The breadcrumb is displayed in between the ribbon button and the picture library view. The breadcrumb navigation bar is displayed as All >>

Site/Picture Library Name >> Folder Name >> Subfolder Name. When there are multiple libraries defined in Viewed List property, the Root node "All" is displayed allowing you to navigate to the aggregated view of the all picture libraries' root folder structure.

• divide the data into multiple pages to limit their size and render pages faster, known as Paging

• define the dynamic filter or search criteria using the Filter panel, and supports the List Searcher mode in the Media View

qMediaView Pages

You can configure this web part through its pages that are accessible through ezEdit. qMediaView contains the following pages:

•

•

•

www.agreeya.com

QuickApps for SharePoint ® 6.8

User Guide

229

Content Page

The Content page allows you to enter the content for your web part. It contains the following:

•